Fanuc Fapt For PC Operator

GE Fanuc Automation
Computer Numerical Control Products
FAPT Ladder for PC
Operators Manual
B-66131EN/05 Japan 1995
Warnings and notices for this publication

Warning
GFLE-003
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible.
Notice
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply. The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation CIMPLICITY Genius
The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation Alarm Master CIMSTAR Field Control Genet Helpmate LogicMaster Modelmaster PowerMotion ProLoop PROMACRO Series Five Series 90 Series One Series Six Series Three VuMaster Workmaster
Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd. Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.
All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
I.
BASICS
(NORMAL
OPERATIONS) l-1
1.
OVERVIEW
......................................................
2.
INSTALLATION 2.1 Operating 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2
................................................... .......................................... Environment environment environment ............... ........................... ._f .............
1-5 1- 6 1- 7 l-10 l-11
PC9801 operating
IBM PC/AT operating Procedure
Installation
..........................................
3.
ACTIVATION
....................................................
l-15
4.
BASICOPERATION 4.1 4.2 4.3
..q ....................... ........................................... Menu Configuration ..................................... Common System Operations Model Setting ................................................
.....................
l-17 l-17 l-19 l-21
5.
OPERATION 5.1 Editing 5.1 .l 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.4 5.1.5 5.1.6 5.2 5.3 Printout
.................................................... ..................................................... Title data editing ........................................ ...................................
l-22 l-22 l-25 l-26 l-60 l-68 l-70 l-73 l-85 1 - 94 l-95
Ladder diagram editing
............................... Symbol and comment editing ........................................ Message editing I0 module editing ....................................... .................................
System parameter editing
.................................................... ................................................. ............................................. set function .............
Compilation 5.3.1 5.3.2
Operation Password
(PMCRAlRA3/RB3/RB4RB5/RB6/RC3!RC4/NB!NB2) 5.3.3 5.3.4 Changing the Order of Subprograms .........................
l-99
1 - 103
It is possible to choose output data (Symbol/Comment. Net comment) to ROM format file ............. l-103 l-105 l-109 l-110 l-110 l-112 to the model ....... 1-113 1-113 l-116 ................................ The list of source program ........................................ DOS command .............................................. ............................................ to split files ................................... program according Operation Outputting Converting Merge
5.3.5 5.3.6 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.5 Link
Decompilation
a step sequence
..............................................
......................................................
5.6 InputiOutput. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer) Transfer Transfer Transfer to and from PMC-L/M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AB.C.!E) A, . .
l-119 1-122 1-124 1-128 131
(FANUC Series 0)
to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL to and from PMC-N!NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL
-MODELB) 56.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.7 input/Output Transfer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . for PMC-QA (FANUC SYSTEM F-MODEL D Mate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and memory card . . . ................. . . . . .
l-
1-134 l-140 1-142 1-147 1-149 l-150 l-150 l-152 1-153 1-157 1-166 l-170 1-171
to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB!QC in the personal computer format)
Memory card interface
Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS FLOPPY CASSETTE Editing ADAPTER
+ 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)
Mnemonic 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . of a source program to a mnemonic of a mnemonic file format file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Conversion Mnemonic
file to a source program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is selected when setting a model
Sample mnemonic Sample mnemonic
files (single-format) files (all-format)
The note if the step sequence User batch file execution
function
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
II.
APPLICATIONS
(NOTES
ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT) .................. .................. 2-l 2-l 2-l 2-2 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-8 2-9 ............ 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-14 2-14 ................... 2-14 2-15 2-16 2-16
1. COMMON 1.1 1.l .l 1.1.2
OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCAT Data between the P-G and PC ...............................
Function for Transferring Command
input during startup settings
Communications Protocol
...................................
1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 1.2
............................................... ........................................... ................................... ............................... ............................... ............................... ................................. Program editing .......................... ........................ ..........................
BUSY control
Data start and end codes Data conversion Transmission Error detection Error detection
(return codes)
and receive data and messages and handling
Convert the PMC Type of Sequence 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 Converting
by system parameter
Convert with signal address converter Using data in a sequence
program for another program
1.3 1.4
Standard Symbol Data Changing 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3
......................................... ................................... name ..........................
Printer Output Format
Changing
the paper selection
Setting the top margin
.................................... the LADDER net
Setting the spacing between
1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper 1.4.5 1.4.6 Setting the line spacing Setting the left margin
.......................
................................... ....................................
1.4.7 1.4.8 1.4.9 1.4.10 1.4.11 1.4.12 1.4.13 1.4.14 1.4.15 1.4.16 1.4.17 1.4.18 1.4.19
Setting the title of printout Setting the cross-reference Setting the cross-reference Specifying
................................. list output format guidance list output information list output format information ....
2-19 2 - 19 2 - 20 2 - 20 .... 2-21 2-21 2 - 21 2 - 22 2-22 2-22 2 - 23 2-23 2-23
................ ................. information
the cross-reference
Setting the cross-reference Specifying Specifying
list readiwrite list linefeed
coil guidance
the cross-reference the cross-reference
..................... ...................
list page break ...............................
Setting the output format guidance Setting the output information Setting the output format
...........................
.................................. ...........................
Setting the read/write coil guidance Setting line feed Setting form feed
........................................ .......................................
III.THE
STEP SEQUENCE
FUNCTIONS 3-l 3-l 3- 1 3- 1 3- 2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-6 3- 6 3- 9 3- 9 3 - 10
1.
OVERVIEW 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5
...................................................... ....................................... .........................
WhatisaStepSequence? Programming
with the Step Sequence Method ................................... A Program Configuration Screen ............................. The Configration of a Sequence Program DataFlow
2.
................................................... SETTING A MODEL ................................................ 2.1 Operation .................................................... EDITING 3.1 3.2 ........................................................ ............................................... .......................................
3.
Basic Operation
Creating a Step Sequence 3.2.1 3.2.2
Creating a subprogram
..................... of the step sequence ........................... Creating a step sequence program
APPENDIX
APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX APPENDIX
1 DATA TRANSFER 2 FUNCTION
CABLES
.................................. THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM ............
Al - 1 A2 - 1 A3 - 1 ONLY) ............ ......... NB, AND QC) A4 - 1 A5 - 1 A6 - 1 A7............... 1
FOR OPERATING
3 ERROR MESSAGES 4 MODULAR
...................................... (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 PROCEDURE (FOR THE FS20)
PROGRAMMING OPERATING
5 BOOT SYSTEM 6 MEMORY 7 CAUTIONS
CARD COMPATIBILITY FOR USING THE O/S MESSAGE TABLE
(FOR THE PMC-RAl!RA3, ............................. DATA (CHGMES)
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING 9 SOFTWARE lOMANAGING 11 SYSTEM VERSION A SOURCE
A8 - 1 A9 - 1 AlO1
................................ .......................... .............
PROGRAM
CONFIGURATION
FILE %%?oFLSET.CNF..
Al 1 - 1 A121
12 INQUIRY FORM
.........................................
I.
BASICS
(NORMAL OPERATIONS)
1. OVERVIEW
1. OVERVIEW
This manual describes offline programming are designed the software system products listed below which are included sequence program in the FAPT LADDER These software
for FANUC
PMC
generation.
products
to run on standard personal computers.
Personal computer JEC PC9801
Name FAPT LADDER PMC-L/M/P FAPT LADDER PMC-N FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/RC
Specification A08B-9200-J500#JP A08B-9200-J501 #JP
Remarks For the NEC PC9801 Series and compatible machines language (Japanese version)
A08B-9200-J502#JP
BM PC/AT
FAPT LADDER PMC-UM/P FAPT LADDER PMC-N FAPT LADDER PMC-RB/RC
A08B-9201 -JSOO#EN A08B-9201-J501#EN A08B-9201-J502#EN
For IBM PC/AT and compatible machines
(English language version)
This manual explains are specific
procedures
required
to install, activate,
and operate the software computers.
above that and
to the system
designed
for use with personal
For PMC operations
how to create PMC sequence
programs,
refer to the manuals listed below.
FANUC PMC-MODEL
K/UM!P Manual (LADDER language) B-551 93E
Programming FANUC PMC-MODEL N
Programming FANUC PMC-MODEL
Manual (LADDER language)
B-61013E
PA1 :PA3:RAl RA2!RA3/RBRB2!RB3iRB4!RBSRBG;RC!RC3RC4!NBNB2 Manual (LADDER language) B-61 863E
Programming
Inquiry form If you have any questions after reading this operators at Appendix 12 to consult manual and the manuals us the questions. listed above,
use the inquiry form attached
l-l
1. OVERVIEW
The following
abbreviations
are used in this manual for PMC models.
Abbreviations PMC-UM!P * PMC-L * PMC-M * PMC-P Pfk-N PMC-R Series * PMC-RAl * PMC-RA2 * PMC-RA3 PMC-RB PMCRB2 ._ *
PMC Models
FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL
L M P N
FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PM&MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL FANUC PMC-MODEL
RAl RA2 RA3 RB RB2 RB3 RB4 RB5 RB6 RC RC3 RC4 PA1 PA3 QA QC NA NB NB2
* PMC-RB3 . PMC-RB4 PMC-RB5 PMC-RC
* PMC-RB6
* PMGRC3 * PMCRC4 PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-QA PMC-QC PMC-NA PMC-NB PMC-NB2
1-2
1. OVERVIEW
The major functions
of the software are listed below.
(1) Sequence program input. display, and editing (2) Transmission to and from PMC (RAM), and PMC verification
(3) ROM (EPROM, (4) Sequence ROM cassette, and ROM modules) write, read, and verification program print-out
. . . . . . . . . . .,................................ RS232C
>
(-NC
Machine PMC RS232C 3 DVDO
Tool
FLOPPY CASSETTE /Handy File
Personal computer Floppy disk NEC PC9801 IBM PC/AT
Input/Edit sequence program
Memory card
Memory c=e interface
card
Drawing
1-3
1. OVERVIEW
Operation
flow for FAPT LADDER activation
Reference
chapter/section
Prepare personal computer. +
MS-DOS,
and FAPT LADDER
Install MS-DOS 4 Create directory for FAPT LADDER 1 Install FAPT LADDER + Install device drivers @et CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXECBAT) J. Reset personal computer Section 2.2
Section 2.1
Section 5.6
Activate FAPT LADDER Set model (PMC) Operations includinq editing
Chapter 3
Section 4.3
Chapter 5
J/
End? Yes JI Terminate FAPT LADDER
l-4
2. INSTALLATION
2.
INSTALLATION
software is stored on the floppy disks listed below. Before the system can be cannot
FAPT LADDER
used, the contents be run directly
of these system floppy disks must be written to a hard disk; the software and software of his or her personal computer, particularly
from the floppy disks.
To install the system on a hard disk, the user needs to be with basic MS-
familiar with the hardware DOS command operation
and files such as CONFIG.SYS
and AUTOEXEC.BAT.
The names of the floppy disks are listed below. FAPT LADDER PMC-L;M:P Vols.1 and 2 FAPT LADDER PMC-Lmodule floppy disk system floppy disk
A08B-9200-J500
#JP (PC9801)
A08B-9201 -J500 #EN (IBM PC/AT) A08B-9200-J600 A08B-9201-J600 #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PCAT) #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PC/AT) #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PCAT) #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PCAT) #JP (PC9801)
FAPT LADDER PMC-M module floppy disk
A08B-9200-J601 A08B-9201-J601
FAPT LADDER PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk
A08B-9200-J602 A08B-9201-J602
FAPT LADDER PMC-NNAQA Vols.1, 2, and 3
system floppy disk
A08B-9200-J501 A08B-9201-J501 A08B-9200-J502
FAPT LADDER PMCRAlIRA2IRA3:RBiRB2/RB3/RB4/RC /RC3/RC4/PAl !PAYQCNB system floppy disk
A08B-9201 -J502 #EN (IBM PC/AT)
Vols. 1, 2, and 3 FAPT LADDER PMC-RAl IRA2iRA3;PAl floppy disk FAPT LADDER PMC-RB1RB2RB3.RB4RCRC3.1RC4 module floppy disk FAPT LADDER PMC-QC module floppy disk iPA module A08B-9200-J603 #JP (PC9801)
A08B-9201 -J603 #EN (IBM PCAT) A08B-9200-J604 A08B-9201-J604 #JP (PC9801) #EN (IBM PCAT) (PC9801) (IBM PCAT) (PC9801) (IBM PC AT)
A08B-9200-J605#JP A08B-9201 -J605#EN
FAPT LADDER PMC-NB module floppy disk
A08B-9200-J606#JP A08B-9201-J606#EN
l-5
2. INSTALLATION
PMC model PMC-L PMC-M PMC-M (with MMC) PMC-P PMC-N PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-QA PMC-QC ?MC-NA MC-NB
Combination 0.8 @, @ 0. 0 @ @, @ 0, @ 43, @ 6J 0, @ ZJ @I
PMC model PMC-RAl PMC-RA2 PMC-RA3 PMC-RB PMC-RB2 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC PMC-RC3 PMC-RC4
Combination 0, QJ
@, @ @. QJ @, @ @, @ @, @ 0, 0, 8, @ @ @
2.1 Operating Environment

To use the software, installing the software, the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied. Before
check these requirements.
NEC PC9801 Main memory Hard disk Free area of 500K bytes or more is required About 3M bytes is required MS-DOS for installing
IBM PC/AT (Note 1) (Note 2).
the system (Note 3). PC-DOS Version 3.3 or later EPSON VP1 000
OS
Printer
Version 3.1 or later
NEC PR20lH Epson VP1000 (Note 4)
EMS
A LIM type EMS (expanded required depending to be created.
memory specification)
memory
board may be program
on the PMC model and the size of a sequence
For details, see 2.1.1. The EGA graphic interface required. is
Others
(Note
1)
If the standard required.
memory
size
of the machine
is insufficient,
memory
expansion
is
(Note 2)
Even if the machine when an installed
has 640K-byte for example,
memory,
the memory
may not be large enough space. The size of free CHKDSK.
driver.
uses a large memory with the MS-DOS
space in main memory can be checked
command
l-6
2. INSTALLATION
(Note 3) In addition, an area for storing sequence program data is required. (Note 4) To use the Epson VP1000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification
For details, see Section 1.2 in Part II.
is required.
2.1.1
PC9801 operating
environment
(1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT

When starting MS-DOS, the user needs to install the following device drivers:
l l
RSDRV.SYS PRINT.SYS
below to
Add the lines indicated RSDRV.SYS
CONFIG.SYS.
named gSDEV on drive A.
and PRINT.SYS
are assumed to be under the directory
DEVICE=A:$(DEVyRSDRV.SYS DEVICE=A:yDEV'1CPRINT,SYS
(Note)
When
you are using
a memory
card
adapter,
set CONFIG.SYS
referring
to the
operators
manual for the memory card adapter.
(2) Using the expanded memory can be used with the system allows a larger sequence
The expanded
memory
specification program.
(EMSXMS) EMSXMS
memory memory
as a to
work area for a sequence be used. edited.) If EMSXMS memory
program
(An EMS memory
size of 256K bytes or more allows
24000 or more steps to be
is not used, a sequence
program
of up to about 21840
steps can be
handled when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes. Ladder diagram editing cannot output drawings be allocated in main memory if a free area sufficient for 16000 steps cannot device drivers. In this
due to the space taken up by resident
case, EMS memory is required.
FANUC has confirmed
that the setting described
below ensures normal operation.
MS-DOS Version 3.38 (for the PC-9801 Series) Machine with a 80386:80386SX CPU
Specify
the statement
below as the first DEVICE
statement
of the CONFIG.SYS
file.
Each
device driver is assumed to be under the directory
named DEV on drive A.
(Note)
When an EMS board and EMS device driver are used, change according to the manufactures manual.
the CONFIGSYS
file
l-7
2. INSTALLATION
Expanded Extended
memory memory
(EMS) (XMS)
EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended)

* Better
(Kate 1) (Note 2)
to include EMS of 256 kbyte
or more
Note
1)
The quantity Symbol specially
of the EMS and XMS
memory Please
effects prepare
on the performance enough EMS or XMS
to handle memory
data and Net comment.
for Symbol data or Net comment
of large number. the maximum number of steps which or more
Note 2)
At the system FAPT LADDER EMS if possible.
with EMS less than 256 kbytes, can handle may be restricted.
Please prepare
256 kbytes
About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used:
Although according
FAPT LADDER
runs with no EMS nor XMS,
enough
size of EMS and/or XMS memory
to the source program to handle will be necessary for Ladder
for better performance.
1)
EMS memory
sequence program
program if available. memory is used, and the size of
FAPT LADDER uses EMS memory for Ladder sequence When no EMS memory is found, the convenGonal
conventional
memory may restrict the number of steps able to be edited. program occupies 256 kbyte of EMS, regardless of the type of PMC, or
Ladder sequence
the size of the ladder sequence
program to edit.
2)
EMS and XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data
FAPT LADDER uses EMS and/or XMS memory for Symbol & Comment When neither drive, of them are available, FAPT LADDER
data if available. file on the hard
will make temporary
and processing
large number of Symbol & Comment
data may be slower.
About 200 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Symbol data. EMS and XMS memory for Net comment
3)
For Net comment,
FAPT LADDER also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, data.
or temporary
file
as same as Symbol & Comment
About 200 to 300 kbytes of EMS or XMS memory
are used for every 1,000 Net comments.
(3) Using a Japanese

FAPT LADDER comment
language input FEP

allows comments in Japanese to be entered on the symbol and
for PC9801
editing screen. language
(See Section 51.3.) input, a front-end processor (FEP) for Japanese language input is
For Japanese required. manual.
For information
about
the installation
and operation
of an FEP, see the relevant
1-8
2. INSTALLATION
The following
Japanese
language input FEPs can be used:
Supplier NEC
Driver name NECAlKl. DRV
Memory size required About 130K bytes
Remarks Al step-by-step Al multiple-block Step-by-step Multiple-block conversion conversion
NECAIK2. DRV
conversion conversion conversion
NECDIC. DRV Just Systems ATOKGA. SYS ATOKGB. SYS ATOK7A. ATOK7B. SYS SYS
About 40K bytes About 100K bytes
Single-block ATOKG
About 115K bytes When the EMS is used Main : 50K bytes EMS : 64K bytes
ATOK
Note the following
points on Japanese
language input:
(a) When
FAPT
a Japanese
language
input FEP is activated
(in the Japanese
language
input mode),
the Japanese
language input FEP displays screen may temporarily
data on a section of the screen. be in disarray. language However,
As a result, the LADDER language
LADDER
the FAPT (Japanese
screen returns to normal when Japanese input mode is terminated).
input is completed
(W When
a comment
is entered using only Japanese,
up to 14 characters
can be entered.
(c) A comment entered in Japanese can be displayed on the editing screen or printed out, but
cannot be written is output into a ROM cassette indicating or transferred to the PMC. characters At compile time, a to message blanks. this restriction and all Japanese are converted
Note, however,
that sequence
program operation
is not affected.
60
A Japanese that memory memory execution.
language available
input FEP is installed to FAPT LADDER LADDER
as a resident driver in the system. is reduced bytes accordingly. or more Check to allow
This means
that the size of FAPT LADDER
usable
for FAPT
is 500K
Editing alone can be performed allocate
without
installing
PRINT.SYS
and RSDRV.SYS
in order to in
a free area of 500K bytes. a main memory as required.
Note that when
FILES or BUFFERS
is specified
CONFIG.SYS. adjustments
size of 1K bytes is used per file (buffer)
specified.
Make
09 A Japanese language input FEP can also be installed with ADDDRV and DELDRV by using
a subprocess after calling COMMAND.COM in user batch execution.
An example is provided
below.
l-9
2. INSTALLATION
First. change instaed,
the contents
of FLMNE.BAT
under
the directory
where
FAPT LADDER
is
as follows:
FLMNE. BAT r !COMMAND Inaddition, create a file with the name FEP.DEF with the definitions
below assumes FEP. use of ATOK7. For detailed information, below. The example of the relevant
see the manual
FEP.DEF DEVICE=A:YDEV+ATOK7A.SYS/D=A:+ATOK7L.DIC DEVICE=A:YDEV)CATOK7B.SYS

Select MNEEDT execution). (mnemonic editing) from the main menu,
>
and select F3 (user batch file
The following
message appears:
Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'. Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]
Enter N to return to MS-DOS. FEP:
Execute
the following
commands
to install and remove the
ADDDRV FEP.DEF
(To install the FEP)
DELDRV
1 (To remove the FEP)

Fi .
The user can return to FAPT LADDER by pressing
2.1.2
IBM PC/AT operating

AUTOEXEC.BAT
environment
(1) CONFIGSYS,
The system uses ANSI-based using CONFIG.SYS. Add the line indicated ANSI.SYS
escape
sequences.
Therefore,
ANSI.SYS
needs to be installed
below to CONFIG.SYS. \DEV on drive A.
is assumed to be under directory
DEVICE=A:\DEV\ANSI.SYS
l-10
2. INSTALLATION
(2) Using
EMS memory specification (EMS) memory can be used with the system allows a larger sequence as a work to be
The expanded
area for a sequence used.
program.
The EMS memory
program
(An EMS memory size of 256K bytes or more allows 24000 steps to be edited.) is not used, a sequence program of up to about 21840 steps can be handled
If EMS memory
when the main memory has a free area of 570K bytes.) Ladder diagram editing cannot be started if a free area sufficient for 16000 steps cannot device drivers. be
allocated in main memory due to the space taken up by resident EMS memory is required. FANUC has confirmed MS-DOS that the setting described below ensures
In this case,
normal operation.
Version 4.0 below as the first DEVICE statements \DEV on drive A. of the CONFIG.SYS file. Each
Specify the statements
device driver is assumed to be under directory
DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMAEM.SYS DEVICE=A:\DEV\XMA2EMS.SYS FRAME=COOO
2.2 Installation Procedure

An installation (See (3)) Note that there are two different and edition of the system. installation procedures. They are selected according to the type batch file is used to install the programs on the system and module floppy disks.
Installation
of ordinary files (see item (1) for the procedure.) on the following system and module floppy disks are distributed in ordinary
The programs file format.
. . *
PMC-L/M/P
system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500)
editions
06.1 and earlier
PMC-N system floppy disk (A08B-920019201 -JSOl) PMC-RB!RC system floppy disk (A08B-9200/9201 -J502) editions 07.1 and earlier
All module floppy disks
Installation
of compressed
files (see item (2) for the procedure.) system and floppy disks are distributed in compressed file
The programs format.
on the following
* *
PMC-L/M/P PMC-RBRC
system floppy disk (AOSB-9200/9201-J500) system floppy disk (AO8B-9200/9201-J502)
editions editions
06.2 and earlier 08.0 and earlier
Note 1)
The installation
procedure
of the programs
on each floppy disk is subject file (if there is one). procedure

(1).
to change. If there is no
Before starting installation, README.DOC,
refer to a README.DOC
use the ordinary file format installation
1-11
2. INSTALLATION
Note 2)
The compressed named LHA.
file is a self-extracting
file produced
using an archive Yoshizaki.
program
utility
LHA is freeware
created by Mr. Haruyasu
(1) Installation procedure for ordinary files on system
floppy
disks
The following system
procedure
uses an example
in which
ordinary
files are read from each PMC-N Y FLADDER created on the hard
floppy disk in drive B:, and installed
in the directory
disk drive (C:).
[Operation] Insert the system floppy disk VOLl in a drive.
Enter the following
commands
to execute
an installation
batch file.
B:Y> CD INSTALL B:YINSTALL> INSTALL B:Y
C:+FLADDER
When the following
message appears, confirm it, and press any key.
SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to C:\ FLADDER (HARD DISK) SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.11 on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRL+C" Press any key to continue
If it is necessary batch file. to discontinue installation, press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution of the
VOLI
is installed
on the hard disk.
When the following press any key.
message
appears,
insert the system floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and
SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.21 on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRLtC" Press any key to continue
VOL2 is installed on the hard disk.
message
appears,
insert the system
floppy disk VOL3 in a drive, and
1-12
2. INSTALLATION
The following
message appears.
(2) Installation procedure for compressed files on system floppy disks

The following
procedure uses an example in which ordinary files are read from each PMCY FLADDER created on the
RB.RC system floppy disk in drive B:, and installed hard disk drive (A:).
in the directory
[Procedure ] Insert the system floppy disk VOLl in a drive.
Enter the following
commands
to execute
an installation
batch file.
I
Note 1) Note 2)
B:Y> CD INSTALL B:YINSTALL> INSTALL 9: A:YFLADDERY
When specifying directory
the files to be installed,
enter only their drive name; do not specify
(that is, do not enter 4h). suffix it with Y .
When specifying
the directory
in which the system is to be installed,
When the following
message
appears, confirm
it. and press any key.
SYSTEM PROGRAM will be installed from DRIVE B:\ to A:\ FLADDER (HARD DISK) SET [SYSTEM FD Vol.11 on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRL+C" Press any key to continue
If it is necessary batch file.
to discontinue
installation,
press the CTRL + C keys to stop execution
of the
VOLl
is installed on the hard disk.
message
appears,
insert the system
floppy disk VOL2 in a drive, and
1-13
2. INSTALLATION
message
appears.
insert the system
floppy disk VOL3 in a drive,
and
SET [SYSTEM FD Vo1.3) on DRIVE B:\ When stop "CTRL+C" Press any key to continue
@I VOL3 is installed on the hard disk.
@I The following
message appears.
(End/
(3) Installation batch files
The following table lists the installation batch files and their directories.
File name @ 8 $J @ PMC-L/M/P system floppy disk LMPINSTSAT LINST.BAT MINST.BAT MMINSTBAT INSTALL.BAT INSTALL.BAT
Directory Ic INSTALL Y Y gc +JINSTALL qCINSTALL
PMC-L module floppy disk PMC-M module floppy disk PMC-M (MMC) module floppy disk system floppy disk
@J PMC-NINAQA @
PMCRA~/RA~JAA~RB:RB~;RBYRB~/RC~RC~!RC~/PA 1IPA3IQCINB system floppy disk PMC-RAl !RA2IRAS/PAl IPA3 module floppy disk module
(3
RA12lNST.BAT RBRCINST.BAT
Y INSTALL Y INSTALL
EMC-RB!RB2/RB3;RB4IRCIRC3iRC4 floppy disk
?) PMC-QC module floppy disk

I@ PMC-NB module floppy disk
QCINST.BAT NBINST.BAT
Y INSTALL gC INSTALL
(Note)
Systems restrictions
for different
PMC models can be installed on the edition
in the same directory. of the software.
However,
may be placed depending
See Appendix install them
9 for details.
For systems that cannot be installed
in the same directory,
in separate directories.
1 -
14
3. ACTIVATION
3.
ACTIVATION
method
(1) Activation
[Operation] Activate FAPT LADDER with the following commands:
B:\>A: A:\xD \FLADDER

A:
\FLADDER>
FLADDER
(Note
1)
The initial screen displaying message below appears.
the version
of the system
and copyright
is displayed
and the
When a key is pressed while the initial screen is displayed, Select a screen by selecting the function
the main menu below appears. to the desired menu item
key corresponding
displayed
at the bottom of the main menu screen.
Fi KEY : SETUP F8 KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT F9 KEY : UT[LlTt FlO KEY : END
Select a menu item with the corresponding
function
key.
(Note)
Before system started
starting
up FAPT
LADDER,
change
the drive
and directory
in which
the is
file exists to the current up with path designation,
drive and current or by specifying
directory.
If FAPT LADDER directory,
the current
FAPT
LADDER may malfunction.
1-15
3. ACTIVATION
Reference:
When an FL.BAT has been created in the directory FAPT LADDER key. can be activated by just typing below.
for which
path control
is set,
FL and pressing
the [RETURN]
An example of a batch file is provided
FL.BAT ECHO OFF A:

cD \FLADDER (Moves to the drive where the system files are installed.) (Moves to the directory where the system files are installed.)
FLADDER
(2) Termination method
[Operation] 0 Select [END] from the main menu, or press the < ESC > key to return to the initial screen. Then the following message appears:
END? (Y:END, 0THER:RESllME MENU)
Enter Y to return to the MS-DOS
command
mode.
Enter N to return to the main menu.
l-16
4. BASIC OPERATION
4.
BASIC OPERATION
4.1 Menu Configuration

The configuration of the menu screens displayed by the system are shown below.
MS-DOS $- 4 initial screen

f
Main menu-
Edit Print qz[TEXEC
Fl
Title data Ladder diagram Symbol and comment Message I/O module System parameter
Execution l-Setting Compression (PMC-R seriesKXiNB)
c
LPASCAL -PMC
(PMC-N/NA/RC/RC3!QC4;QC/NB) (PMC-N, NA) writer, FA writer Read Write Verification Blank check
-PMC -E -Handy -Memory
Download Upload Comparison cassette adapter
file/Floppy card
(Note
1) The
format
of the
source
program
of this
system
is
different
from
that
of
FAPT
LADDER for the P Series.
Thts system uses the mnemonic
edit function
(F8) to edit a
file having the format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series.
(Note
2) An object file has the ROM format of FAPT LADDER for the P Series.
reads a sequence program created by the P Series In the ROM file format. of the floppy disk must be converted.
This system The format
1-17
Diagram
of relationships
among the functions
of the system
P-G FAPT LADDER - . . . . .. . . . . . . i Source i :s ; format : program i : .. . . .. . . .. . . .
PC9801 - IBM-PC/AT FAPT LADDER

Edit Setup
::
Communication by FEZ-2324 (Refer to Appendix 1 for cables)
qzq+J4
U-inch ffOPPY FLOAD98 IFLOADAT ASC format
CNC . .. . . . . ; ROM ; I : . . . . .. . . . . .. i
; format : program :4 3.5inch ffOPPY
+q+-+
Binary format Memorv
FAPT PASCAL . .. . ... .. . .. . : PASCAL ;

: load : module :-+I+ 35inch ffOPPY FLPGMS
II
I
I
i . .. . . .. . . .. . . .
k-1
Q I+
1 I
fg-pii?-~-
Binary format
Q-l_), ff
3.5inch
OPPY
ASC format
4. BASIC OPERATION
4.2 Common System Operations

The operations described below are basic operations applicable to all screens.
(1) Function
keys
When the menu items shown .:,:. :.
below
are displayed
in reverse key.
video,
the user can select
the
desired menu item by pressing the corresponding

,
;z:,i,:lE :.:_. ::..:::::; D,T,i,j,I:( ../ .::.?::is
function
;;:
j.,
.j.,
j;
y:)):.,
pR,$& .., :,.:
:... ..:.
::::..::
j.
)j
3 :;C*MP,i..: 4 j i.&&...y s :;.:;& i :y :;

:.: ::...: .j,. .,, .:,: : ,,
;::i,:
:::
..
fj&:::q ,
;::.;&p~:., * .;&JE+
:. ::
:.>::;:;;g( ,
()
+j
,,
WI
PI
F31
IF41
WI
F61
(F,]WI
WI
IF101
(2) Escape key

The escape key <ESC> escape key terminates menu hierarchy. (3) Cursor keys has the same effect as selecting [END] with the function key. The
the current screen then returns the display to the previous
screen in the
The cursor keys <

select input items.
>,
<
>,
< +
>, and < +
> are used to move the cursor
to
When two or more cursors can be moved by pressing
can be used on a single screen, the <SHIFT>
the second
or subsequent
cursor
key together with the < +
> or -z -+ > key.
(4) Scroll
keys
keys <ROLL UP> and <ROLL DOWN > scroll the screen up (to display the (for
The scroll previous
one page) and scroll the screen down (to display the next one page), respectively
the PC9801). The scroll keys <PAGE page, respectively DOWN > and <PAGE UP> display the next page and the previous
(for the IBM PC/AT).
(5) [INS]
key
between the overwrite mode c 0 > and insert mode -z I >.
This key switches
(9) [HELP]
key
When the < HELP > key is pressed,
help information
may be output for the specified
item.
1-19
4. BASIC OPERATION
(7) Status
line
A status line is displayed
at the top of the screen.
Main t-
menu
PMC-RB2
t
<O>[A::FLADDER
Item name currently selected
Model currently
selected
Current directory
name
Edit mode (overwritefinsert)
(Note)
The
indications
on the key tops
may slightly
vary
from
the descriptions
of this
manual. depending
on the personal computer
used.
(8) Pop-up
menu
When the following
pop-up menu appears, below.
the desired
process
can be selected
using any of
the three methods described
The file already exists. Fl Update F2 Quit F3 Append
1) Cursor movement
To select an item, press the cursor key < ? > or c 1 >, such that the item to be selected is displayed in reverse video. Then, pressing the <RETURN> key selects that item.
2) Function key
A function corresponding key is indicated function key. at the left of each item. To select an item, press the
3)
Command
name letter in (usually, the initial of) an item name is the command or <A> name. In the
An uppercase
above case, pressing Append command,
the letter key -z U >, <Cl>,
can select the Update. Quit, or
respectively.
l-20
4. BASIC OPERATION
4.3 Model Setting

In this case, the user needs to select the PMC model by selecting [SETUP] before selectrng
another menu item.
This setting, once executed,
is preserved
(i.e. setup need not be repeated).
[Operation] Select [SETUP].
The setup menu is displayed.
(The screen is of PMC-R08.0
version)
PUC-MI PIIC-RA? PUC-RA3 PUG-RB pcuc;;; PUC-RB4 PIIC-RB4 PMC-RC *PWC-RC3 PVC-AC4 PVC-RC4 PUC-PAI PUC-PA3 PVC-PC PVC-NB (STEP Sip:
(STEP
SW
Select the PMC model using the arrow keys. Press the <RETURN displayed Setup > key. Then the following message appears and the model name
in the status line changes. completed.
Select [END]. The display returns to the setup menu screen.
Select [END].
The display returns to the main menu screen.
(Note)
When PMC-NA is used, select PMC-N (l/O) on the above screen.
l-21
5. OPERATION
5.
OPERATION
5.1 Editing
The source file of a sequence program is edited.
(1) Start
[Operation] 0 Select [EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.
Mm. WC >
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~\~~~~~~~~~~
.:
j ;
>&:j
Fl KEY: EDIT
F2 KEY : PRINT F3 KEY : COMPILE F4 KEY : OECO?kPlLE Fj KEY : LINK F6 KEY : I/O Fi KEY : SETUP FB KEY : MNEMONIC EDIT F9 KEY : UTILITY F10 KEY : END
The following
source file name input screen is displayed:
l-22
5. OPERATION
6!
Enter the name of a source program to be edited. No more than 36 characters can be entered to specify a program name. (extension (.xXx) must be excluded).
An MS-DOS file name must be entered
(i)
When a new file is created
6 6
input nrnnram , yvy < 2 , name.
output program
Specify the OUTPUT
PROGRAM
NAME only.
(ii) When an existing
file is edited
directly
I/O program
Specify the same program name in the INPUT PROGRAM field and OUTPUT PROGRAM NAME field.
NAME
(ii) When an existing
file is modified
and its contents
are stored
in a separate
file
I=7
Example)
Specify the name of the existing INPUT PROGRAM NAME field.
file to be edited in the Specify the name of the file PROGRAM
in which to store the program in the OUTPUT NAME field.
L-2
To specify a file that exists in the current directory To specify a file in another directory,
A : iFLADDER 7
displayed
at the status line, enter the file
enter the relative path and the file name.
t Current directory
-IT
DATA i-SAMPLE1 SAMPLE2
In this case, the following

A:FLADDERDATASAMPLEl DATAsAMPLE
two lines specify the same file.
l-23
5. OPERATION
@ The following
editing menu screen appears:

EDiT ix-x QiNA:wADI;iR\ I
FI kEY : TITLE I?? RY F3 m : LWDEK DI%R+l : SMKIL 6 CONEIIT
F4 KFI : ,WSAGE F5 KEY : I,;0 KIDLLE! FE hEY : SYSTM P.!J&WTER FlO kEY : E!lu
($3 Select data to be edited with the corresponding $3 The editing displayed screen for the selected is selected.
function
key. For example, the screen below is
data appears.
when [TITLE]
EDIT( TITLL )
: fPf.z-fc \\ / ,slb~:at.
:\:: :: f
51 EDITIOS SO 6) PROCRM Ill~~\hlV6 X0 7) MT\ OF I'RO(;ffilWiG 8) PRG-XI IHICSEDBY 9) RUM hRITTL5 BY
iR
10 mu
(2) Termination
[Operation] Q Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.
G3 The following
message appears:
l-24
5. OPERATION
(3
Press the desired function
key. the editing operation is terminated after the results of
(i) When UPDATE

(ii) When QUIT
is selected,
editing are written to a file. is selected, the editing operation is terminated without writing the results
of editing to a file. (iii) When RESUME is selected, the editing is continued.
When UPDATE (i) To continue
or QUIT is selected,
the display returns to the editing menu screen. function key.
editing, select the appropriate editing, select [END].
(ii) To terminate
The display returns to the main menu.
5.1.1
Title data editing

the titles of sequence programs generated by a machine tool builder.
Title data represents
(1) Start
[Operation] 0 Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.
The following
title editing screen appears:
EMT ( TITLE)
MI-is
6hfA:'ZtNXI%'\
: IXtLCi'41C-HNEL RC & FltNI
(2) Input
[Operation] 0 Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the < 1 > and <
1 > keys.
l-25
5. OPERATION
Enter data.
The maximum
number of characters
usable for each title data item is listed below.
MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME MACHINE TOOL NAME CNC b NC NAME PMC PROGRAM NO EDITION NO PROGRAM DRAWING NO DATE OF PROGRAMMING PROGRAM DESIGNED BY ROM WRITTEN BY REMARKS
(3) Termination
: : : : : : : : : :
32 characters 32 characters 32 characters 4 characters 2 characters 32 characters 16 characters 32 characters 32 characters 32 characters
[Operation] 0 Select [END] on press the c ESC > key to return to the editing menu screen.
The following
message appears.
Fl F2 F3
Update Quit Edit
key.
The system returns to the editing menu.
5.1.2 Ladder diagram editing

In ladder diagram search operations. editing, the user can perform sequence program input, addition, deletion, and
(1) Start
[Operation] @ Select [LADDER] (LADDER DIAGRAM) from the editing menu.
1-26
5. OPERATION
The following
ladder diagram editing screen appears:
StBil :sp
PO001
l-AD=xooo. 0 SY=S.:rFE
HIz+F3-a 4+3l Q-TEST %kztn
DAT,A NO I + c--,-..
0002/6552 011030/6553S _t 1ocuBmI
(a) When 09
the [View]
command
is used, a different Program
line is shown.
(For the [View]
command,
see (5) Connecting The line shows displayed
Sequence
in Section 3.1.1 of the supplement.) is being edited, number of the net which is
the name of the file which
on the screen, and the number of program stepsmaximum
number of steps that
can be edited.
(c) The W) The
line shows a sub-program
number (P address) or label number
(L address). selected by the
lines show a symbol and comment
added to the data at the address
cursor. @ AD = X000.0 8 SY = SAMPLE 000216552 @ CO = TEST DATA NO.1 0003Of65535 : : Address on which the cursor is placed Symbol Number symbols : Comment Number Maximum comment of characters number specified in the comment/ permitted in the of current symbols!Maximum number of
of characters
1-27
5. OPERATION
(2) Function
key indications
and selection
The ladder diagram editing functions
correspond
to the function
keys as indicated
below.
-@ [coman_d]
Under condition CD),holding down [SHIFT] lets you select the following items. ......: .:,:. :.:,:.: ...\ :.:.: :.:,:,:i... ...........I. .., ::.>,:.: :., :.:c.::~:~;:i:.:jl ... ....:.:.:,:,~.:.:.:,:.:.:,::.: :;::,:: .,::::: ........::.:...:. .:g:.:;er .:.,_ ::~:::~i,~.~:1:I:I.~: 1:1:1:::1:~.:81:~~~.~:~~:~::. ;.:, I:! y.v.w.,l:... :::::.i:.:...:.:.:.:,~:.:.:.:.:.:. , ~~~~~~~ 2 ;,$;!&k&; 3 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~:~~ 4 ~~~~~~~:;~~~~~~~ 5 ~~~~~~~ 6 :~:~~~~~~~ , ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 8 ~:~~:~~~~~~~~~, 9 ~~~~~~~~~~~:~~~~ , Oii,i~::i:;~~~I~:::::ii >::.:_:...:.: .....:.::. ___,.. ,.) .:.:_:.:..l ,.,. .... ,>: ... ........._.... ............y.._ 7.. ,\., :.:.:.:.:s.. ,.I .:, .,.:..:.:.:.:_..:: ): .:,~):.:.:,.., .,:,:.:Q..:.) .. .i:: .,.,.,.,. .,.,,,_ .,., .~)~);:_:_:.):.::.:.::.~ ,.,. ..:.: .,.,.i,.,.,__.
:..:.:
[Delnet]
[Search]
... ... ,. ... : ,./.. ..
5 ;;,;;w&&
6 ;,&&i;
..,.. .,. ,. . ..:::..:.:... ::..: ....: .,_,). $):: ::,., ::. .. ,,.,,: : 7 :i$&.~. 8 ;. .,~&~:~~.Y: g _.,:_,::l:;,~.;i:i 10,::,;&.;;;:;I.. :.: .,.: .C,.: ,.,.,: .,..:: : ...
I,
CB [Copy1 1 Wove1
2 ;:l~a;~&;: 3 : .karch
.. . ..I4
,i_down
i$$&;:;.; ....x. .
.t;p,.,
6 ,.,
:,A
7.;, . .. ... .
:.,,: :,:: .Y.
3.
.. g .Y .: --<;.I,,.
.:.
..I
:: :,.
... .
., :. .,<. y
,,, .. .. * :::;t+r 1 Lj:;::.tii:.:.::..? :. 3 :~..~&~ch : 4 :&own 5 c-up 6 tO-fil 7.
to&J. 8.
,:
.:
: i., 10
.:,
[to-org)
is displayed
in the [File] command
mode only.
(Thus can be selected.)
@I [File] Opens a window processing [ sy Edit]

2
in which the name of an input program
can be specified.
Select desired
from a POP-UP menu.
I
I
0xec
cancel 3
10
1-28
5. OPERATION
(Note)
While the function Q can be executed.
keys of @ are displayed For example, as selecting entering
in ladder diagram editing, <A > and [COMAND] on the .a
a command
of
on the @ screen To select a
has the same effect command of 8
F4 [Adress]
screen.
in this way, enter the upper-case command
letter (not necessarily screen.
initial letter)
in the corresponding
name shown on the 8
(3) Sequence
program
input
For sequence programmer
program
input,
select
[LADDER]
from
the editing program
menu.
The
function
key
menu is displayed.
When no sequence
has been entered,
the screen
displays only the right and left vertical rails of a ladder diagram.
At this stage, program input can be started.
Use the cursor keys to move the cursor to any location in the ladder diagram. Examples of basic instruction below. program input and function instruction program input are shown
(a) Example
of basic instruction program input

x0.1 D30.2 F14.2 Y52.7
3
[Operation ] Move the cursor to the start position, The [ -I ILLEGAL Ithen press [ -I I1. HORIZONTAL LINE ] symbol appears on the screen. The message appears at the lower-right ladder diagram corner of the screen. line creation This message warns the user that horizontal and bit data. is not completed. Enter an address Enter X0.1 on the keyboard the contact, and press the < RETURN > key. The address is set at and the cursor moves right. As in @ and 8, enter contact A of 030.2. Enter contact Press [ e B of F14.2. ] and enter address F14.2. then press the <RETURN> key. The
address is set on contact
B and the cursor moves right.
Without moving the cursor, press [ A horizontal line segment extending
1. and a relay coil
to the right is drawn automatically
symbol appears near the right vertical rail.
l-29
5. OPERATION
Enter address Y52.7. then press the <RETURN The cursor automatically
> key.
moves to the input start position on the next line.
Next, enter an OR condition. Press [ + ] and enter address X2.4, then press the <RETURN > key.
The address is set at contact 6 and the cursor moves right.
Press [ To enter [ -
] to enter a horizontal a horizontal line, enter
line. a number and press the horizontal line key
1. The line segment
will be entered
as many times as the number the right vertical rail.
entered.
Note, however,
that such a line never exceeds
A vertical
line extending
upward
is required
for OR.
Press
] to enter
vertical line extending
upward.
(b) Example
of function
instruction
program
input
For function
instruction
input, press the function key.
key [functnj.
Next, enter a SUB number,
then press the <RETURN> A function instruction
can also be entered by entering the [functn] key. a certain instruction
the function
instruction
name or SUB
number and pressing
If the user does not remember instruction displayed table that lists function on the screen.
name or SUB number,
a function can be
instructions
and corresponding
SUB numbers
The table can be displayed Then the function Press the [functn] table. instruction
just by pressing
the [functn] displayed.
key without
entering
any data.
table is automatically
key to return to the ladder diagram
screen from the function
instruction
ACT
1 MOVE 0000
(1)
0000
(2)
Control condition
LL
When entering parameters a function of the function
(3) 0000
(4)
0000
H
.
Output address
Input data address 4-bit logical multiplication data enter the data
Low-order 4-bit
High-order
logical multiplication with this function, vertically
instruction instruction
as shown below.
-It--
MOVE
0000
SUB 8
0000 0000
0000
-c-(l) --(,a -(3) -(4)
l-30
5. OPERATION
[Operation] @ Enter a control condition. Press [ -i key. t1. Next, enter an address and bit data, then press the <RETURN>
The cursor moves right.
Enter a function The function
instruction. key. Next, enter SUB number 8, then press the <RETURN > key. diagram shown above appears.
Press the [functn]
instruction
&!
Enter the oarameters press the <RETURN remaining
of the function > key.
instruction. multiplication automatically data of the first parameter, moves downwards. then Enter the
First, enter the high-order
4-bit logical
The cursor
three parameters
one by one.
(c) Restrictions
and notes
on ladder
creation
[Restrictions] @ Restrictions related to the ladder 1 net (corresponding to the portion between the RD
and WRT instructions) a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds 256 steps (as counted as steps in the
corresponding
mnemonic
program),
the following
message appears:
A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded. If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.
Restrictions If an attempt described a) (a-l)
related to a ladder diagram display per screen is made to display more than 70 ladder net lines per screen, the error
below occurs.
Symptom When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following The NET being created is too large. If 70 lines displayed. A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded. are exceeded, the following message appears, and no net is message appears.
(a-2)
When there are more than 70 lines totaled over two or more nets, the following message appears. The NET being created is too large. If 70 lines are exceeded when totaled over two or more nets, the following
message appears for a net that is the current and the display of the current
net when 70 lines are exceeded,
net is discontinued.
The NET is larger than the editing buffer. In this case, specify function the net to be displayed. rrsing the ladder diagram search
(such as net number search).
b)
How to obtain the number of lines per screen Even if part of a net is displayed on a screen, all lines of the net are included in the
l-31
5. OPERATION
total for that screen.
In addition,
a space line between
nets is counted
as a valid line.
The number of lines in each net to be displayed (b-l) Basic instructions One line is comprised of one basic instruction.
is determined
as follows:
b-1-
1 line
L-I (b-2) Function instructions of lines in a function whichever instruction is:
*lines
The number or parameters, Examples
The number of control
conditions
is greater, plus 1 follow.
of calculation
When the number of control conditions
< number of parameters
RST
When the number of control conditions
r
1-32
Number of control conditions = 2 Number of parameters = 4 Number of lines = number of parameters + 1 = 5 lines
> number of parameters
RlOO
Number of Number of Number of conditions
control conditions = 3 parameters = 1 lines = number of control + 1 = 4 lines
5. OPERATION
(b-3)
Data table section of function instructions The data table section of the COD, CODB, follows: When the data table is one or two bytes Number of lines
or DISP instruction
is calculated
as
= number of data tables16 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000
0000
I
1
1
Number of lines in the data table section = 11/6 = 1 with remainder 5 = 2 lines
When the data table is four bytes Number of lines = number of data tables/4 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)
SUB 27 CODB
0005 0007 0300 D320
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000 00000000
Number of lines in the data table section = 514 = 1 with remainder 1 = 2 lines
l-33
5. OPERATION
(b-4)
Example of calculating For the ladder shown obtained as follows:
the number of lines per screen below, the number of fines in the screen
display
section
is
- The valid nets on the display screen are nets A and B. - Number of lines in net A Function instruction section + data table section = 6 lines (1116) (3+1) - The number of lines in net B is 2.
-I-+ I
8 lines
Net A
Screen display section D300 . . .. f . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

I.
rT
ACT tSUB 49 DISP
0011
0003
........
000 003 006 009
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000 0000
0000 0000 0000
Net B : . . . . . . .. Net C
....................................................................
........
c)
Examples of symptoms Example of symptom (a-l) of message data steps when
The ladder diagram can be edited only when the total number parameter of the DISP instruction (SUB 49) is less than 396. of 70 lines. or more
This is because
the total number of steps is 396, the net consists If a net that consists editing, the following of a total of 396 steps
is created
during
mnemonic
message appears, and the display of the net is discontinued.
The data table is too large.
1-34
5. OPERATION
Example of symptom -
(a-2) instruction on the same screen as and the attempt is
If an attempt is made to enter the net of a function that of a basic rejected. The NET being created is too large. For example, cannot if the basic instruction (because instruction, the following message
is displayed,
net has 68 lines, the MOVE instruction of lines exceeds 70).
(SUB 8) of
be entered,
the total number
The results
calculation
are described
below.
1
68-line net Display screen . t+r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . ! i i ; :. .. ... .. Number of instruction number of (4) + 1 = MOVE lines = parameters 5
..! 68 + 5 = 73 lines
< Measure > If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled, _ the MOVE instruction can be entered.
A basic instruction
net cannot
be entered
together
with another
basic-instruction
net, if
the total number of lines is greater than 70.
For example,
if a 68-line
basic-instruction
net is followed
by another
basic-instruction
net,
the element of the third line of the latter net cannot be entered.
I++ Display screen ,..................................................._.___.....,_...........................
68-line net
I . . . . . . . ]::!j
.I...l
< Measure > If the display of the 68-line net is not scrolled. the latter basic instruction can be entered.
When the CODB instruction same screen, steps
(SUB 27) and DISP instruction
(SUB 49) are edited on the data
if an attempt is made to enter 396 as the total number of message instruction (SUB 49) the following message appears,
for the DISP
and the
l-35
5. OPERATION
attempt is rejected. The NET being created is too large.
This symptom
also occurs in a combination
of two DISP instructions
and a combination
of
CODB and COD instructions. For example, if the number of tables for the CODB instruction can be only 66 at maximum. is 200, the total number The calculation results of are
steps for the DISP instruction shown below.
FIST -IIACT -II000 002 Display screen . . . . . .. . . . 4 bytes 200 data tables Number of CODB _ instruction lines = 55
00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000
. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 198
. ..
00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000
I[ I_
Function instruction section = 4 parameters + 1 Data table section = 20014 = 50 Calculation of DISP instruction data items that can be entered instruction = 3 parameters + 1 Number of remaining = 70 - 55 - 4 lines = 11 lines Data tables = 11%=66 Function sections makes it possible to set the
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
.. .
< Measure > Moving the DISP instruction to the top of the display screen
total number of steps to 396.
Restriction Without
on the maximum
number of steps
The maximum
number of ladder steps that can be edited is as follows: EMS : 21840 steps : 24000 steps that the maximum allowable number of steps can decrease, depending
With EMS Note, however,
on how memory is used. If a ladder being edited exceeds disabled and the following MNEMONIC BUFFER message OVER the maximum is displayed: allowable number of steps, editing is
l-36
5. OPERATION
[Notes] CD An attempt to scroll a program on the screen with a scroll key or other keys fails if the ladder program is incomplete (for example, without addresses) or invalid.
A correct ladder program must be created before the screen can be scrolled.
Up to eight contacts However, format. displayed This
and one coil can be entered in one line on the screen. does not apply to a sequence program created in mnemonic symbol. with [ ----1. Use [Delnet] (net program created in mnemonic this limit, it is format exceeds
this restriction When a sequence
over several lines with a continuation symbol cannot be deleted
continuation
deletion)
to delete this symbol.
(See Item (6) in this section.)
(4) Replacing
sections
of a sequence
program
Lines in an already created sequence in Item (3) above.
program can be replaced
in the same way as described
Move the cursor to a program section to be changed,
then enter new data.
(5) Sequence
program
addition soft key of the function key programmer menu and use the function keys
Press the [comand] indicated below.
To terminate
the programmer
menu, press the < ESC > key. ,:
:I,i&&t
....
:.
.. ~::::&I&:1 >ji&if:$::
:..: ,y,:: ... . . :, . ..... .::::I
....................................... ....................... ................. .: :zi~~~~~~::

.) .................
: :..:.q.::::.
:;.
. ,,::::
$~$z$,$@:i;i
................
$&&$
~~~;fjiii.~~~! $zzyrdit:::;,
:: ,.:,:: ... .::..: .: .... .:::::.:.:. ... : :
........ .....~:.:::.:+~:.~~x~
::.:.
:,: : :.:.:.: .. ....
....
...
...
.:::.y
::.:.:::::::::::::: ................. ..y.. ....... . ........ .:,.:
.:::.:
[Insert]
As described
below, there are four types of sequence
program addition in a ladder diagram.
(a) Example:
when a relay contact
is added on a line
Addition on a line
Move the cursor to the position Item (3) above.
to add item(s),
then enter item(s)
in the way described
in
l-37
5. OPERATION
When a vertical line affects addition
[Operation] Move the cursor to the position Press [ _ 4 ] to delete shown above. the vertical line to the left extending upward. This
disappears. Press [ A ] to create a vertical ). A horizontal line extending upward to the right of the cursor,
then press [
line and vertical line are created. is to be added.
Move the cursor to the point on the line where a contact Press [ -j j] to add a contact.
(b) When a line is added vertically
-To
be added
To add a line vertically.
an area is required
for the addition.
To create
such an area, the
lower part of the ladder diagram
must be shifted down by one line.
To do this, move the
cursor to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed key. Each time the [insnet] key is pressed,
in dashed lines, then press the [insnet]
the lower part of the ladder diagram Make an addition in this area.
is shifted one
line down to create an area for addition. After line addition, any remaining
area (as in the case where two lines are added in an area
large enough for three lines) can be left as it is.
[Operation] @ Move the cursor to any point in the ladder dragram enclosed in dashed lines.
G? Press [insnet]. The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line.
l-38
5. OPERATION
When the [insnet] When the [insnet]
key is pressed without entering key is pressed after entering
a numeric a numeric
value, one line is inserted. value, the number of lines
specified is inserted. Then set address data
Move the cursor to the desired position and press the <RETURN Press the [ L > key.
and press [
-_(
l-j.
The the cursor moves right.
] soft key to create an OR circuit.
(c) Line insertion
in a single-net
sequence
program
Blank lines are inserted one by one.
[Operation) 0 Enter the number of lines to be inserted, then press the [insfin] key. The entered number of lines is inserted. (When the [inslin] key is pressed without entering a number, just one line is added.)
If the [inslin]
key is pressed
when the cursor
is positioned
as shown
in the left-hand
figure. a blank line is inserted
as shown in the right-hand
figure.
(d) Element
insertion
in a single-net
sequence
program
Elements are added one by one.
[Operation] 0 Enter the number of elements number of elements If the character [inselm] <A> is inserted. is prefixed to the number of elements to be inserted and the to be inserted, then press the [inselm] key. The entered
key is pressed. elements key is pressed
are inserted after the cursor. entering the number of elements to be inserted,
(If the [inselm]
without
just one element is inserted.) ,I

II
<c..mm
n.. :.>:.....:.>:...
(.
_~&$+
I I I
4
Cursor
1-39
5. OPERATION
If the (inselm] figure,
key is pressed is inserted
when
the cursor
is placed
as shown figure.
in the left-hand The element is
an element
as shown
in the right-hand
inserted before the cursor.
If the character hand figure.
<A>
is entered
and the [inselm] figure, an element
key is pressed is inserted
when the cursor
is
placed as Shown in the left-hand
as shown
in the right-
The element is inserted after the cursor. -_ program
(6) Deletion
in asequence
-_
(a) A program
can be partially
deleted
by positioning
the cursor at the location
to be deleted
&td pressing one of the below three soft keys
e__--
1 :
Deletes a horizontal Deletes a vertical
line, relay contact,
relay coil, etc.
[4 1 2
I:
] :
line extending
upward to the left of the cursor. upward to the right of the cursor.
Deletes a vertical line extending
(b) Use the [Delnet] instruction).
key to delete a program
net (section
from an RD instruction
to a WRT
(c) Multiple
nets can be deleted one by one.
[Delnet]
[Operation] Deletion Move the cursor to the net to be deleted, deleted is displayed in red. then press the [Delnet] key. The net to be
Deleting multiple
nets key, or [search] after a numeric

If the [c-down]
Move the cursor by using keys such as the cursor down key, [c-down] key, then display numeric value. value the nets to be deleted the cursor In red.
key is pressed as the entered
is entered.
moves
as many
times
Execution Cancellation
: Press the [exec] : Press the [cancel]
key. key.
l-40
5. OPERATION
When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, delete, enter the number of nets to delete. can be omitted.
move the cursor to the first net to key. With this
then press the [Delnet]
operation,
steps G and 8
(7) Searching
in a sequence
program
A sequence
program can be searched
using the following
soft keys:
(Search1
When this key is pressed,
the start of the sequence
program
is displayed
on the screen
and the cursor is moved to the start of the program. (b) [bottom] When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence the cursor is moved to the end of the program. program is displayed on the screen and
(c) [srchl
Search operation using this key searches the program for aspecified address from the current location for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. on the screen. When an address in one of
is found, it is displayed two ways. 0 Address specification key. This operation
An address to search for can be specified
usina the cursor searches the program for the specified address from the current
Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press the [srch]
location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. If the specified displayed address is found, the section of the program positioned containg the address is
on the screen.
The cursor is automatically
at the found address.
If the search operation To terminate searching,
fails to find the specified press the c ESC > key.
address, the cursor does not move.
l-41
5.
OPERATION
Gll.6
-Y49.1 D32.0
II
When the same address as this address is to be searched for. move the cursor to this position, then press the (srch] key.
F54.1 ,. x0.4 II II x0.5 -
GE.1
021.2
When the same address is found, the cursor moves to this location.
Address soecification
bv address inout then press the [srch] key. location
Enter the address to find with the keyboard, This operation
searches the program for the specified
address from the current
of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. When the specified is displayed address. If the search operation fails to find the specified address, an error indication appears. address is found, the section of the program containing The cursor is automatically positioned the address at the found
on the screen.
04
(w-srch] (WRT coil search)

This key is used to search the program current location for a relay coil with a specified address from the of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. on the screen. When a relay coil
is found. it is displayed
If multiple relay coils are found, the coil which is the
closest to the cursor is displayed The address of a relay coil to search for can be specified in one of two ways.
Address soecification Move the cursor srch] key. This operation
usino the cursor to search for, then press the [w-
to the relay coil with the address
searches
the program
for relay coils with the specified
address
from the
current location of the cursor When
on the screen to the end of the program. address is found, the section of the program
a relay coil with the specified it is displayed operation
containing
on the screen and the cursor is positioned fails to find a relay coil with the specified
at the relay coil. address, an error
If the search indication
appears.
Address specification Enter the address srch] key. This operation
bv address inout of relay coils to search for with the keyboard, then press the (w-
searches
the program
for relay coils with the specified
address from the
current location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program.
l-42
5. OPERATION
When
a relay coil with the specified it is displayed operation
address
is found,
the section
of the program
containing
on the screen and the cursor is positioned fails to find a relay coil with the specified
at the relay coil. address, an error
If the search indication
appears.
(e) [n-srch]
(net-number
search) net number, entering starting from the top of the display is
This key displays the screen. advanced (f)
those ladders that have a specified key is pressed without
If the [n-srch]
a number,
by one net. search) instructions. Searching the [s-srch] function is performed key. by entering a function
[s-srch ] (function-instruction This key searches instruction for function
name or number,
then pressing instruction, for.
If the [s-srch]
key is pressed
while the cursor is on a function that function instruction
instructions
with the same number as
are searched
(g) Search operation

l l l
using the cursor keys (<
>, -z +
>) The address is searched for. instruction instruction number, END1 is for.
Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key. Enter a function instruction
The NET No. is searched by a function for. The function
name, or enter S followed The function press instruction key.
then press a cursor key. Example: Enter Sl,
is searched
then
a cursor
searched for, (h) Searching When the in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH) source program type is FORMAT-B/C, global searching in all main/sub-
programs is enabled. Refer to APPENDIX 6 Managing a Source Program for source program type.
1)
The range of search All programs, which include a currently is searched displayed subprogram, are searched for.
The subprogram a) b) c) d)
for in the ascending
order of P address. opening subprogram.
From the current cursor position From next numbered subprogram
to bottom of currently to last numbered
one.
From LEVEL1 to subprogram From top to cursor position
of which P address is small next to a). in subprogram of a).
l-43
5. OPERATION
G-SRCH
mode continues
unless pushing
the < ESC > key or the [cancel]
key.
A __1. 8 I@ @ @ m t @ 0 @ Final net of the maximum Th (Searching in the order of @ -@I) numbered subprogram v cursor t displaying on the screen 1 one of subprograms Whole program 1st net of LEVEL1
Searching
result
When the object of search is found, the cursor will move to the position. In case of finding closed. Then, the program which contains the object, will be opened to display the object position with the cursor. At this time, whether to save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are in another program the program which is currently displayed will be
modifications
in the program to be closed.
When two or more objects exist, the result of search are displayed by one.
in order of 1) one
l-44
5. OPERATION
3)
Operation The global search is operated with the following function key.
(comand] 8 [comand]
Select the [G-srch]
with pushing
the [SHIFT]
(the following
will be displayed)
in state of 8
[G-SRCH]
(Shortcut
command
is <G > + [COMMAND]) mode by the operation unless quitting of 0 + 9. mode.
a) Beginning of G-SRCH
It switches After that, all programs
to the mode of G-SRCH are searched
G-SRCH
b)
Execution
of search [search],(d) [w-srchjY(e) [s-srch] in (7)Searching in a sequence
Refer to (c) program,
for how to specify the target of global search.
c) End of G-SRCH
G-SRCH different - <ESC> individually. =
mode < ESC > or [CANCEL] key. The end method is
mode is ended by pushing
Only G-SRCH
mode is ended. The program
on the opening
now
is the state as it is. - [CANCEL] = It returns SRCH to the program which was opened at beginning the G-
mode. The program on the opening
now closes. in case there are
Whether will save or quit modifications modifications
is inquired,
in the program which IS currently
displayed.
Copying
sections
of a sequence
program
A multiple-net
sequence
program can be copied net by net.
Specify the net to be copied. file. The selected
The net
net can be copied remains as it was.
in the same file that IS being edited or Into another
l-45
5. OPERATiON
File which is beinq edited
[COPY1 Range to be copied [until]
Specified
file
Fig. 51.2
(6)
[COPY]
$$ :::;$$,j:$;~: $ ++t
.,:/..:...\:::..: ..:...;. .
..., :,
..Z_
. . ...).
.:.:.::,:.:..:.:.:.:,:.;,,
:I;,
$S;+b ;;
;:&J&&,l
:: ::..:.:,. .:::::::::
~~i~~~~~~,~~~ ~:~~pI~~, j@$j$$

.:.:.:.:i.::,.:::::::: .,:.:..::::: .~:::.:.:.~.:::.:.;::.._,._. :.:
..:.:.:...:.:.:.::....:.:.:.:.L:.,. :.:.:.:.:.:.:,.:y(.:.~.:::
:.:.:ii
.:,:,y . . . . . :.>;.x
,:.y
.......:.:Q:.:.:~:.:.~.:.:
1:.
$+.:.
I
key. The selected net is
[Operation] Copying a net Place the cursor on the net to be copied displayed in yellow. and press the [Copy]
Copying two or more nets To select the nets to be copied, copied, then move the cursor first move the cursor to the first net of the range to be to be copied The selected by nets
to the net at the other end of the range [c-down], or [search] key.
pressing the cursor up, cursor down, [c-up], are displayed Alternatively, in yellow. enter a numeric value
and press
the [c-up]
or [c-down]
key.
The cursor
moves according
to the specified
value.
Setting the net or nets to be copied Press the [until] Specifying file) Move the cursor to the copy destination in the same file and press the (to] key. The key. using the [to] key
the copy destination
(Copying
the net or nets in the same
l-46
5. OPERATION
selected cursor.
net or nets are copied To copy the selected
immediatelv
above the CODY destination
specified
by the
of times
net or nets two or more times, enter the number the [to] key.
they are to be copied before pressing
c3 Specifying the copy destination

file)
using the [to-fill
key
(Copying
the net or nets into another
1) Press the [to-fit] key. The following message is displayed. *

c, If no program is specified, LATMP is created. ~:~~.:.:.:.:.:c.:.:.:.::~~~~:~:~:~:~~~::ii: i:~l::::::~~:l::t:l:::ill:~:~~:~:~:~:~ :. .:.: ::::::.,.,. :::.: ::::::ix:::: .: ..:...:...:.:.:.)):: .:.:~l:~.~:..:.~.: .,,,...,:. ..,.:: .::: ::::::: .:. .....$ .,, . ;: ?:(.. :......:,:, ...,,:. .:::;.:~ .,... : ........ .. .. : :: .:,: ..... .y.: : .. (LATMP file: Provisional work file used in editing)
j))
2)
3)
Enter
the-name > key.
of the file
into
which
the
net(s)
is to be copied
and
press
the
<RETURN
Select desired processing
from the following
POP-UP menu:
/I 4) If the selected destination file is present, from the menu. the following POP-UP menu is displayed.
Select desired processing The file already exists. ~1 Update F2 Quit Append
F3
Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces the previous data of the file. Cancels output to the selected file. Appends the copy to the selected file.
@ If the nets to be copied are known beforehand,

copied, enter the number of nets to be copied, and @ can be skipped. (Note) Incorrect nets cannot be copied. of a sequence program
place the cursor
on the first net to be key. Steps @, ai,
then press the [Copy]
(9) Moving
sections
A multiple-net copied.
sequence
program
can be moved
net by net.
Specify
the net or nets to be
The selected
net or nets can be moved to another The selected
place in the same file that is being
edited or output to another file. The only difference moving. -tIWlet [Move] until cancel search Delnet Insert
net or nets are deleted. net or nets are deleted in
between copying
and moving is that the selected
Adress
Search
WY
Move
File
syEdit
c-down
c-up
to
cancel
search
c-down
C-UP
to-fil
+org
l-47
5. OPERATION
[Operation] Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 0 to $3 for copying.
(Note)
incorrect
nets cannot be moved.
(10) Combining
a sequence
program
A source program can be combined The source program to be combined
to another source program that is being edited. can be displayed and edited separately, then combined to
the original source program that is being edited. Original screen r View screen
[}-9
Section to be edited
File being edited (original file)
1
t
Edit
I F-01
Fig. 51.2 (7) Combining a Sequence Program for the FAPT LADDER screen. even system
Combine
Edited file to be combined
The model specified to be entered
must agree with the PMC model of the file can be specified each other. for (If a
on the original for (VIEW)
However,
the file to be combined do not agree with
(TO) or entered disagreement
if the two models is displayed.)
is found, a warning message will be detected
In this case, no errors range or function will be detected
even if the file to be combined
contains model.
an address (The error the
instruction
format that does not agree with the specified When ignoring the warning message
in compilation.)
to continue
operation,
extreme care is needed.
l-48
5. OPERATION
1)
Function keys
[Comand ]
inmet ~ BPiiiei: ::. : :Adiers :. I_lnreti. :!.. .. ... ,.:,. Se&&. j r &,fjjf ;:;:: ;,.:&qove.. &
.. .. syEdii
ORIGINAL View
= display = display
when the file is opened when the file is opened
for the first time using the [File] command is carried out on the View 1 screen
PMC Model on which editing
ORICISAL
= Initial displa) at opening the file = Display opened by [Filel comand -Model of PMC edited in View screen NET 00001-00002 STEi YOOO. 0
EDIT .~LAN!Eii: VlCW :LA: PYC-fiC3 ; x000.0 +z;

A: YFLADDERFTEST.
Kmmm
SliB71 ISP
I PO@@I I
sY=sAwlE
0002/6552
Fig. 51.2
(8)
Screen
Displayed
when a File is Opened
by the (File] Command
l-49
5. OPERATION
2) Operation flowchart for combining a sequence program
Specify an insertion point (The data is inserted immediately above the cursor.) I
[ Press thl:LE]
key 1
Specify ; view file
c POP-UP menu > 4 (View) Shows the ladder diagram of the file to be combined (View screen) 1. Check the displayed data of the file to be combined 2. Edit the data of the file to be combined and combine it +
(To)
Combines the file with the Ladder program on the original screen 1. The file is immediately combined. The data of the file is not displayed.
Edit the Ladder program on the view screen (Normal editing)
< POP-UP menu s +
Press the c ESC > key to terminate
editing
(Save)
$ (Edit) Returns to the ladder diagram screen (The view screen is continued.)
Saves the Ladder program shown on the view screen
* 1: The name of the provisional Fig. 51.2 (9)
work file is LATMP. Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program
Operation
1 - 50
5. OPERATION
3)
Examples
Example 1. Combining
a sequence
program file
[Operation] Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.
Select [File]. Enter the name of the file to be combined and press the <RETURN > key.
From the following
menu, select Fl (To).
The file is inserted screen)
immediately
above
the net specified
in step
0.
(Original
a modified sequence
program
Select [File].
Enter the name of the file to be combining
and press the <RETURN
> key.
From the following
menu, select F2 (View).
Edit the Ladder <ESC> conventional key.
program (Ladder
on the view editing can
screen. be
To terminate and
editing, terminated
press in
the the
performed
way.)
l-51
5. OPERATION
@I From the following
menu, select Fl (Save).
Temp (Outputs the data to the LATMPm
file.)
Return to the screen of step-@and Then, select Fl (To). Y
check -the name of the file output
in step @.
.- @I -The-file screen)
is
inserted
immediately
above
the net specified
in step
0.
(Original
a specified
section of a sequence
program
Select [File].
Enter the name of the file to be combined
and press the <RETURN>
key.
From the pop-up menu, select F2 (View).
Select (until].
[Copy]
or [Move]
on the view
screen
and specify
a desired
range
with
From the
following
function
menu,
select
[to-org].
(Specify
insertion
into
the
original screen.) [until] to cancel search c-down c-up to-fil to-org
From the following
menu, select Fl (Exec).
jj
The data is inserted screen)
immediately
above
the net specified
in step 0.
(Original
1-52
5. OPERATION
(11) Editing
a symbol
and comment
from the ladder
diagram
editing
screen
On the ladder diagram editing screen, can be edited.
a symbol and comment
added at the specified
address
[Comand]
[syEdit]
1
.: ~~:;~::;:::: i:.,:,:j
: ..
:ig:::iexee+:: aiijans~l, j3
..I. ,.,., .?. .A. .. .,.,. ,: .. ..
::,Y;~y~r::~:~
::
I
in a ladder diagram, key. place the cursor on the corresponding
[Operation] Specifying an address
To edit a symbol and comment address and press the (syEdit]
Editing the symbol and comment The cursor moves to the symbol editing section the symbol and press the <RETURN > key. in the bottom right part of the screen. field. Edit
The cursor moves to the comment
Terminating (exec] key [cancel]
editing : Terminates Terminates editing after modifying editing without the data. the data.
key :
modifying
(12) Abbreviated
input
with the [cornand]
key
Each function strings below,
key can be directly
selected
with the [comand] function key.
key.
Enter one of the character that are enclosed in
then press the [comand]
Those
portions
brackets can be omitted. I S M (nsert) (earth) (ove) D c F (elnet) (OPY) (ile) (SY)E NW
The function
keys in the menu above can be used for program creation and search operations.
(Note)
The
keys
[k
or L ] and
[J
orJ
] are used
to create
or delete
a vertical
line
extending
upward to the left or right of the cursor in a ladder diagram. and the dashed vertical line IS for deletion.
The solid vertical
line is for creation to a function
The menu item applying
key depends on the ladder diagram and cursor position.
l-53
5. OPERATION
(13) ZOOM
When the source program type is FORMAT-B, edit another subprogram, which is called
it is realized
with easy operation instruction
to refer and
by the CALU
CALLU
from the program
now on the opening. For the source program type, refer to APPENDIX 6 Management a source program.
1) Start up of zoom
a) Moved the cursor to the parameter <RET> key. of the CALUCALLU instruction and push the
b)
The program
now on opening
hides
from the editing
screen.
Then
the subprogram
which is specified
by the parameter
in mentioning
above appears on the screen.
2)
Start up under editing When ZOOM is attempted be inquired. Select either. while editing the program, the preservation of modifications will
II
3) by ZOOM, Fl F2 F3 F4 F5
Close the current program. Fl Save 8 zoom F2 Cancel
End of ZOOM When the end operation it will return with the =zESC > key is attempted to the state when ZOOM in the program Moreover, editing screen to
is started.
it is possible
return to the program configuration
screen all at once.
End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)
Save(update) Quit Renamesave Edit Main
& quit & quit
a)
Fl:Save(update)
& quit of current
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content program screen is preserved.
b)
F2:Quit It returns to the program screen where ZOOM program screen is cancelled. was started, after the content of current
l-54
5. OPERATION
c)
F3:Rename,
save & quit of current
It returns to the program screen where ZOOM was started, after the content program screen is preserved into specified subprogram name.
(14) List of subprograms The list of subprograms
in use called from currently displayed program is displayed. a step sequence (14) List"of "FAPT manual B-66131/04-6.
For the function.
refer to the., chapter
12. Creating operators
LADDER (personal computer) Only the operation is described
supplementary here.
1)
Operation The command List is operated with the following function key.
[comand] 1 8 [comand] .......... : .......... ............................................ ........ ...... ,.,:.: 1$$$i&$;;$ 2 :~,~i5t~ 3 $$$&$:$j;j4 .$&&&r$r_i j ;;&&&;i
......... ........ ......... :. ... .... ix,? .y,:+:)( ,,.,: ..:. j.
..:.
I :,,,: Iy::.Ii:: ;.,,: ;<;;;:<.y
6 $$;$$.tt$$7 ~&~~~ 8 ~~>:,.$&$;~~$ g $;&gijllia@:ii, o:~~:~~:.:~:~~~,d~~ ..... : .................... .. .......... : ......,: ... ... ...... ...... : ..:.
...... : : : .......... :: .IQi
I
1
:!:::~::.~$~:,.,~~~~ 2 ,(...... .:.>y.

..: :::,., ~,
..,. .::,. .:,. . :..:.....; ./. i~~~~~~~~~i:aii

.A.. .,y,.:. . . . . . .I :.:::,. .. .. :
Select the [List] with pushing

.::,::.:.. ..
the [SHIFT]
,.. .. :
(the following will be displayed)

fZy... ..:.:.;:.:. :..,.
in state of 8
1
.,
4 :il~,id,iri;i3:,~:~ 5 $$,e)!$::i; 6 :i: :iil.::~;:i~~~~~~jxi 7 iil~;~~~~: ... 3 Qqiiaiiiij:iii~~~~~~ ::.: : :.

.. : . .\. .:.::;
.L... ).
_,............,.~.~i.,~~ ~, :..., ..,. :. ....:.:.,.: ~~~i~~~~riiiilli g ~~;i::~iis::::iiii Or;.;$,Lift j,:

III:I:I:i:i:
:.,.. i..: :.:.:.:..

. ....
.::,:.:::.y::/~
:. :,:,:
:::j
..I
::l)j
(Shortcut
command
is < L >
+ [COMMAND])
(15) To edit Net comment
It is able to write comment,
the comments
between
ladder
nets.
These
comments
are called
Net
and each of them occupies
two steps in sequence
program.
1) To enter Net comment a) Move the cursor to the position you want to write a net comment. And then press <Shift > + [netcmt].
R1OO1.O
R1000.2
Y2000.4 n
R1OO1.O +*I
R1000.2
Y23.4 A
l-55
5. OPERATION
b)
Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, ( and ) is inserted. Then the cursor changes the area. The area for Net comment display mode) automatically can expands up to a hundred expands according lines. into character-size
and the area for comment
enclosed
by
cursor,
and type comment
sentence
onto
and shrinks
by two lines
(four lines at four lines Every Net comment
to the comment
sentences.
R1OO1.O R120.3 =Li
R1000.2
Y2000.4
n
character is written in here. you can enter are available. 4
cursor 9 ) Y23.4
( Net comment (* All characters R1OO1.O
R1000.2
+H2) To determine or cancel the editing Net comment
a)
To determine comment
the editing
Net comment,
press
[ end ] or < ESC>.
Then
the editing
is fixed,
and the Net comment
editing mode is finished.
b)
To cancel cancelled
the editing and erased.
Net comment,
press
[cancel].
The new Net comment
will be
Note)
The number of characters ASCII character as two bytes. Line feed is also available for Net comment.
in a Net comment one Japanese
is limited to 4095 bytes: counting
one
as one byte,
kana as one byte, one kanji character
on Net comment.
Line feed is helpful
to save memory
3)
To modify Net comment
a) Place the cursor on the Net comment which you want to modify and press
<Shift > + [netcmt] and the Net comment or < RET > . The Net comment editing mode becomes active, will be ready to modify its contents.
b) At Net comment editing mode, to insert a blank line into Net comment,
( Net comment ( All characters is written in here. you can enter are available. I::: ) 3
press [inslin].
1-56
5. OPERATION
[inslin]
will shift lines at the cursor and after down by one line,
and make a blank line
at the cursor position. ( Net comment .. ( y: :. . ( All characters is written in here.
l )
) )
you can enter are available.
(
c) At Net comment editing mode, to delete by line, press [dellin].
( Net comment (* Net comment ( All characters (* [dellin) line. ( Net comment ( &I characters is written in here. you can enter are available. editing mode, is written in here. will expand or shrink automatically. you can enter are available. :.:.:.: .iz
l ;
3 3 3 3
will delete whole one line at the cursor and shift lines after the cursor up by one
) )
d)
To exit from Net comment
press [ end ] or < ESC >.
e) To cancel the modifications

the modifications and the modifications.
you have just made, Net comment will
press [cancel]. be restored as
[cancel] it was
will abandon before the
4) To delete Net comment
There are two ways to delete Net comment.
Use [Delnet] [command]
as same as deleting + [Delnet]
normal ladder nets.
--) specify area to delete -+ [exec]
Entering
Net comment
editing
mode
by c Shift > + [netcmt]
or
<RET > with
the
cursor on the Net comment
which you want to delete, and then press [delete].
5) Lost Net comment
A Net comment Net comment
consists pointer, These two
of the information and Net elements
of position string
in sequence data which one
program which is called is comment to one sentences a Net such as by is
comment
themselves. comment, copying user.
are usually
combined
to make
but the partner
might be lost by illegal file operations or modifying the Net comment
or something,
the ladder file .#LA
data file NETCMT.OOO
When a Net comment
pointer loses its Net comment
string data, the Net comment
called Lost Net comment. Lost Net comment displayed in purple is displayed or dimly as blank Net comment on monochrome enclosed Lost by I( and ) Net comment which is can be
display.
1 - 57
5. OPERATION
normalized comment,
by editing
operation. copying
Lost Net comment and so on.
can be edited
as a normal
Net
such as deletion,
(16) To edit New page
It is able to specify
the position
to feed page at printing
ladder diagram.
This specification
of
the position is called New page,
and each of them occupies
two steps in sequence
program.
1) To enter New page

a) Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page. I paw I. And then press -z Shift > +
R1OO1.O R120.3 xl-+ R1OO1.O
R1000.2
Y2000.4 A
R1000.2
Y23.4
+Hf
b) Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down,
A w
and the mark of New page is inserted.
R1OO1.O R120.3 x-+
R1000.2
Y2000.4 n v
<New R1OO1.O R1000.2
page> Y23.4
+HI
2)
Other operation
to edit New page
New page can be handled as same as other ordinary copying [ Copy 1, moving [ Move 1, and deleting
ladder nets.
The operations
such as on
[Delnet]
ladder nets are also effective
New page.
(17) Terminating [Operation ] @
editing
of a sequence
program
Press the (ESC
> key on the following
editing screen.
l-58
5. OPERATION
The following
editing end menu(pop-up
menu) appears.
1Fl
F2 F3 F4 F5
Save(update) Quit Renamesave Edit Main
& quit & quit
a)
1:Save(update)
81quit the editing screen will be ended.
After current content of the editing is preserved,
F2:Quit After current content of the editing is cancelled, the editing screen will be ended.
F3:Renamesave After current
& quit of the editing is preserved into specified subprogram name, the
content
editing screen will be ended.
d)
F4:Edit The c ESC > key operation is canceled and it returns to the editing screen of former.
e)
F5:Main With the operation was started. a).b) or c), it returns it returns to the program to a program screen where ZOOM
But with this operation,
configuration
screen at all
once from the nested state.
Either the above-mentioned
is selected
and it returns
to the program configuration
screen,
the main menu or the program screen where ZOOM was started.
When error net exists When the error net exists, ERROR NET NO. is displayed and the end menu is not
displayed. Cope this case by the following.

a) After the error net is corrected operation will be done. or deleted and the state of the error is released, the end
b)
When
pressed
<ESC>
key in the state of 0
after
CAN
is typed
(meaning
of
CANCEL), -
the menu of 6, will be displayed. after removing to return the error net. before editing by
When Save is ordered, it will be preserved When Quit is ordered, it will be able
to the state
cancelling
the content of the editing.
l-59
5. OPERATION
5.1.3
Symbol and comment editing
The definition of terms
Terms Symbol (Extended)
definition and uses Name assigned uniquely to each relay/ coil, to be used in place of PMC address x0.0 ++++I--
display INPUT
Relay comment (New)
Text assigned to relays/coils them.
to explain ;w
COMMEiT CO&NT
Coil comment (Extended and Renamed, old name: Comment) Net comment
Text assigned to coils to explain them. YO.0 --I Text assigned between ladder nets to explain them.
HERE IS COIL COMMENT
$n_ t- COMMENT
Tables for Symbol & Comment specifications
In FAPT LADDER, you can assign names or add notes to l/O signals, internal relays, notes to a sequence program.
and can add
Symbol/Comment
for l/O signals and internal relays
1)
Ver. 8.1 or earlier
Data kind
Symbol ASCII characters (lowercase alphabetic characters not allowed)
Relay comment Not supported
Comment
Available characters
ASCII characters Japanese kanal kanji characters (Note 1) 30 bytes
6 bytes
Not supported
Maximum number
6552 entries
Not supported
64 kbytes - 1 byte I (65535 bytes)
Duplicated definition Display on t-CRT MDI
Not allowed
Yes
l-60
5. OPERATION
2)
Ver. 8.4 or later
Data kind Available characters
Symbol ASCII characters (lowercase alphabetic characters not allowed) 16 bytes
Relay comment ASCII characters Japanese kanal kanji characters (Note 2)
Comment ASCII characters kana/ kanji characters Japanese
(Note 1)
Maximum character Maximum number Duplicated definition Display on CRT/MD1
16 bytes
30 bytes
20,000 entries (Note 3) Not allowed
20,000 entries (Note 3) Allowed
20, 000 entries (Note 3) Allowed
Yes, if it is 6 bytes or shorter. (Note 4)
No
Yes, if the symbol assigned to the same address is 6 (Note 4) bytes or shorter.
Note
1)
CRTiMDl (Japanese
can not display Japanese characters characters
characters,
replaced to blank.
can be handled with only PC98 series) in relay comment are replaced to blank when printing. computer may restrict
Note 2) Note 3) Note 4)
Japanese
Free area size of hard drive, them. When
EMS and XMS on personal
the total size of all coil comments are displayed on CRTIMDI.
exceeds
64 kbytes,
no symbols
and
comments
Comment
for ladder sequence
program
* Ver.8.4 or later
I
Available
Data kind characters
Net comment ASCII characters Japanese kana/kanji Line feed

I
characters (Note 1)
Steps to occupy Maximum charactersiline
2 steps/Net
comment
64 charactersiline 4095 characters/Net 100 lines/Net
comment
(Note2) (Note2) (Note3)
Maximum Maximum
lines number
comment
About 20,000 Net comments No
Display on CRT/MD1
Note 1) Note 2) Note 3)
Japanese
characters
are replaced
to blank when printing. the limitation effects for the Net comment. number of Net may
The limitation Number comments.
which is reached first becomes in each Net comment
of characters
on maximum
Free area size of hard drive, EMS and XMS on personal computer
further restrict them.
l-61
5. OPERATION
Before using extended
symbol comment
Note the followings
in case of using extended
symbofcomment.
1) These functions are available to the undermentioned

PMC-RB4!RB4( STEP) PMCRC4/RC4(STEP) PMC-RBSiRB6 PMC-NB2
PMC setting.
2)
Source
programs
for above-mentioned
PMC,
created
with
ver.8.1
or
earlier,
need
conversion.
The operation is the followings. and start the ver.8.4.
a) b) cl 4
Prepare source programs
Adapt PMC setting to a source program. Convert it into ALL-format Reconvert the mnemonic mnemonic data. data into a source program with another program name.
The conversion
is completed
by above-mentioned
procedure.
3)
There is no operation
in case of creating
new source program.
Moving the cursor
<
+-
>,
<
7,
<t
7,
<
5_ 7
Moves the cursor to another field to be edited. Moves the cursor to another be edited. position within the field to
<Shift>
+ <c>,<+>
Entering a comment When a front-end Japanese. compiled characters
in Japanese processor for Japanese containing word input is used, a comment can be entered characters alphanumeric in is
When a comment (a ROM-format are replaced
kana characters
or m-type alphanumeric and m-type
file is created), with spaces.
all the kana characters
To sstart the front-end the keys. For the operation manual.
processor
for Japanese
word input, press
< CTRL
> and < XFER
of the front-end
processor
for Japanese
word input,
see the corresponding
To exit from the front-end <I keys.
processor
for Japanese
word Input. press the
< CTRL
and
1-62
5. OPERATION
(1) Start
[Operation] @ Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing menu.
The following
symbol and comment
editing screen appears:
! UllOl
I I !
_.~ 0001 lm2 IJUO3
3l
~UDKESS SFWL
XUOOO. 0 x0000. 1 )ilJOUlJ. 2 5oouu.3 SIY-:. W-B WI-C m-i CUWEST CLMEXT COWXT CUWST
COWEST I?ZPUT INPUT lXCT ICPUT SLWLE WCLE SLWLE SUWLE So. 1 ho. 1 Xo. 1 hc. 1
111 t ; MD I ( F4 or SBIFT - F1 4 <- -> key wen 1,s~ I SIllA 1 ZSEARCR 3 MEA 4 f&B
) key hhen you add Address

YOU mve cursor 5. GDELETE
data. by a character. 8CUPY 7 ,.
SPASTE
10 EiB
(2) Entering
a new symbol and comment
A new symbol and comment assigned.
can be added at an address
to which
no symbol
or comment
is
[Operation] Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.
An input window opens on the screen.
1
t Address field t Symbol field
[
t Comment field
1I
Enter an address in the address field.
The symbol field is shown in reverse video.
Enter a symbol. The comment field is shown in reverse video.
Enter a comment.
1-63
5. OPERATION
@ .- The entered address, symbol, and comment are cleared from the window and entered into
the file.
When no symbols data. (3) Editing a symbol
and comments
are entered,
the system
is automatically
set to receive
new
and comment
A symbol and comment assigned -_ .[Operation]. @ - I
to an address can be edited.
If the system is set to receive new data, select [QUIT] Move the cursor by pressing the < c >, <+>,
to exit from that state.
< T >, or c 1 > key and edit the data.
To move the cursor within a field, while pressing key.
the e Shift > key press the < cz-
or e -+>
(4) Moving
a comment
A comment
assigned
to an address can be moved to another address.
[Operation] Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.
Select [DELETE].
The following
message appears on the screen.
1Comment
data copied to paste buffer 1
Place the cursor at the place the comment
is to be moved.
Select [PASTE).
(5) Copying
a comment
A comment
assigned
to an address can be copied into another address.
[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.
Select [COPY].
The following
l-64
5. OPERATION
1Comment
data copied to paste buffer 1
Place the cursor at the place the comment
is to be copied.
Select [PASTE].
(6) Searching for a symbol or address
[Operation] @ 8 Select [SEARCH] The following on the symbol and comment editing screen.
input window appears on the screen.
SEARCH
Enter the symbol or address to be searched
for and the data number.
The system
searches
for the symbol
or address
and the data number
in that order.
The
cursor is moved to the searched data.
(7) Deleting
a symbol
and/or
comment
(a) Deleting
[Operation] 0
both a symbol
and a comment
Place the cursor on the NO field.
C3 Select [DELETE].
Both the symbol and the comment
are deleted.
(b) Deleting
either
a symbol or a comment
[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the SYMBOL or COMMENT field.
Select [DELETE].
Only the selected
symbol or comment
is deleted.
(c) Deleting
two or more symbols
and comments
simultaneously
[Operation] 0 (2 Place the cursor at the top of the range to be deleted. Select [AREA]. The entire line is displayed in reverse video, and the following
Running!
Appoint extent
1-65
5. OPERATION
Move the cursor to the end of the range to be deleted.
Select [DELETE].
All the data displayed
in reverse video is deleted.
(8) Terminating
the symbol
and comment
editing
[Operation] 0 On the edit screen, select [END] or press the <ESC> key.
The following
message appears on the screen: Update (Saves the edited data.) Qutt (Cancels the edited data.)
!i
1 Edit (Returns to editing.)

J
Specify a desired option and return to the edit menu.
(9) Editing
screen
(the case of model
setting
is PMC-RBWRB4
(STEP)/RCWRC4
(STEP))
*Symbol entry number CRT/MD1 can display / Total EDIT ( SYMBOL 6 COMMENT )
I+
I
Coil comment size (byte) CRT/MD1 can display / Total

I
PMC-RB4
I
<O>[A:%FLvDATA%RB4
SYYMBOL 000001/000003 COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090 y (Notel) COIL COMMENT ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT NO. I I I I IV 00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA 00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB cccccccccccccccc ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc 00003*X00000.2 CCCCC 1 '*' means a symbol data which can be displayed on CRT/MDI.
Note 1)
T is the indicator.
Symbol/comment
are displayed
with turning
at this point in ladder
diagram editing screen.
(10) Searching
Search COMMENT. Especially strings.
by a part of strings is active for specified field, LINE NO.IADDRESSiSYMBOLGELAY or COIL
function
you can find relay!coil
comment,
which
is too long,
by specifing
a part of data
l-66
5. OPERATION
1)
Press [SEARCH] Furthermore,
and the pop-up menu apears to specify strings for search. changes as the undermentioned.
9 ::y , o ....;;:, ..: : ., ... ,, I
the display of function-key
.:;:
&.<]:;
.-.; :, ,: .:., :; . _.... ..

2:. -.
. ..
.. ...
. . ..
..;.... .,.
:\\y .
.:.
..
.,.,.,.
:..
2 ,:,.ADRs ..; 3 .SYMB$4
;: f$@f.j.
5 ;: .:C,o$
. ::.: ..:. .,: 6 I .:,,,::;j::i::jj)j:: , $pj.:i:::, 8 :. .. .. : ,. ,,.

.+.. ::... .,.,. .,\ ., _I... ..... . ...
..
.:y
.:.:.:<
:. .,..::.:;::..{:...
2)
Input strings and specify the data kind for searching
by function-key.
A part of strings is available only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL]. If search is success, cursol moves to the found place.
3)
l-67
5. OPERATION
5.1.4 Message editing

An arbitrary instruction described message can be displayed on the CRT!MDI screen of the CNC, using the DISPB as
(SUB 41), which below.
is one of the function
instructions.
Such a message
is created
5.1.4.1
Types and quantity of characters that can be used

usable in message data vary from one CNC/PMC model to another, as
The types of characters listed below.
I
CNC/PMC
I
JIS levels 1 and 2 PMC-RB/RB2/RB3/RB4!RB5/ RBG.RCIRC3IRC4 PMC-RAl IRA2RA3 A X
Characters Full-size hiragana
that can be entered Half-size katakana Alphanumeric characters
F16
0 0
X
0 0 0 0
by FAPT LADDER.)
0 0 0 0
F18 F15B
PMC-N:NA/NB
ra,
(A
PMC-PAlIPA3 cannot be displayed.
: Some characters
They cannot be checked
The half-size
kana and alphanumeric Similarly
characters
can be entered
using the kana and alphanumeric text can be edited is limited
keys on the keyboard.
to symbols
and comments, processor).
Japanese-language
using the Japanese-language as follows:
input FEP (front-end
The number of characters
1) 2) 3)
When only full-size When only half-size
Japanese-language kana characters characters
characters are used are used
are used
: : :
62 characters 127 characters 256 characters
When only alphanumeric
5.1.4.2
The
Edit procedure
that can half-size be used varies between the CNCIPMC model in which Japanese describes
edit method (excluding
language
characters)
can be used and other models. characters
This section
the procedure
common
to all models
(only alphanumeric
are entered),
using the PMC-
RC as an example.
(1) Startup
[Operation] $9 Select [MESSAG] (message) from the edit menu
l-68
5. OPERATION
The following
message data edit screen appears.
(Fig. 51.4)
1 002 ,401:. !
! 003 .AOO.2
; 004 ,400. ,
Fig. 51.4
Message
Data Edit Screen
(2) input
[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.
C~J Key in the desired message data.
(3) Modification
[Operation] @ Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.
Q a
The character
cursor moves on to the message
and blinks there. is required. using the cursor keys.
Place the cursor at the location where modification
Key in the desired characters
to modify the message data.
Press the <RETURN>
key.
(4) Search
[TOP] [BOTTOM]
[Operation] 0 On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM]. address.
QJ The cursor moves to the start or end message
1-69
5.
OPERATION
(5) END
(Operation] @ On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC > .
The following
message
appears.
Select one of the above items, and return to the edit menu.
5.1.5 I/O module editing

The address of each module in the I/O unit is set and deleted as described below.
(1) Startup
[Operation] 0 Select [MODULE] (I0 module) from the edit menu.
The following
Ii0 module edit screen appears.
(Fig. 5.15)
!ADDRESS CROI'P BASE SLOT X0000 SOOOl X000? : x0003 s0004 X0005 , X0006 x0007 \OOOE X0009 x0010 so011 X001? \0013 so014 SO015 i i it
WAVE ID16C ID16C
ADDRESS CROUPBASE SLOT soooo ~0001 YOOOZ PO003 \0004 YOOO5 YOOO6 YOOOi YOOOB YOOOD YOOIO YOOII YOOI? 10013 \0011 10015
WE
l!iEAXCH ?Ihpt"l 3 HELP 1
606LETE 7DELAi.L 8
5,
10 END
Fig. 51.5
(a)
I0 Module
Edit Screen
l-70
5. OPERATION
x0000 'WOO i \ooc2 \0003 \000:
0 0 ; 0
i
! 0
00
::
YOOQl \oooo
1 \ 0002 0003
:: 01
If 1: :I
yoo~
coo10 ~0011 \OO!? xooi3 \OOl? .\OOlI
% sooo~
YOOO4 F0005 FOO06 YOOCi YOOOS 10009 YOOlO 10011 YOOl? YOO13 YOOi4 YOOl5
1WKH ?IXPoT 3BELP 4PKCB 5!4XLUlGDELETE iDEL%L8DKC-i 9.
IOmB,
Fig. 51.5
(b)
Ii0 Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one channel
can be set)
(2) Channel
switching
(only for models
in which more than one channel
can be set)
(i)
To switch to the next channel:
[Operation] 0 Select (NXT.CH].
(ii) To switch to the previous channel:
[Operation] ci! Select [PRV.CH].
(3) Setting
[Operation] Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.
Key in the module address in the following
format:
GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME
(Note
1) The module name that can be specified or I0 unit. Selecting [HELP]
may vary depending the <HELP>
on the model of the PMC the module
or pressing
key can display
names that can be displayed
in the NAME field.
(Note
2)
The I,0 unit MODEL-B GROUP BASE SLOT : : :
is allocated
as follows:
Specify a group number in the configuration. Must be fixed at 0. Specify the unit number of the PO Unit-B. Alternatively. set to 0 if
power ONjOFF information
## is to be allocated.
l-71
5. OPERATION
(4) Deletion
[DELETE]
[DELALL)
[DEL.CH]
(i)
To delete one module:
[Operation J @ Place the cursor at the address where the module is to be deleted.
Select [DELETE].
(ii) To delete all modules:
[Operation] 0
Select [ DELALL].
(iii) To delete the modules set):
of one channel
(for models
in which
more than one channel
can be
[Operation 1 @ Select a channel for deletion.
Select (DEL.CH].
(5) Search [SEARCH]
[Operation] @ Press [SEARCH] after an address is specified.
Place the cursor at the specified
address.
(6) END [END]
[Operation] On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC >.
The following
message appears.
/I
Select one of the above items. and return to the edit menu.
l-72
5. OPERATION
(7) Termination
[END]
[Operation] 0 Select [END] or press the < ESC > key on the editing screen.
@ The following
message appears.
Fl
F2 F-3
Update Quit Edit
key.
The system returns to the editing screen.
5.1.6
System parameter
editing
(1) Start
[Operation] 0 Select [SYSPRM] (SYSTEM PARAMETER) from the editing menu.
G3 The system parameter editing screen appears. The screen shown below is the system PMC model, see item (4) below. parameter editing screen for PMC-FIB. For each
(2) Input
[Operation] (J,) Select an input item (displayed in reverse video) with the < 1 7 and < 1 > keys
Enter data about Input items, see Item (4) below
For information
1-73
5. OPERATION
(3) Termination
[Operation] 0 Select [END] or press < ESC > on the editing screen.
@ The following
message appears:
II
Select a function parameter
key from the above. editing
The screen display returns to the editing menu.
(4) System
screen and input items for each PMC model
(a) PMC-L/M
[Editing screen] 0 PMC-L
j) BCD ?-DIGIT AREA
OBYTE
S:i,%;O: s) 81 11 0- !Xo ) ( 0- 400
F'!K TYPE = L R-AREA 0
l-74
5. OPERATION
TIMER USED AREA (area used for timers1 When timers are set with the TMR function instruction on the CRT/MDI, setting and
display in BCD is possible. This parameter decimal format. specifies the size (in bytes) of an area that can be set and displayed from the start (D300) of nonvolatile instruction parameter memory. data in
This area is allocated
This area must be specified
in the TMR
of timer control
address to enable decimal display. A timer control data address requires as follows: five bytes. Therefore, this parameter must be set
COUNTER CRT/MDI,
USED AREA (area used for counters) of counters are set with the CTR function instruction on the and setting and display in BCD is possible. specifies the size (in bytes) of an area to use for decimal after the TIMER USED AREA in nonvolatile in the CTR instruction parameter of counter setting memory. control data
When the preset values This parameter display.
This area must be specified
address to allow decimal display. A counter control data address requires five bytes. Therefore, this parameter must be
set as follows: (Number of counters for decimal display) x 5 bytes
BCD 4-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq/disolav This parameter specifies
in four-diait
BCD) that can
the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses (CRTIMDI) in 4-digit BCD. memory. Therefore, this parameter
be set and displayed after the COUNTER
on the screen
USED AREA in nonvolatile for four-digit
Two bytes are required set as follows: (Number of addresses
BCD display.
must be
for 4-digit BCD display)
x 2 bytes
BCD 2-DIGIT AREA (area for settinq and disolavinq This parameter specifies
in two-diait
BCDl that can
the size (in bytes) of an area used to store addresses (CRTIMDI) in two-digit BCD.
be set and displayed
on the screen
after the BCD 4-DIGIT AREA in nonvolatile One byte is required as follows: for two-digit
memory. Therefore, this parameter must be set
BCD display.
l-76
5. OPERATION
LADDER EXEC (ladder execution This parameter levels. execution. Note, however, that increased This
time) processing scan time for the first and second thus achieving high-speed ladder ladder
sets an incremental setting reduces ladder
time,
ladder
execution
time on the first and second
levels
reduces ladder processing Initial value 100
time on the third level. 100 to 200
Setting range
CYCLE TIME This parameter specifies a sequence program execution period of 16 or 8 ms.
Initial value Note, however,
0 : 16 ms
Setting
0: 16ms/l cannot
:8ms PMC-L and PMC-M (MMC);
that this parameter
be set with
PMC-L is always set to 16 ms, and PMC-M (MMC) is always set to 8 ms.
IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division This parameter specifies whether
method) method or non-division
to use the ladder division
method. Note that when executed. the non-division method is specified, the third-level ladder is not
IInitial value
(b) PMC-P
0 : Division method
Setting
0 : NO (division
method) method) I
1 : YES (non-division
[Editing screen]
l-77
5. OPERATION
[input item] @I PMC PARAM. This parameter SIZE (0 address size] specifies the size (in bytes) of nonvolatile memory in the common
nonvolatile
memory
(0 address) and internal relay (R address) area.
Initial value
2048
Setting range
0 to 2048
In the initial state, no internal
relay (R address)
can be used.
Be sure to specify
this
input item when using an internal relay.
(c) PMC-N/N
(I/O LINK)/OA
[Editing screen] @ PMC-N/N (I/O LINK)
P!iZ TYPE = K (I/O
LI!Xx)
PMCQA
EDIT
iSWEll
PAitIWMER~
4050 series
10::;
O:BICARF.l:BCD \ 100 - 150s
0:
1 0.W. 1:YES
PUC TYPE j PA
l-78
5.
OPERATION
[Input item] COUNTER DATA TYPE specifies whether the format of a counter value used with the CTR This parameter function
instruction
is to be binary or BCD.
initial value
0 : BINARY
Setting
0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD
LADDER EXEC (ladder execution This parameter levels. execution. This specifies setting reduces
time) processing scan time, time for the first and second ladder thus achieving high-speed ladder ladder
an incremental
Initial value
100
Setting range
100 to 150
The table below indicates ms.
ladder execution
time status during an execution
period of 8
Setting 100% 150%
1 ~~~~
that increased processing processing time
First and second level processing 5ms
time
7.5ms
Note, however,
ladder execution times:
levels
reduces the following

l l l
PMC screen display time CPASCAL
Ladder processing
time on the third level
PASCAL EXEC (PASCAL execution This parameter time. to LADDER second levels, specifies
time) execution time to ladder program
the ratio of C/PASCAL
execution In contrast first and
EXEC, this parameter and increases
reduces
ladder processing time for PASCAL
time on the and similar
processing
processing.
Initial value
I Setting range
0 to 100
I time to PMC screen processin@ processing and PMC screen
PASCAL EXEC RATIO (ratio of PASCAL processino The initial setting display.
l l l
gives the same priority
to C/PASCAL
This parameter allocates PMC screen display time C/PASCAL processing
processing
time to the following:
time
Ladder processing
time on the third level even during PMC screen display.
Under this setting, PASCAL can run periodically
l-79
5. OPERATION
Initial value
50
1Setting
range
0 to 99
When 0% is specified,
C/PASCAL
is executed
after PMC screen display. in this parameter, the time allocated to
Note that if a much greater
value is specified
PMC screen display is too short, resulting
in a delayed display.
PASCAL ORIGIN This parameter program. specifies the start address .of the task control block (TCB) of a PASCAL
Initial value
000000
Setting range
Address
in the PASCAL area
When there is no PASCAL program,
specify
OOOOOOH.
PASCAL DATA ORIGIN This parameter specifies the start address (physical address) of the data area for a
PASCAL program.
Initial value
000000
Setting range
Address
in the PASCAL area
I %FF4000H (or
When
OOOOOOH is set in the when an optional
PASCAL
DATA
ORIGIN
parameter,
sb800000H
RAM is used) is assumed
as the address.
SYNCHRONIZED This parameter
LEVEL 3 (third-level specifies whether
svnchronization) buffer to be used in level 3.
to allow the synchronous
Initial value
0 : NO
Setting
0 : NO / 1 : YES
@I PMUOS
EDITION fmanaaement specifies
software
edition) software used with PMC-N.
This parameter
the edition of the management
Initial value
01
Setting
Edition of the management
software
currently
used
l-80
5. OPERATION
The table below indicates ms.
ladder execution
time status during an execution
period of 8
Setting 100% 150%
First and second level processing 5ms 7.5ms
time
Note, however,
that increased processing
ladder execution times:
levels
reduces the following

l l l
PMC screen display time Language program processing Ladder processing time
time on the third level
IGNORE DIVID CODE (division/non-division This parameter specifies whether
method) division method or non-division
to use the ladder
method. Note that when the non-division method is specified, the third-level ladder is not
executed.
I
@
Initial value
0 : Division method
Setting
0 : NO (division
method) method) I
1 : YES (non-division
LANGUAGE As the parameter

l l l
EXEC RATIO program and PMC screen display have the same priority, this specifies the percentage of the following processing times:
language
PMC screen display time Language program processing Processing time of third-level time Ladder program a language program can be executed cyclically.
While the PMC screen is displayed,
llnitial
value
50
1Setting range
0 to 99
LANGUAGE This
ORIGIN specifies the start address of the link control statement data of a
parameter
language
program.
Initial value
000000
Setting range
Address in the language area
program storage
When there is no language program, specify OOOOOOH.
1-83
5. OPERATION
OPERATOR
PANEL (connectinq specifies whether in this
an FO machine a machine parameter,
operators operators
oanel) panel is used with the FSO. addresses where the
This parameter When
YES is specified
specify
the DtDO
operators operators
panel is actually
connected,
an address for key images transferred to the operators
from the panel.
panel, and an addresses
for LED images transferred
Initial value
0 : NO
Setting
0 : NO i 1 : YES
0 .,,
KEY DI ADDRESS Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external Dl where the operators panel is actually connected.
Setting range
X0 to Xl 27, Xl 000 to Xl 019
ii)
KEY DO ADDRESS Specify the start address (PMC address) of the external DO where the operators panel is actually connected.
Setting range
YO to Y127, YlOOO to Y1014
iii)
KEY BIT IMAGE Specify programs. the
ADDRESS address (PMC address) of key images referenced by user
start
Usually an arbitrary internal iv) LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify programs. the start address
relay area is set.
(PMC
address)
of LED
images
referenced
by user
Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set.
l-84
5.
OPERATION
5.2
Printout
program can be printed out. When PC9801 to Section 2.1 .l. left margin, line spacing and is used, PRINT.SYS must be installed
A sequence beforehand. For printout,
Install PRINT.SYS FAPT LADDER
according
allows the user to set the top margin, 1.4 of Part II.
cross reference.
For details on setting, see Section
Compatible
printers
This software is usable with the printers listed below.
NEC PC9801 NEC PR201H EPSON VP1000 (Note)
IBM PC/AT EPSON VP1000
(Note)
To use an Epson VP1 000 with an NEC PC9801, a program modification 1.4 of Part II.
is required.
For
details, see Section
(1) General
flow of operation
for printout
Select a source program [ EXEC] <Fl > v Specify output item End -[ EXEC] <Fl>
Make # LS file
Fig. 5.2 (a)
Operation
Flow and Screens
l-85
5. OPERATION
The step sequence
diagram printing can be selected at PMC-RB4(STEP)
1 RC4(STEP).
:iliiiiliiiiiiiiiiii~~~pR~N~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
C:FRC4-STEP TITLE SYSTEM PARAMETER SYMBOL & COMENT LADDER DIAGRAM
: : : f :
@#I/YES1 [!WYESl WYESI mT;l;; [OPTION]

,um
Added ->
~~...-I :
I/O UODULE MESSAGE CROSS REFERENCE LIST BIT ADDRESS MAP
: : : : : :
[OPTIONI WYESI [Em/YES1 [OPTION] [CWYESI [OPTION] #tU/YESl
Fig. 5.2 (d)
Printing menu
C:YRC4-STEP
.fil::l:i
FIO ( ESC 1 : END
11
Fig. 5.2 (e)
Optional setting menu for step sequence
diagram printing
1) PRINT UNIT
Select either only a specified When selecting MODULE, sub-program or all sub-programs. name to MODULE NAME. specify the printing sub-program
2)
SUB-PROGRAM
NUMBER sub-program number which belongs to a step sequence
Select either not printing / printing program.
l-87
5. OPERATION
(4) Output
item setting
Items to be output to a drawing specified PMC. at a time.
are specified
as described
below.
More than one item can be on the model of the
Some set items may not be displayed,
depending
Specifying Whether key.
whether to output each data item to output each data item can be specified by placing the cursor on the desired
item on the output item select menu with the 7 or 1 key, then pressing
the <RETURN>
Specifying
options optional items, place the cursor on the desired option, option then press the After
For data having <RETURN entering
> key.
The screen
for specifying
the corresponding
will appear.
the necessary
value on that screen,
press the < RETURN > key.
Detail of each data time 1) Title printing The data of the title is printed. 2) Parameter printing is printed.
The data of the system parameters 3) Symbol printing The symbol comment i) * The output specified 4)
data is printed. of symbol comments to be printed continues is specified. If 0 is
Option (symbol printing) range
as the print end line number,
printing
up to the last line.
Ladder diagram printing A ladder diagram is printed. i) Option (ladder diagram printing) * The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference of a ladder
diagram to be printed are specified. * If a diagram is output module. * If 0 is set as the output end net when a range of nets is specified, up to the last net. a page break is made in the ladder diagram at printing as a list file, the unit of printout must be specified as a
continues .
If a page break is specified, every new file or subprogram.
If a cross-reference cross-reference.
is specified,
the ladder
diagram
is accompanied
with
(Fig. 5.2 (c))
5)
I0 module printing The I/O module data is printed.
6)
Message
printing
The message data is printed. i) Option (message printing) * The range of messages to be printed is specified.
l-88
5. OPERATION
Print format specification Either Japanese-language (Japanese-language input mode screen) or code
format (code input mode screen) is selected. 7) Cross-reference A cross-reference i) list printing list is printed. (Fig. 5.2 (d))
Option (cross-reference *
list printing) list is printed, a check is made for duplicate If a duplicate writing writing, is
When a cross-reference and the output specified, duplicate counter). following
range of addresses is displayed instruction
is specified. for duplicate
write check coil
a message
of a write
and
use of a function table.
that uses a number
(such as a timer and according to the
The range of output
addresses
can be specified
Table 5.2 I Address specification mode
Cross-Reference I Example of keying in ALL Y R1.O x10
List Address
Specification Address to be output
ALL Initial letter of an address Bit address Byte address
All addresses All addresses Specified Specified (including having a specified only initial letter
bit addresses byte addresses bit addresses)
Address range
I F10.0.F12.7 X2.3.END (Note 1)
I All addresses All addresses
in a specified
range address
after a specified
(Note
1) When an address specification
is made, addresses address, P.
are output
in the sequence: therefore,
X. Y,
F, G, R, A, C, K, D. T, variable subsequent addresses are output.
In this example,
Y and all
8)
List file printing Data from a list file is printed.
Fig. 5.2(f)
Example of Printout of a Ladder Diagram with Cross Reference Data
Fig. 52(g)
Example of Printout with a Multiple coil Write Check Indication
l-89
5. OPERATION
Example of printout of step sequence
diagram
(1) Printout example by F2[SETUP] c graphical mode printout >
(print menu) <ASCII . mode printout > t Initial step
Initial step
Transition Label s210 PlOl P150 -h 0 e Divergence of selective P160 sequence +-Divergence of simultaneous I S215 0 S217 sequence P161 1 P165 +Convergence of P162 simultaneous sequence ~ S216 P163 P164 fConvergence Step
;* Sl : Pl .. + PlOO c-L1 s210 : PlOl

l
4 4
Transition Label
+ P150
c+ P160
Divergence
S211 P151 P152
S211 : P151
l
S215 : P161 . + P162 . S216 : P163
+ P152
of selective sequence +Divergence of . simultaneous S217 sequence : P165 -Convergence of simultaneous sequence Step
t 0
S212
t 0
S212 : P153
l
+ P154 of selective sequence Block step
+ 164 cConvergence 4
F; SlOOO : P2000 + P102
of selective sequence Block step
Jump
->Ll
Jump
(2) Printout example
by SUB-PROGRAM
NUMBER
[NONES]
<Not print sub program number >
<Print
sub program number >
&IS1
4-
Sub program number
PlOO c-L1 q s210 P160 P160
jG+G-j-
l-90
5. OPERATION
(5) Specification
of output forms
Specify the paper size and the type of printer forms.
[Operation ] 0 Select [SETUP] on the output item selection screen.
The forms selection
screen appears (Fig. 5.2(h)).
P!P\PER SIZE / LADDERPRIST
: 10 INCH/ * 10 PiCH/ 15 INCH/ 15 IKCH/ ASCII GRAPHIC ASCII GRAPHIC
Fig. 5.2(h)
Forms Selection
Screen
Current < t
output form is indicated >orc J
with *.
To change the output format, move the cursor by
>andenter<RETURN>.
@I After selecting
forms, select [END) to return to the output item selection
screen.
(6) Start of printing
[Operation] Select [PRINT] on the output item selection screen.
Printing screen.
is started: during printing,
the indication
PRINTING
IN PROGRESS
blinks on the
When printing
printing halfway
ends,
the indication select
PRINTING
IN PROGRESS display
disappears.
(To stop
through,
[BREAK]:
the screen
returns
to the input program
specification
(7)
screen.)
Termination
[Operation]
l-92
5. OPERATION
Select screen.
[END]
on the input
program
specification
screen
or the output
item
selection
The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
(8) [LIST]
command
(F2 KEY) as 53.1 The List of source program.
It is the same function
refer to above paragraph.
Note)
If the step sequence a diagram according supported. displayed
function
is selected
when setting a model, the function statement (file with extension
for printing .#LS) is not in the
to a specified
control
The [LIST] command function
for creating
a control statement
is not included
key menu and cannot be executed.
(9) The note if the step sequence

1) Net Numbers When a ladder diagram is
function
is selected when setting a model
edited,
net
numbers
starting
from numbers
1 are
assigned
to
subprograms. subprograms
When a ladder diagram in ascending
is printed,
sequential
are assigned
to all
order of subprogram
numbers.
2)
Cross Reference A cross reference can only include information referenced by the ladder, first, second, or
third level, or by ladder subprograms. step sequence subprogram,
If ladder subprogram
PO001 is referenced
only by a
and if address
PO001 is specified
to print the cross reference,
there is no reference
information.
3)
Printing the Step Sequence The step sequence
Diagram
diagram cannot be printed.
l-93
5. OPERATION
5.3 Compilation
During compilation, an edited source program programs is translated cannot into a ROM format file (object file) (PMC can
executable
by the PMC.
Uncompiled
be transferred
to the ROM writers PMC-NB. compilation
writer or FA writer) or RAM for the PMC. be performed in one of two modes:
With PMC-R series, PMC-QC, mode.
normal mode and condensed
$$g
Transferred andPMC
to the ROM writers
Condensed With mode. PMC-R
mode series, PMC-CC, PMC-NB, a source program can be compiled in condensed mode, the As a result,
When a ladder with the same number
of steps is compiled
in condensed normal mode.
size of the created condensed
ROM format file is smaller than that created in listed below.
mode has the advantages
A larger C language
area can be allocated. Condensed mode
Normal mode Ladder ROM format file
C language
Time required
for compilation
is reduced.
Time required for transfer from the personal
computer
to the PMC is reduced.
A ROM module with a smaller capacity
may be used.
l-94
5. OPERATION
On the other hand, condensed
mode has the restrictions
described
below.
Memory
map changes
(area expansion)
are likely
to occur
when
instructions,
symbols, in In
comments, condensed
and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated mode is transferred to the PMC and edited with the built-in to possible overlap between
by compilation editing function.
this case, the user needs to pay attention C language area.
the ladder area and
ROM format file Overlap (A C language program map change is required.)
1 language 1
A ROM format file generated a ROM format file generated
by compilation by compilation
in condensed in normal mode.
mode cannot
be compared
with
5.3.1 Operation
(1) Start
[Operation] a Select [COMPILJ (compile) from the main menu.
The compile screen appears (Fig. 5.3).
Compile Source Program name
~~~J@.-p>y<y?$y@gQ \.i\.\
\.._,.,\
A:YFLYiIATAYTEST
ROW formatfile name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST.tEl Series VC L PUC name Edilion &chine toolname Programe no.
/
!
~---
Fig. 5.3 (a)
Compile Screen
l-95
5. OPERATION
General
Flow of Operation
for compiling
Main menu
!$yg
Main menu Fig. 5.3 (b) Compiling (2) Compiling
Make#LS fie
General Operation and Screens
.- (a) Normal mode
When
PMCPAljPA3 mode.
is used,
selecting
[EXEC]
causes
programs
to compiled
in the
condense
[Operation] @ Specify a source program name and ROM format specifications. file name. The ROM format file
name must conform to the MS-DOS
Select (EXEC]. Note) For PMC-PAlIPA3. compilation in condensed mode is done by [EXEC].
Compilation
is performed
in the normal mode.
When the compiler compiler terminates
terminates abnormally,
normally,
memory
map information is output.
is output.
When the
an error message
(b) Condensed
mode
Compilation NB.
in condensed
mode can only be performed
with PMC-R series!PMC-QCPMC-
[Operation] 0 Specify a source program name and ROM format speciftcations. file name. The ROM format file name must conform to the MS-DOS
Select [CONDNS]
Compilation
is performed
in condensed
mode.
l-96
5. OPERATION
When the compiler compiler terminates
terminates abnormally,
normally,
memory
map information is output.
is output.
When the
an error message
(3) Output of compiling
result
The results of compilation following
are output to the screen displayed of whether an error or warning
by
[ERROR](F3 key) and to the

If many errors
text files, irrespective
has been issued.
occur, it is convenient
to print out pr check
the error fife with the text editor.
1)
If the step sequence
function
is selected
when setting a model, and if the following messages are output to the following
sample file.
source program is edited, the error and warning
Error file name Output directory
= =
TEST.ERR(depending A: Y FLY DATA%
on the source program)
Compiler
RCBGTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAWFCY
source program name : A:YFLYDATAYTEST ROM format file name : A:YFLYDATAfTEST. #EX
Series Edition NC& PMC name
Machine tool name Program no.
2)
In other case than 1) above, the error and warning file.
messages
are output
to the following
Error file name Output directory
= =
FLMNE.ERR(fixed
name) system is stored
in which the FAPT LADDER
(4) Termination
[Operation]
Select [END).
C?9 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
l-97
5. OPERATION
(5) Specification
of the input program name
(a) Specification
of the input program name
It is possible
to specify
the extension
of its input
program
name as following
3 types.
(Please refer to 1.1.2 compilation * #LS * #CN * No extension
function
about #LS.)
Specify the file WITH its extension It is possible program file. to select the file name with its extension for the #LS-file and the source
Example for the #LS-file.

TESTDATA.#LS
File name Example for the source program file.

TESTDATA.#CN
File name -
Specify the file WITHOUT
its extension its extension) for the #LS-file and
In case of there are some same file names (without the source file, target file is selected by system.
The order of priority for the target file specification 1 2 In case extension. The #LS-file The source program file of inputting the source program file,
is shown below.
please
select
the file
name
with
its
(b) Changing
the file name after using the making # LS file
In case of after using the making # LS file function

is changed to the LS-file name with its extension.
with #LS-file,
the input program name
(6) [LIST]
Command
(F4 KEY)
It is possible to use following

2)
functions
by [LIST].
1) The list of source program
indications
Making .#ls-file
The .#ls-file name.
name which is made by [LIST]
function.
is set into the space for source program
Refer to next page about the details of above mentioned.
l-98
5. OPERATION
Note) If the step sequence

function specified [LIST] command,
function
is selected
when
setting
a model, .#LS,
the link compile is not used. in the function The key
by the control statement,file
with extension
used to create a control statement,
is not included
menu and cannot be executed. (7) Indications of compilation result
MAIN.#LS
##### PASS1 ###I#
B:rb FLADDERY RC3ab MAIN B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ I-STEP B: Y FLADDERS' MODULE+ SUBPl B:a( FLADDERY MODULEY SUBPZ B:Y FLADDERY RC3+ END-STEP tcompilation result PASS 2 ####t PASS2 ##### B:Y FLADDERY RC3Y MAIN B:M FLADDERY RC3Y l-STEP B: + FLADDERY MODULE+ SUBPl Error end 20 (00111 Net ) B: Y FLADDERY MODULEM SUBPZ Error end 31 (00001 Net ) B:Y FLADDERY RC3M END-STEP compile completed error count=00002 warning count =OOOOO
PASS 1: PASS 2: Convert to object Syntax check
c Specified source program name +-Compilation result PASS 1 -Source program name (MAIN.#LS)
Relative net number in each program
5.3.2
Password set function (PMGRAl/RA3/RB3/RB4/RB5/RB6/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2)

is supported only in the FS16/18/21 -B.
This function
It enables a password to be added during compilation. The password CRT:MDI. password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited on the
To discompile correctly.
a ladder program
guarded
with a password,
it is necessary
to enter the
(a) Password types

There are two password types. Each password consists of up to 8 alphanumeric characters.
Type
Password (R) Password (R/W)
Use Password to allow display on the FSlG-B Password to allow display and editing on the FSlG-B I
l-99
5. OPERATION
(b) How to specify use of a password To use a password, set as follows:
Open the initial set file (%%%FLSET.CNF),
using a commercially
available
editor.
:
: ; :
FAPT Text
LADDER Initial Editor
Setting
File
lS: editor
rpl_dha ladkey : :
=; =$; 1;
password=O; t
j-1 :
*tJ;
@ Specify whether to use a password
0:No password 1:Password (R/W) and 2:Password (R/W) 3:Password (RI
(R)
and
the type
of a password
(when
used)
after
password = .
Value 0 1 2 3 No password Both password Password Password
Password is used.
type
types R and RW are used.
type RW is used. type R is used.
(cl
Password setting (compile)
When password = 0
Gotoo.
When password = 1. 2, or 3: After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify
whether to use a password.
IDo
you
enter
password?
(Y/N)
To set a password.
press
cl
If password = 1 or 3, go to 0. If password = 2, go to @.
If it is unnecessary
to set a password,
press cl
Go to @.
l-100
5. OPERATION
The password Enter
(R) set screen appears. (R)
password
Enter a password. . * A password that can be used is a combination Uppercase and lowercase of 8 or less letters and.;or numerals. from each other. (If a lowercase
letters are not distinguished to be uppercase.)
letter is entered, it is assumed * . It is impossible Some character
to use space, kana. kanji, and special characters strings are unusable. string is entered as a password, string. on the screen. before any valid password -,
(such as l , #, and @). is displayed.
If one such character
an error message
In such a case, use another character * * An entered password If the <RETURN> is not displayed key is pressed
is specified,
use of a
password is not specified.
If password = 1, go to @. If password = 3, go to @.
When <ESC>
is pressed, an attempt to specify a password -+
is discontinued.
GotoO.
The password configuration Verification (R)
screen appears.
You will be prompted
to enter the same password
as entered
before,
to ensure that your
password was entered correctly. * When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is
accepted. . When they do not match, the message You are allowed to retry entering When <ESC> twice. is discontinued. Password mismatch is displayed.
is pressed, an attempt to specify a password + +
Go tom. Go to@.
If password = 3 is specified.
The password Enter
(R#V) set screen appears. (R/W)
password
Enter a password .
(R/W).
of 8 or less letters from each
A password that can be used is a combination Uppercase and lowercase

letters
and!or numerals.
other. (If a lowercase
are not distinguished
letter is entered, it is assumed . . It is impossible Some character
to be uppercase.) (such as *, #, and @).
to use space. kana. kanji. and special characters strings are unusable. string is entered
character
If one such character
as a password,
string.
an error message
is displayed.
In such a case, use another
1-
101
5. OPERATION
. 1
An entered password If the <RETURN> password
is not displayed key is pressed
on the screen. before any valid password + Go to@. is rejected. is specified, use of a
is not specified.
When c ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password +
Go too.
The password
confirmation
screen appears.
Verification
(R/W)
You will be prompted password When
to enter the same password
as entered
before, to ensure
that your
was entered correctly. the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is
accepted. When they do not match, the message .You are allowed to retry entering twice. is rejected. Password mismatch is displayed.
When -z ESC > is pressed, the attempt to specify a password -+
Go to@.
Compilation
begins.
(d) Password
entry (discompile) a password-protected ROM format file, it is necessary to enter a password.
To discompile
I
IBoth password
Set password
type
I Password Password Password Password
type to be entered type (R/w) type (RMI) type (R)
types (R) and (R.W)
Password type (R/W) Password type (R)
After discompilation
[EXEC]
is selected,
the following
password
entry screen appears
Enter password (R)
-1
Note) If an RMI password has been set

up, password displayed. (R.W) is
When the valid password If the newly entered discontinues.
is entered,
discompilation
begins. is displayed, and processing
password
is incorrect,
an error message
(You are allowed to retry entering When <ESC>
twice.) is rejected.
is pressed, the request to start discompilation
l-102
5. OPERATION
5.3.3
Changing
the Order of Subprograms

the source program, subdivided intosubprograms, is converted in ascending on the edit screen of the to a
When a program is compiled. single ROM file. numbers. programmer The
Within the ROM file, subprograms order in which subprograms
are arranged
order of subprogram built-in has
are displayed
function
of the PMC-RB4
or PMC-RC4
may be changed
after the source program
been uploaded to FAPT LADDER, decompiled,
compiled,
and downloaded.
5.3.4
It is possible to choose output data (Symbol/Comment, Net comment) to ROM format file
Compile Sourceprogram name ROM format file name
PMC-RB4
<O>[A:YFLYDATAfRB4 1
: A:YFLYDATAYRB4 : A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX
Output to ROM formatfile
SYMBOL ii COkHENT NET COMENT
[F61 tF71
YES PO1 NTERS ONLY
Compile Sourceprogramname ROM formatfile name

_..:.:..::.~ ::::..::.
PMC-RB4
<O>[A:YFLYDATAFRB4 ;
: A:YFLYDATAYRB4 : A:fFLYDATAYRB4. XEX ~..:...:::::j:::...::~. I:: :
Compi le normalend
compilecompleted error count = 000000 warningcount = 000000
EXEC
MAP
3 ERROR
F, SYMBOL
7 NETCMT
8 CONDNS
DOS
10
END
Fig. 53.4
(b) Compile end
l-103
5. OPERATION
(i)
F6 [SYMBOL] Select whether output or not output the symbol 8 comment HoweverJhe symbols which can not be displayed data to ROM format file. (7bytes or more symbols)
on CRTiMDl
and the coil comments
assigned
to them never output to ROM format file.
1) YES: (Default setting)

The symbols comments which can be displayed on CRT/MDl(Gbytes or less symbols) and the coil assigned to them are output to ROM format file. on CRT/MDI.
They can be displayed
2) "NO" :
No symbofcomment is converted to ROM format file. on CRTIMDI. Any symbol and comment is not displayed
(ii) F7 [NETCMT] If Net comment is used in ladder program, you can choose whether Net comment pointer
(Note2) is output to ROM format file or not.
1)
POINTERS
ONLY
: (Default setting) by CNC built-in editor and decompile the data by FAPT
To edit the ladder program LADDER, select this setting. However, format file. ladder
size gets larger
because
Net comment
pointer
is output
to ROM
2) "NO" :
Any Net comment pointer is not output to ROM format file. In this case, ladder size in the ROM format file is saved. However, decompile the ROM format file makes its net comment data information lost.
Note
1)
This item is in effect for Source-format source-program,this setting is ignored.
programs.
At the compilation
of FORMAT-B
Note
2)
Net comment
has its own character
information
only in a source
program
on the
personal computer. Compiled Only Net ROM format file does not include comment pointer( = any net comment characters. position.) can be
information
of net comment NOP.
output to ROM format file as an functional This Net comment ROM format pointer
instruction
helps to restore on CNC
net comment built-in editor
date at decompiling and uploaded
the
file that
is edited
to FAPT
LADDER.
l-104
5. OPERATION
5.3.5
The list of source program
(a)
The list of source program indications
The file (selected directory) Making the #LS-file
appears.
(4
Please select the source program, (Note) It is impossible
and then the #LS-file
is registered. PMC type. Because error
to resister
by source program of different operation.
occur on print out/compilation
The sequence
of making the #LS-file
as following
flow chart.
Select the list of source program
Display the list of source program (The target file indications)
Select one of source program (Register to #LS-file)
(1) Start
(a) Select [LIST]
(< F2 > : Print out/< F4 > : Compilation)
(b) The list of source program The target file indications
screen appears Source program file indications. (Indicated directory)
Indications .. DIR : xxx
Meaning Parent-directory Sub-directory PMC type
l-105
5. OPERATION
Selected file indications
Selected target file is indicated
by absolute-pass.
Fig. 5.35
(1)
The List of Source Program Screen
(2) Function key indications and selection
The list of source program functions
correspond
to the function
keys as indicated
below.
(a) [LIST1
EXEC
1
CHANGE 1 (W EXTEND DRIVE SEARCH 1 (c) END
(b) [CHANGE] 1
DELETE
INSERT
CHANGE
END
(c) [SEARCH) 5
TOP
BOTTOM
FILE
PCTYPE 1 (d)
END
(d) [PCTYPEJ 1
PREV
NEXT
END
l-106
5. OPERATION
(3) Making of #LS-file [EXEC]
The sequence
for registration
source program file to #LS-file
is shown below.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Source file indications
(The target file indications) file
The cursor moves to the selection Push the <RETURN Changing
> key (Registration) (changing of the select file)
of selected file
Select [EXEC]
(Making of the #LS-file + End)
The #LS-file name is changed Each data (System 1st registered file.
to the 1st registered
file name .#LS. module) is effective in the
parameter~TitleSymbol&comment:Message/lO
(4) The list of source program indications
(a) Changing
of directory
with drive [DRIVE]
Changing
of drive + directory
use [DRIVE]
software key. by <cursor > keys.
It is possible to change directory The following
in the same directory
message appears after push the [DRIVE].
INPUT DRIVE NAME, PLEASE '
Example Specification of only drive (Changing to B:)
B:<RETURN>
Specification by absolute-path
+ drive (Changing to B:\DATA)
B:\DATA<RETURN>
(b) Changing of file extension
[EXTEND]
[EXTEND]
is used to change extension
(A part of 5_ mark on Fig. 53.1
(2).
It is possible to indicate file name except source program by changing In case of there are some selected Extension files, it is impossible by [EXTEND]
extension.
to use this function.
can be changed
Fig. 5.3.5 (2)
A Part of Target File Indications
l-107
5. OPERATION
The following
message
appears after pushing
the [EXTEND].
INPUT EXCHANGE EXTEND(MAX 3 CHA.) '
Result from specification File indications (Without extension)
File name with specified
extension
Searching
for a fle in the source file list [SEARCH]
Following
functions
to &arch
in the source file list are available.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Searching Searching Searching
for the first file for the last file by file name
[TOPI [BOTTOM] [FILE] [PCTYPE]
Searching by PMC model
(4
Searching
for the first file [TOP]
The cursor moves to the first file in the current directory.
lb)
Searching
for the last file [BOTTOM]
The cursor moves to the last file in the current directory.
Searching
by file name [FILE]
Type a filename When specified When specified to continue
followed
by [FILE]. file. And then, it is possible
file exists, the cursor moves to the specified file does not exist, an error message any key.
is displayed.
to search by pressing the search function,
To terminates
press < ESC > key or select [EXEC].
(4
Searching
by PMC model (PCTYPE)
Type a PMC type, for example When files with specified possible following to select operations
RC3, followed
by [PCTYPE]. the cursor moves to the file. <RETURN> And then, it is key. And,
PMC type exist,
the file at th e cursor are also allowed. for the previous
position
by pressing
[PREV] searches [NEXT] searches
backward
occurrence
of file with specified
PMC type.
forward for the next occurrence
of file with specified
PMC type. And the, it is
When no file with specified possible to continue To terminates
PMC type exrsts, an error message any key.
is displayed.
to search by pressing
the search function,
press < ESC z= key or select [ENDj.
l-108
5. OPERATION
(6)
Changing
the selected
file list [CHANGE]
Following
functions
to change the list of selected files are available.
1. 2.
Deleting a file Inserting a file
[DELETE] [INSERT]
This operation file list area.
is also used to move the cursor between
the source
file list area and selected
(a) Deleting
a file [DELETE]
A file at the cursor position
is deleted.
And, the files following
the deleted
file are shifted
one line upward on the display.
(b] Inserting
a file [INSERT]
at the cursor position and then the cursor moves to the source file
A blank line is inserted list area. By selecting a source
file in the source
file list area, the selected
file is inserted
at the
blank line and the cursor moves to the inserted file name.
(c] Terminates Function
the changing
of selected
file list [END]/ < ESC >
to change the selected
file list terminates.
(7) Terminating
[END ]/ < ESC >
The source program listing function
terminates.
In this case no .#LS file is created.
5.3.6
DOS command
shell from FAPT LADDER by pushing this, key in the command [DOS] key. command line.
You can call MS-DOS If you want to terminate
as bellow at MS-DOS
A:bEXIT
l-109
5. OPERATION
5.4 Decompilation
During decompilation, printed out. Data that is uploaded from the PMC or is read from ROM is ROM format file data. Such data must be decompiled Data in the a ROM format file is translated into a source program that can be edited or
ROM format file cannot be edited or printed out. edited or printed out.
before it can be
(Note)
To discompile password.
a password-protected
ROM
format
file,
it is necessary
to enter
(See Section 5.3.)
5.4.1
Operation
(1) Start
[Operation] 0 Select [DISCPL] (decompile) from the main menu.
The decompile
screen appears (Fig. 5.4).
2, 1: 3) 4, 51 6~ 7 8) 9)
COUtiTER DATA TYPE PMC.:OS SERIES LADDER EXEC (UNUSED, (UNUSED) (UNUSED (UNUSED SYNCHRONIZED LEVEL P&Z/OS EDITION
: :
405: SerieS ( O:BINARI.l:BCD 100% ( 100 - 150%
) 1
: 0:
( 0:NO.
1:YES
Fig. 5.4
Discompile
Screen
(2) Decompiling
[Operation] 0 Specify a ROM format file name and source program name.
Select [EXEC] on the decompile
screen.
l-110
5. OPERATION
Decompilation
is performed
and memory map information
is output.
@ When
the decompiler is output.
terminates
normally,
the
message
DECOMPILE
TERMINATED is
NORMALLY output.
When the decompiler
terminates
abnormally,
an error message
(3) Termination
[Operation] 0 Select [END].
The screen display returns to the main menu screen. PASCAL and C language data is lost. After editing and
(Note
1)
During
decompilation,
recompilation,
link PASCAL and C language data again. in condensed mode can be decompiled can be recompiled in
(Note 2) A ROM format file generated by compilation

using the same operation. After editing, condense moded, if necessary.
the source
program
l-111
5. OPERATION
5.4.2
Outputting
to split files
are output files. to a source program, they are split into units of
When the results subprograms
of decompilation
and output to different
For details, see Section 9.1.
ROM program
Source program LEVEL1 #LA
Ladder 1st level LEVEL2.#LA
Ladder 2nd level LEVELB.#LA END3 (SUB 3)
1 1
Ladder 3rd level
SP (SUB 7
SPE (SUB 72) v
SP (SUB 71)
PO02
SPE (SUB 72) L
1 *
I
The END instruction is not included in
SP (SUB
IH END (SUB 64) 1-1

1
the source program. The instruction is automatically added
when the program is compiled.
1-112
5. OPERATION
54.3
Converting a step sequence program according to the model

are used to convert a ladder program according to the model. SEQ) is
Usually, mnemonics However, converted
a ROM file is used only when a step sequence for the PMCRC4(STEP SEQ.
program for the PMCRB4(STEP
[Procedure] 1) Compile program. 2) 3) 4) Set model PMC-RCI(STEP Select F4 (DECOMPILE) SEQ) for FAPT LADDER. from the main menu. the program. the step sequence program for the PMCRB4(STEP SEQ) and create a ROM
Specify the ROM file created in step 1)above and decompile
The program is converted. the PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ.
The step sequence
program read into FAPT LADDER
can be used for
5.4.4
Merge
file is specified for output source program when decompiling, the existent
In case the existent
source program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents In this case it is possible program by specifying
of ROM data. in source
to merge the Ladder in ROM data with the SymboVCommnet function-key.
the undermentioned
- When the used name is specified
for source program
Decompile ROM format file name Source program name OOutput
PMC-RB4
<O>[A:YFL%DATAYRB4
: A:YFLYDATAYRB4.#EX : A:yFLYDATAyRB4
to Source program [F4] YES [FS] SOURCE DATA(effective)
SYMBOL/COMMENT MERGE Duplicated symbol definition
Specified Overwrite
source program already exists. 7 (Y/N)
1-113
5. OPERATION
(1)
F4 [MERGE] This specification decides whether to merge the symbol/comment by NO or YES.
1)
NO The
: (Default setting) existent source program is deleted and new source program is created with the
contents
of ROM data. in this condition.
There is no display of F5[SYNBOL)
2)
YES
: in source program is merged with that in ROM data. As for the other ROM data is effective. F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed to specify which symbol
The symbolkommnet
data except symbol/comment, Just after this specification,
definition
is effective,
either in source program or in ROM data, when they are in conflict.
(2)
F5 [SYMBOL] F5[SYMBOL] will be displayed decides when YES symbol is specified definition for F4[SYMBOL]. source program or ROM data is
This specification effective
which
in either
when they are in conflict.
1)
SOURCE
DATA
: (Default setting) in source program is effective.
The symbol definition
2)
ROM
DATA in ROM data is effective.
The symbol definition
l-114
5. OPERATION
(3) The combination
of F4[MERGE]
and F5[DUPADR],
and its result.
+-Ix0.0
ROM format file - Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYMBOL(6byte)
COIL-COMMENT(30byte)
xxxxxx
YYYYYY
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
R1.4
Source program - Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) RELAY-COMMENT(16byte)

x0.0
COIL-COMMENT(30byte) AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
Y2.3 Y4.7
AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB YYYYYY
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
+a)
The result of "MERGE = NO" Source program x0.0 xxxxxx R1.4 YYYYYY xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
tb)
The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition = ROM data". Source program x0.0 xxxxxx Y2.3 BBBBBBBB Y4.7 YYYYYY xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
tc)
The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol definition=source Source program x0.0 AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB Y2.3 R1.4 YYYYYY AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBB
program".
AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
l-115
5. OPERATION
5.5 Link
During linking, load modules a ROM format file. created in the C language, PASCAL, or other language are linked with and or
The C language
can be used only with
PMCNIRCIRC3iRC4/QCINB. PASCAL,
PASCAL can be used only with PMC-N. similar language is not used.
Linking is not required when the C language,
Transferred and PMC
to the ROM writers
(Note 1) The format of load modules

However,
varies
between
PMC-N
and PMCRC/RC3/RC4:QC/NB.
linking with FAPT LADDER is the same. In addition, with
(Note 2) This function enables linking to be performed on a personal computer.

this function, load modules a ROM format file holding can be separately transferred
only ladder data, and C language
or PASCAL line in
to and linked on the PMC (dotted
the figure below).
C prooram development
environment
for PMC-N
l
- Personal computer - FAPT LADDER

C language 1
1
P-G FAPT PASCAL PASCAL load
source
ICM (compiler)
FANUC distribution library 1
. . . . . . . . . _ ROM file
format
LMB (linker)
LMT (converter)
1
C language load module
ttt Link + ROM format file with C language/PASCAL load modules linked
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .
PMC-N
Debug
1-116
5. OPERATION
C oroqram development
environment
for PMC-RC
(RC3!RCWQC!NB)
-Personal
computer Link control statement creation tool FAPT LADDER
J
C language source Link control source ROM format file J-Y iC286 (compiler) 1 -library BND386 (binder) + BLD386 (binder) 0J386 $_ (converter) HEX2SREC (Note) FANUC distribution
Link _
+ Intel hexadecimal load module -:
L:
-:
ROM format file with C language load modules linked
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. *
PMC_RC
i I vv$
I t I
I
(Note)
FAPT LADDER does not allow Intel hexadecimal operation, convert the file format by referring
load modules
to be linked. Users Manual.
Before link
to the HEX2SREC
On the indicated
PMCRCIRC3IRC4IQC/NB, above cannot be directly
load linked.
modules Perform
created
in the
development
languages This
the below operation
before linking.
program is provided on the following
floppy disk:
RBiRC Module Floppy
(A08B-9200-J604
#JP)
Edition 3.1 or later Edition 3.1 or later Edition 1.0 or later Edition 1.0 or later Edition 1.0 or later Edition 1.0 or later
(A08B-9201 -J604 #EN) QC Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J605#JP) (A08B-9201 -J605-#EN) NB Module Floppy (A08B-9200-J606#JP) (A08B-9201 -J606-#EN)
[Operation] 0 Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the MS-DOS prompt. Specify as follows:
A:\FLADDER\APPENDIX,
HEXZSREC
input-file-name
output-file-name
Conversion
is performed.
1-117
5. OPERATION
Check that specified
file names have been created using the DIR command.
Specify linking.
an output file name (for example.
SAMPLE.%)
as the load module
file name for
(Note)
When
the extension Output to SR.
of an input is directed
file name
is omitted,
the name
extension
.HEX
is is in
assumed. changed
to a file with the same of the following
but the extension
The specification
SAMPLE.SR
files has the same effect
input/output:
HEXZSREC HEX2SREC HEXZSREC HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE SAHPLE.SR SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE
(1) Starting linking
(Operation] @I Select [LINK] from the main menu.
The link screen appears (Fig. 5.5).
Load
module
file file
name name Edition
: :
A:YDATAYC-MODULE. A:YDATAYSAMPLE. tool name
SR #EK
ROM format Series
Machine
NC & PMC name
Program
no.
Fig. 5.5
Link Screen
(2) Linking
[Operation] @ Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link. name must conform specified to MS-DOS specifications. The load module file
Here the load module file name should be For PMC-RC, specify an output program
with its extension
(--------.
l **).
name for HEX2SREC.
Select [EXEC].
1-118
5. OPERATION
Linking is executed.
(3) Termination
5.6 Input/Output
There are three types of input/output operations, as described below.
1) 2) 3)
ROM read/write
operation
by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer).
Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface. Input/output between PMC RAM and a memory card or floppy disk (FD) via a Floppy Cassette
Adapter or Handy File, respectively.
On the PC-9801 device driver.
series PC, types 1) and 2) require to the description
RSDRV.SYS,
which
is an MS-DOS
standard
Install it according
in Section 2.1.
[Operation] 0 Switch off the personal cable. 0 0 @ @ (See Appendix computer 1.) make sure that RSDRVSYS has been installed. and input/output unit, and connect them via an RS232C
Before starting FAPT LADDER, Start FAPT LADDER. Select [l/O] (input/output) The input/output
from the main menu.
menu appears.
1-119
5. OPERATION
Table 5.6 Input/output ROM writers (PMC WRITER, FA WRITER) (MMC)) destination
Baud Rate Setting Baud rate setting (bps) 4800
FANUC Series 0 (PMC-L/M!M FANUC Power Mate-MODEL FANUC Series 15 (PMC-N) FANUC Series 158 (PMC-NA)
4800 (9600) 4800 (9600) 480019600
(Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3)
A/B/C/E (PMC-P)
FANUC Series 16/18!20 (PMC-R series) FANUC Series 15B (PMC-NB) FANUC F-D Mate mini (PMC-QC) FANUC Power Mate-MODEL D (PMCPAl/PA3)
4800/9600
(Note 1) In input/output
possible necessary
operations
with the FANUC Series 0. a transmission on the PMC LOADING screen.
at 9600 bps is
only for downloading
In this case, it is
to make the settings of the CNC match those of the personal computer. operations with the FANUC Power Mate MODEL-A/B/C/D, a
transmission
at 9600 bps is possible
only for uploading
and comparison.
In this
case, it is necessary computer.
to make the settings
of the CNC match those of the personal
operations
with the FANUC
Series
15, transmissions
at both 4800 of the
and 9600 bps are possible.
In this case, it is necessary
to make the settings
CNC match those of the personal computer.
[Reference]
I!0 port setting to the values in the following data files.
FAPT LADDER sets up ports according
1) 2)
PC9801 version IBM PC/AT version
: :
FLIO
98.DAT
FLIO-AT.DAT So, a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.
These files are in text format.
l-120
5. OPERATION
1)
Contents (effective
of the FLl0_98DAT data section only) = IO-PORT-SET

= RO. 4800. B8, PN. S2, NONE = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2. NONE =RO, 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE
2)
Contents (effective
of the FLIO_AT.DAT data section only) = IO-PORT-SET

=COMl =COMl =COMl : 48, N. 8.2 : 48, N. 8. 2 : 48, N. 8. 2
DATA-BLOCK
FA-WRITER PMC-WRITER PMC-L PMC-M PMC-M PMC-M (TT) (AXIS) (AXIS)
DATA-BLOCK
PM&WRITER FA-WRITER PMC-L PMC-M PMC-M PMC-M (-IT) (AXIS)
=COM1:48.N,8.2 =COMl =COMl =COMl (AXIS) =COMI -COMl =COMl =COMl (l/O) (I/O, TT) (I/O, AXIS) (l/O) =COMl =COMl =COtVll =COMl -COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl -COMl =COMl =COMl -COMl = COMl =COMl =COMl (STEP-SEQ) (STEP-SEQ) =COMl =COMl : 48, N, 8.2 : 48, N, 8.2 : 48. N, 8, 2 : 48. N, 8,2 : 96, N. 8.2 : 48, N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 48, N, 8.2 : 48. N, 8,2 : 48, N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 96, N, 8, 2 : 96, N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 96, N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8,2 : 96. N, 8,2 : 96. N, 8.2 : 96. N, 8.2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 96, N, 8, 2 : 96, N. 8, 2 : 96. N, 8,2 : 96, N, 8.2 : 96, N. 8, 2 : 96, N. 8, 2 : 96, N, 8.2
= RO, 4800.88, = RO. 4800.88,
PN. S2, NONE PN. S2. NONE
PMC-MMC PMC-MMC PMC-N PMC-P PMC-OA PMC-M PMC-M PMC-M (I/O) (I/O, TT) (l/O, AXIS)
= RO, 4800, 88. PN. S2. NONE = RO. 4800, B8, PN. S2, NONE -RD. 9600,88, PN, S2, NONE
PMC-MMC PMC-MMC PMC-N PMC-P PMC-QA PMC-M PMC-M PMC-M PMC-N PMC-RB PMC-RC PMC-RAl PMC-RA2 PMC-RB2 PMC-RA3 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC3 PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC PMC-NB PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4 PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4
- RO, 4800, B8, PN, S2. NONE - RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE = RO. 4800, B8, PN, S2, NONE =RO, 4800,88. = RO. 4800,88, = RO, 9600.88, PN. S2, NONE PN, S2, NONE PN, S2, NONE
PMC-N (l/O) PMC-RB PMC-RC PMC-RAl PMC-RAP PMC-RBP PMC-RA3 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC3 PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-OC PMC-NB PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4 PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4 (STEP-SEC)) (STEP-SEO)
= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600,68, PN, 52, NONE
= RO, 9600, 88, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600, 88. PN. S2, NONE = RO, 9600. 88, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600,88, = RO. 9600,88, = RO, 9600.88, PN, S2, NONE PN, S2, NONE PN, S2. NONE
= RO, 9600, B8, PN, S2. NONE =RO. 9600, B8. PN. S2, NONE = RO. 9600, B8, PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600,88, PN. S2. NONE
= RO, 9600, 88, PN. S2. NONE = Ro, 9600, B8. PN, S2, NONE = RO, 9600,88. PN, S2. NONE
Entity on the left-hand Entity on the
side of each equal sign ( =) : Device side of each equal sign (=) : Represented in the format of each (baud
right-hand command.
SPEED/MODE
Only the first parameter
(port number)
and second
parameter
rate) can be changed.
1 - 121
5. OPERATION
5.6.1
ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

data is written to ROM installed in the PMC. 5.6. For information on the setting of a
ROM format personal
computer
for I/O operation,
see Section
ROMs which
can be used depend
on the
PMC model, as indicated
in Table 56.1.
When using the FA writer, place it in remote mode.
Table 5.6.1 ROMs Usable with Each PMC Model PMC model PMC-L/M PMC-N PMC-RAl /RA2/RA3/RB 256K-bit Usable ROM ROM, 2 each (note 1)
ROM cassette A, B, C, D, and E lM-bit lM-bit ROM ROM/ROM module B (note 2)
PMCRB2/RB3 PMC-RCIRC3 PMC-QA
ROM module A, B, C, and D ROM cassette A, B
(1) Read
[Operation] 0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I/O menu screen.
Select [READ].
Enter the name of a ROM format file containing
read data.
@I Read operation
is executed.
During operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
When read operation
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
(2) Write
Select [WRITE].
Enter the name of a ROM format file to be written.
Writing is executed.
During operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
When writing terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
l-122
5. OPERATION
(3) Verification
Select [VERIFY].
Enter the name of a ROM format file to be verified.
@ Verification
is executed.
During operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
When verification
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
(4) Blank check
[Operation] 0 Select [WRT] (writer) on the I10 menu screen.
Select [BLANK]
(blank check).
(3
Enter the name of a ROM format file to check.
@I Blank checking
is executed.
During operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
@ When blank checking
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
(5) Termination
(Note
1)
Input/output
with ROM for PMC-UM a high ROM is paired with a low ROM. When performing I/O to and FAPT LADDER allows a pair of a high At this time, the < F2 > key can of a
With PMC-UM,
from ROM with an FA writer on a PMC-L/M, ROM and low ROM to be processed be used to switch between pair of ROMs.
concurrently.
the processing
of a single ROM or the processing
1 - 123
5. OPERATION
1st PAIR
2nd PAIR
3rd PAIR
4th PAIR
7 High side Low side OEl OF1 PMC-L , PMC-M 0E2 OF2
0
Socket allocation for concurrent
q 10clOClcl
processing
of pairs of ROMs with the FA writer
Writinq During concurrent writing, data can be written to a maximum of four pairs of ROMs.
Readina and verification During concurrent reading or verification, only one pair of ROMs can be handled socket number at a time.
When two or more pairs are set, the ROMs with the smallest verified.
are read or
(Note 2) When writing

displayed
1Mbit
ROM
for PMC-RB2
with
FA writer,
ID
ERROR
will
be
on FA writer.
But writing terminates
normally. data to and from EPROM. (EPROM
(Note 3) PMC-P, PA1IPA3,

cannot be installed
NB, QC do not transfer in PMC-P, PAlIPA3,
NB, QC.)
5.6.2
Transfer
to and from PMC-L/M

to and from PMC-L/M.
(FANUC
Series 0)
5.6 for the setting of the personal
Data can be transferrod computer
See Section
for I/O operz.:lon.
FAPT LADDER
1 Switchable Parameter between 4800 bps and 9600 bps No. 0060
)-
FSO
PMC loading screen
11 Download
IL
I 4800 bps (fixed)
(Note)
(Note)
+I
I
I/O (P-G) screen
1
I
II
4800 bps (fixed) Upload Ib 4800 bps (fixed)
(Note)
4
I
PO (P-G) screen
1
1
I FSO baud rate settinq
(Note)
A ladder editing cassette
is required for this operation.
1-124
5. OPERATION
SYSTEM P-MODEL G PHC LOADING ADDRESS DATA : : OOOOH OOH i

Fig. 5.6.2 (a) PMC Load Screen
READ OR WRITE OR VERIFY EXECUTING

1 [CANCEL] [ Fig. 5.6.2 (b) 11 II 1
l/O (P-G) Screen
(1) FSO baud rate setting This setting functions only for download operation using the PMC load screen.
[Operation] *O Press < DGNOSPARAM > to display the parameter screen.
*Q A baud rate can be set by specifying
the parameter
as follows:
bit 7 0060
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1 PCLDB
bit 0
PCLDB 0 : 4800 bps 1 : 9600 bps
*a
After a parameter
change, turn the power off then on again.
(2) Download
(a) Download (using the PMC load screen)

[Operation] 0 8 @ Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen. Select (DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.
Enter a ROM format file name.
*@ Press c 1> on the PMC load select screen of the CNC. (Select (1) LOAD FROM I/O. The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(a) appears.) Position the cursor on LOAD for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press the <RETURN> Downloading key. During operation, normally, the indication EXECUTING END blinks. is output.
is executed.
When downloading
terminates
the indication
NORMAL
1-125
5. OPERATION
(b) Download
(operation
using
the l/O (P-G) screen)
[Operation] @Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
Select [DNLOADJ
(download)
on the PMC menu screen.
*@ Press < 5 > on the PMC load select screen of the CNC. (Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)
*@ Press the CNC soft keys 5.6.2(b) appears.)
[l/O]
and [P-G]
in this order.
(The screen
shown
in Fig.
451 Position
the cursor on EDIT for the output route on the PMC menu screen, then press key.
the <RETURN>
Download blinks.
operation
is executed.
During
operation,
the
indication
EXECUTING
@I When downloading
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END is output.
(Note)
During downloading
to PMC-L/M,
symbol and comment
data is not transferred.
(3) Upload
[Operation] 0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
Select [UPLOAD]
*a
Press <5>
on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.
(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)
*@ Press the CNC soft keys [VO] and [P-G] in this order. appears.)
(The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)
Uploading
is executed.
During operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
When uploading
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END is output.
l-126
5. OPERATION
(4) Comparison
[Operation ] @ Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
Select [COMPAR]
(comparison)
43 Press <5>
on the PMC load select screen of the CNC.
(Select (5) EDIT LADDER.)
*@I Press the CNC soft keys [I/O] and [P-G] in this order. appears.)
(The screen shown in Fig. 5.6.2(b)
Comparison
is executed.
During operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
When comparison
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END is output.
(5) Termination
C3 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
(Note)
In the operations on the CNC.
above, an asterisk prefixed
to a circled number represents
an operation
l-127
5. OPERATION
5.6.3
Transfer to and from PMC-P (FANUC Power Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E)

to and from PMC-P. See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal need to be set
Data can be transferred computer for 10 operation.
To transfer data to and from PMC-P, some parameters according to Item (1) below.
on the Power Mate.
Set the parameters
- FAPT LADDER 4800 bps (fixed) 1 Download //

I
. Power
Mate-MODEL A/B/C/E
PMC loading screen
1 1 Upload 1
Switchable Parameter Switchable Parameter
between 4800 bps and 9600 bps Nos. &0226 or &0227 between 4800 bps and 9600 bps Nos. &0226 or &0227
Diagnostic
screen
11 Comparison
It
Diagnostic
screen
Power Mate-MODEL
ABICE
baud rate setting
(1) Power
Mate-MODEL
A/B/C/E
setting
PMC-P needs to be made ready for 110 operation. Mate.
The operation
below is required
on the Power
[Operation ] $0 Press < DGNOSPARAM > to display the parameter screen.
*a
Position the cursor on the I!0 parameter, (Specify 0 or 1 in the I!0 parameter
then press < 0 > < INPUT > or < 1 > <INPUT
>.
setting.)
*O Set the parameters When I!0 parameter
as follows: settinq = 0
bit 7 &0006
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
bit 0
I-I-I-I-I-I-lOIll
&0009
I
I
I
&0014
I
BRATEO
I
I
&0226
BRATEO
1 0:
4800 bps
1 1 : 9600 bps
1-128
5. OPERATION
When the I/O parameter
settino
= 1
bit 7 II0006
bit 6
bit 5
bit 4
bit 3
bit 2
bit 1
bit 0
a0010
&0014
8~0227
I BRATEl 1 0: 4800 bps
BRATEl
1 1 : 9600 bps
(Note)
The mark -
represents
a parameter
not associated
with this function.
*@ After a parameter
change, turn the power off and then on again.
(2) Download
[Operation] 0 Select [PMC] on the I!0 menu screen.
Select [DNLOAD]
(download)
*@ Turn on power to the CNC while holding down < 0 > and <X/AXIS
> at the same time.
*@ The indication
PMC LOADING
is output on the CRT screen of the CNC.
Downloading
is executed.
During operation, =) counts up.
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks, and the
address indication
(ADDRESS
@ When downloading
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
(Note)
(3) Upload
During downloading
to PMC-P, symbol and comment
data is not transferred.
[Operation] Select [PMC] on the I!0 menu screen.
Select [UPLOAD]
l-129
5. OPERATION
@I The indication
PLEASE
SET UP PMC
is output.
*8
Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSIPARAM screen.
> twice to display the diagnostic
*@3 Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press <WRITE>
while holding down
< * >.
(?I Uploading
is executed.
During
operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks, WRITE
and the blinks.
address indication
(ADDRESS
=) counts up.
On the CNC, the indication
When uploading
terminates WRITE
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
On the
CNC, the indication
disappears.
(4) Comparison
[Operation] 0 Select ]PMC) on the I/O menu screen.
Select [COMPARJ
(comparison)
@I The indication
PLEASE
SET UP PMC
is output.
> twice to display the diagnostic
*@ Turn on power to the CNC, then press < DGNOSPARAM screen. *Q Press <NO. > on the CNC, then press C WRITE>
while holding down
< >-
Comparison
is executed.
During
operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks, WRITE
and the blinks.
address indication
(ADDRESS
=) counts up.
On the CNC, the indication
@I When comparison CNC, the indication
terminates WRITE
normally, disappears.
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
On the
(5) Termination
(Note)
to a circled number
represents
an operation
l-130
5. OPERATION
5.6.4
Transfer to and from PMC-N/NA (FANUC Series 15MODEL A, -MODEL B)

to and from PMC-N. To transfer See Section 5.6 for the setting PMC-N, of the personal is
Data can be transferred computer required.
for I/O operation. See Item (1) below.
data to and from
FS15 baud rate setting
- FAPT LADDER Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps [DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)] 1 Download b Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps fDATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)1 Upload Ib Switchable between 4800 bps and 9600 bps [DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE)] 1 Comparison b
FS15
Title screen
II
I/O screen
j110[
FS15 baud rate settinq
(1) FS15 baud rate setting

FS15 baud rate setting 4800 bps. is required. On the FSl5, data can be transferred computer below. at either 9600 bps or
The baud rate setting on the personal Operation on the FS15 is described
needs to match the baud rate setting
on the FS15.
[Operation] *@ Press the < CNCIPMC > key.
*8
Press the soft keys [PCPRM]
and [MODE]
in this order.
*@ The following
information
is output on the CRT screen of the CNC:
PMC MODE PMC DATA INITXALIZE DATA TRANSFER RATE (OFF-LINE) DATA TRANSFER TO RAMBOARD RAM ENABLE (PC DGN,EDIT) DATA TRANSFER RATE (AUX)
OFF
ON
9600BPS MANUAL
OFF
4800BPS AUTO
ON
4800BPS
9600BPS
*@ Press the values
of both
DATA
TRANSFER
RATE
(OFF-LINE)
and DATA
TRANSFER
RATE (AUX) by moving the cursor and using soft keys.
1-
131
5. OPERATION
(2) Download
[Operation] @ Select [PMC] on the l/O menu screen.
Select [DNLOAD]
(download)
*$! Press the <CNC/PMC>
key of the CNC.
*@I Press the CNC soft keys [EDIT] and [TITLE]
in this order.
61 Enter a ROM format file name.
@ B
Downloading
is executed.
During operation, normally,
the indication
EXECUTING END
blinks. is output.
When downloading
terminates
the indication
NORMAL
(3) Upload
[Operation] 0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
Select [UPLOAD]
@I Initialization
is started and the indication
INITIALIZE
EXECUTE
is output.
61 The indication PLEASE
INITIALIZE
EXECUTE is output.
disappears.
After a few seconds,
the indication
SET UP PMC
*@ Press the <CNC!PMC>
key of the CNC.
*8
Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS),
[OUTPUT],
[ALL], and [P-G] in this order.
@I Uploading
is executed.
During operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
@I When uploading
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END
is output.
(4) Comparison
IOperation] 0 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen.
Select [COMPAR]
(comparison)
1-132
5. OPERATION
Initialization
is started and the indication
INITIALIZE
EXECUTE
is output.
The indication PLEASE
INITIALIZE
EXECUTE is output.
disappears.
After a few seconds,
the indication
SET UP PMC
*!I3 Press the < CNCPMC > key of the CNC.
*@ Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], [FDCAS],
[OUTPUT],
[ALL], and [P-G] in this order.
Comparison
iS executed.
the indication EXECIJTING NORMAL END
blinks. is output.
@I When comparison
terminates
the indication
(5) Termination
(Note 1) In the operations

operation
above,
an asterisk
prefixed
to a circled
number
represents
an
on the CNC. PMC program without PASCAL, C
(Note 2) For FS15, it is possible UPLOAD, COMPARISON

LANGUAGE data. In this case, please change (3 of each function *@I Press the CNC soft keys [l/O], this order. [FDCAS],
as below. [OUTPUT], [LADDER], and [P-G] in
1-133
5. OPERATION
5.6.5
Before
Input/Output
PMC-CA and
for PMC-QA
the ladder
(FANUC
SYSTEM
F-MODEL
the following
D Mate)
(1) or (2) must be
program
are transmitted,
performed. Whether (1) or (2) is depended on the model of FD Mate.
(1) Setting of FD Mate PMC communicative
utility FLEX OS version
(a) File configuration The configuration of files in the floppy disk is as follows:
DRIVERS --c C
ACILOAD. FDM_SCD. FDUTILS.
BAT (Driver installation DRV 286 (Utility start file)
batch file)
UTILS
PGFD. 286 PGSV. 286 1 FDSV. 286
(b) Installing
the driver only once when power to the main unit is turned on. equipment commands. input/output After the software
The driver must be installed operating system
starts, insert the floppy disk of external example and enter the following
into drive A in the following
FD Mate Main unit To change drives 6 : >A-rReturnJ A A:> A : >CD DRIVERS r Return J A : DRIVERS/> To install the driver A : DRIVERS > ACILOAD r Return J
To change directories
Note 1)
The underlined indicates
portions
indicate
data entered
from the keyboard. by the system.
r
name
soft key entry.
Other portions The following serial
are displayed
Key entries
are not case sensitive.
explanations
are given in this format. with a logical (ser:).
Note 2)
Incorporate
the RS-232-C
driver
into memory
(The system needs to be changed the operating The following system is started.) define statement
so that the serial drive is loaded with ser: when
must be entered from the keyboard
according
to the
driver version after the driver is installed. define -s fanuc_ser In the above example, B: DRIVERS = ON enter the following from the keyboard:
> define -s fanuc ser = ON
1-134
5. OPERATION
Starting the utility The utility must be started whenever data is input or output between the PMC and the
external equipment. In the following example, the floppy disk containing external equipment input/output
software is assumed to be inserted in drive B. Procedure for Starting the Utility FD Mate Main unit To change drives A : >B A *r ReturnJ B:> B : > CD UTILS I- Return J B : UTILS/> To start the utility The screen display changes to the main screen. (Main unit) B : UTILS > FDUTILS r Return J
To change directories
==
= Utility main = = =
____----___-______-_____________________---1 : PMC-----HO/F0 2 : PMC-----Device 3 : HDIFD---Device 4 : spare 0 : Quit
Enter the desired menu number and press the RETURN the following processing. data between the PMC and the HDIFD. data between
1: Transmits
key.
The numbers
correspond
to
2:
Transmits RS-232-C).
the PMC and the external
equipment
(connected
through
3:
4:
Transmits RS-232-C).
data between
the HDiFD and the external equipment
(connected
through
This function Terminates
is not currently the utility.
used.
0:
Numbers other than the above are not accepted. If an incorrect number is entered, delete the number with the BS or DEL key and enter the
desired number.
1 - 13s
5. OPERATION
(2) Setting the UNIX version of the F-D Mate PMC communication
utilities
(a) File configuration The configuration of utility files on the distribution floppy disk is as shown below.
UTILS
FDUTILS FDSV PGFD F PGSV
(utility startup file)
(b) Driver installation
and utility startup
Operation (1) Create an appropriate hard disk. (2) Make the directory current. (3) Copy the utility software on the floppy disk (drive A) to the current directory. # # # # (4) Make the copied files executable. (5) Specify a path. (6) Start a utility. (Note) # # # doscD doscD doscp dosco chmod created in step (1) # cd directorv-name directory on the # mkdir
on the Main screen r Return J
directorv-name
r Return J
A:IUTILS/FDUTILS A:/UTILS/FDSV AYUTILSPGFD AYUTILWPGSV +x *
.
. .
r Return
r Return J J
r Return J r Return J r Return J
PATH = $PATH:.;export FDUTILS
PATH
r Return J r Return J
(Note)
The method of using the UNIX version following 1. 2. two points. must be in lowercase is unnecessary.
differs from that of the Flex version
in the
Filenames ACILOAD
letters.
1-136
5. OPERATION
(3) Preparing
transmission
in the main unit
Operation Enter 2 to display the main screen. ===
in the main unit
Utility main = = =
-----------------------------------------.-----1 : PMC -----HO/F0 2 : PMC-----Device 3 : HDIFD---Device 4 : spare 0 : Quit -----------------------------------------------Select 3 : 2
Press any key other than the control key. The message on the Vight is displayed. Change to the PMC screen
Press any key, to execute child program Press ESC key, if you stop it Read/Write ver. 1.00 Press the CTRL + ALT + HOME, or MODE key. PMC data utility
To stop this program, terminated
press the ESC key on the screen message appears:
in the main unit.
Then, the utility
is
and the following
End of child program Press RETURN key, to go ahead key returns to the main screen in (c).
Pressing the RETURN
Note)
If the CTRL + S key is pressed while the utility is running, pressing the CTRL+Q key restarts the program.
the program stops. any key other
However, than the
Pressing
(CTRL + Q) key while the program is stopped causes abnormal termination
(hang-up).
l-137
5. OPERATION
(4) Down load
Operation in the personal compu
Operation
in the F-D Mate main unit:PMC
To start the utility in the main unit of F-D Mate
3 Start the utility. (See Subset. 3.4.1.) 3 Select PMC - Device. Select 7 : 2
To put the personal computer in the reception wait status
@I Select [ PMCJ from the input/output menu screen. @ Select [DNLOAD] (download)
from the PMC menu screen. aEnter the name of the ROM
format file. a Initialization begins, and the message INITIALIZE appears. To output sequence data from the PMC The screen display changes, and PMC SIDE SET I/O DISPLAY, At KEY IN FILE NAME. is displayed D Press MODE key or press CTRL + ALT + HOME key to display the PMC screen. D Press the IO key to display the IO screen. 3 Press the FDCAS key to display the FDCAS screen. D Press the OUTPUT OUTPUT. 0, Press the LADDER LADDER. YpPress the P-G key to select P-G. 4t transmission The EXECUTING and the counter turns on and off is displayed at tht The displayed value indicating an key to select key to select EXECUT
address is counted.
bottom of the screen.
If transmission PMC displays
terminates OUTPUT
normally,
the personal
computer
displays
NORMAL
END
and the
COMPLETED.
1-138
5. OPERATION
(5) Upload
Operation
in the P-G Mate
Operation
in the F-D Mate main unit/PMC (See (3))
To start the utility in the main unit of F-D Mate To put PMC in the reception status wait
3 Start the utility.
3 Select PMC - Device. Select ? : 2 3 Press the MODE key or CTRL + ALT + HOME key to display the PMC screen. 9 Press the EDIT key to display the EDIT screen. 9 Press the TITLE key to display the TITLE screen.
To output sequence data
@ Select [PMC] from the input/output menu screen. (upload) from
from the personal computer
0 Select [UPLOAD]
the PMC menu screen. @Enter the name of the ROM
format file. @Initialization begins, and the EXECUTE
message INITIALIZE appears. At transmission The EXECUTING
turns on and off, at the
The displayed s counted.
value indicating
a size
and the counter is displayed bottom of the screen.
If transmission PMC displays
terminates
normally,
the personal
computer
displays
NORMAL
END
and the
INPUT COMPLETED.
1-139
5. OPERATION
5.6.6
Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB/QC

serially via RS-232-C. In this case, personal computer port must be set.
Data can be transferred
See Section 5.6 for the setting of the personal computer
for I/O operation. FS16/18/15B Mate-D, F-D Mate mini
- FAPT LADDER 1 Download f
1 9600 bps14800 bps
-Power
w-1
II
9600 bps14800 bps Upload Ik 9600 bps/4800 bps
PMC (I/O) screen
II Comparison
II-
PMC (I/O) screen
Baud rate settina for FSl6/18/15B,
Power Mate-D, and F-D Mate mini
(1) Download [Operation] 0 8 Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen. Select [DNLOAD] (download) on the PMC menu screen.
$8 Press the <SYSTEM
> key of the CNC. [l/O], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.
*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], 0 @ 8 Enter a ROM format file name. Downloading is executed.
the indication
EXECUTING END
blinks. is output.
When downloading
terminates
the indication
NORMAL
(2) Upload
If the PMCRCRC3, programs
-CC,
or -NB is used,
language
data (C language) is executed
other
than
Ladder
can be used.
When uploading (LADDER
or comparison
from one of these PMCs, and ALL have the
one of two data types following meanings:
or ALL)
can be specified.
LADDER
LADDER ALL
Sequence Sequence
program only program and language data (C language)
l-140
5. OPERATION
Specify either data type in step 8 of the operation
described
below:
[Operation] 0 8 *a Select [PMC] on the I/O menu screen. Select [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen. key of the CNC. (IO], [HOST], and [EXEC] in this order.
Press the <SYSTEM>
*@ Press the CNC soft keys [PMC], @ @ Enter a ROM format file name.
Select either LADDER or ALL with cursor.
(?I Uploading @
is executed.
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
When uploading
terminates
the indication
NORMAL
END is output.
(3) Comparison
[Operation] 0 Select [PMC] on the 110menu screen.
C!9 Select [COMPAR] *a
(comparison)
Press the <SYSTEM
> key of the CNC. and [EXEC] in this order.
*@I Press the CNC soft keys [PMC],
[I/O], [HOST],
6)
Comparison
is executed.
During operation,
the indication
EXECUTING
blinks.
When comparison
terminates
normally,
the indication
NORMAL
END is output.
(4) Termination
(21 The screen display returns to the main menu screen.
(Note)
to a circled
number represents
an operation
l-
141
5. OPERATION
(5) CRT/MD1
and DPUMDI of the Power Mate-D

and the DPUMDI screen. When the
The NC of the Power Mate-D has the CRT/MD1 screen CRTlMDl screen is used, the procedures
for data input/output screen
are the same as those with the is used, the procedures for data
PMC-R Series ((1) to (4) above). input/output When are different
When the DPUMDI
from those with the PMC-R Series. is used, perform downloading, uploading, and comparison as
the DPL/MDI below:
screen
described
(a) Press the < DGNOS > key on the DPUMDI screen and select the diagnostic data screen.
03
Press the c READ> Follow procedures
or c WRITE>
key on the DPUMDI
screen. computer.
w
5.6.7
(1) to (4) described
above on the personal
Memory card interface in the personal computer and memory card

in a personal computer can be converted installed to a memory in the personal card format file, computer. The
A ROM format file compiled
and output to a memory card via a memory PMC program on the memory card in the memory transferred
card interface
card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting in the CNC. By reversing the procedure,
the memory can be
card interface
programs
from the CNC RAM to the memory card.
5.6.7.1
[Operation]
PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC
Install a memory card interface
in the personal computer.
Compile a source program to create a ROM format file. from it.
Return to the main menu, and select [l/O] (input/output)
Select [M-CARD]
(memory card) from the input/output
menu.
F4 F5
KEY KEY
: :
Handy Memory
File card
Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a)
InputiOutput
Menu
1-142
5. OPERATION
@ Select [WRITE] (write (programmer -> memory card)).
Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b)
Memory Card Input/Output
Screen
Convert the file from ROM format to memory card format. Specify the following
l
items for execution.
Name of the ROM format file Specify the ROM format file to be converted.
Name of the memory card file Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the
CNC) to be created by conversion,
and the drive where the memory card is inserted.
l/O i TO UC ::
&BP
WRITE
(PROCRAWR FILE
- > Memory NAME
Card) : A:YDATAAYSAMFLE. XBF llEX
ROM FORMAT
Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMPLE. (Specify the MEMORY CARD drive)
Fig. 5.6.7.1 (c)
InputlOutput
(to MC) Screen
The following
operations
are performed
on the CNC side.
l-143
5. OPERATION
The following 0
two methods
can be used to insert the memory in the CNC and read programs of the PMC and the desired filename or
card output
in step @ into
the memory card interface Using the I/O function Specify M-CARD,
on the memory card.
READ,
file
number
at
DEVICE,
FUNCTION, [EXECJ.
and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen, programs
respectively.
7en press soft key
Sequence
are read from the memory card file created in step 0.
PMC 110 screen
PMCI/O PROGRAM
CHANNEL = 1 DEVICE = M-CARD ~;~~J..~~~Ij-j~;~ = READ DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. ( #NAME )
q
MONIT STOP
I EXEC I [CANCEL] [WRITE I[ READl[COMPARI
Using the BOOT SYSTEM See Appendix 5.
at power-on
time
5.6.7.2
PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer

are written to a memory card, using a memory card interface as ordinary card interface in the CNC. computer, the When PMC
PMC programs the memory
card is inserted
in a memory
in the personal MS-DOS files.
programs on the memory card can be accessed
[Operation] 0 Specify M-CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired filename (omissible) at DEVICE,
FUNCTION, key [EXEC].
LADDER, Sequence
and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, programs are output to the memory.
respectively,
then press soft
l-144
5. OPERATION
PMC I/O screen
'PMC I/O PROGRAM CHANNEL = 1 DEVICE = M-CARD ;;i~iJJ#~;I;$&& = WRITE DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. = ( #NAME ) [.EXEC
MONIT STOP-
1 [CANCEL 1 [WRITE 1 E READ 1 [COMPARI
The following operations are performed on the personal computer side.
Install a memory card interface
in the personal computer.
Select [l/O] (input/output)
from the main menu. (See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)
Select [M-CARD]
menu.
Select [READ] (read (programmer
C- memory card)).
(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (b).)
Convert
the PMC programs
output to a memory the following
card in step @ from memory
card format
to ROM format by specifying

l
items and running the utility.
Name of the memory card file Specify the name of the conversion source memory card file written to the memory
card, and the memory card drive in which the memory card is inserted.
l
Name of the ROM format file Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data after conversion.
1.~3C FROM K
) ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
READ
(PROCRAMER
- > Memory
Card) #RF #EX
Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMFLE. (Specify the MEMORY CARD drive) R&l FORMAT FILE NAME
A:YDATAYSMPlE.
Fig. 5.6.7.2 (a)
Input/Output
(from MC) Screen
1 - 145
5. OPERATION
Discompile
the ROM format file after conversion,
and the resultant
file will become
able to
be edited on the personal computer.
5.6.7.3
Memory card input/output function (PMC-RAl) CNC (L/R) with loader control
writes a loader control sequence program
for the PMC of the
This function MODEL
to, or reads it from, the FANUC Series 16program can be edited by specifying
B with loader control.
The loader control
sequence
the model as PMC-RAl.
(1) Writing
(programmer
- > memory card) program to a memory card, use the F8 key (L/R). with the memory card (such as editing) are the same
To write an L/R sequence (The operations
other than input/output PMC-RAl.)
as those for the conventional
[Operation] Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.
Select [INOUT]
(input!output)
from the main menu.
Select [M-CARD]
menu.
Specify
the names of the desired is specified
ROM format
file and memory
card file.
(The memory
card filename
in the form of memory card drive + filename.)
Write to the memory card using the F8 key (L/R).
WRITE
fPROCRMfE%! FILE
- > Memory Card) NAME
ROM FORMAT
A:YDATAYSMfPLE. XBF
XEX
Memory Card FILE NAME : D:YSAMPLE. (Specify the MEWRY CARD drive)
Fig. 5.6.7.3
Input/Output
(to MC) Screen (model supporting
loader control)
(2)
Reading (programmer
< - memory card) sequence program from the memory card, use the same operating
To read the loader control procedure
as for the conventional
PMC-RAl.
1-146
5. OPERATION
56.8
Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS format)

on a personal computer format), is converted to Handy File format and output
If a ROM format file compiled
to a 3.6 floppy disk (MS-DOS
the PMC program
can be read into the RAM of the CNC can be reversed.
via a Handy File interface connected
to the CNC.
This operation
5.6.8.1
[Operation]
PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC
Compile a source program, and create a ROM format file.
from the main menu. the input/output
Select menu.
[FDCAS]
(FLOPPY
CASSETTE
ADAPTER
& Handy
File) from
(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)
Select [WRITE]
(write (programmer
-> FLOPPY CASSETTE
ADAPTER
& Handy File)).
IKI iFDCASi
&B
\\\m-
Fl F2 FlO
KEY KEY KEY
: :
WRITE READ ESD
(PAOCRAhSA (PROCRMMR
--> < -
Handy Handy
File) File)
Fig. 5.6.8.1 (a)

Convert
FDCAS Input/Output
Screen
the ROM format file to Handy
File format
by specifying
the following
items and
running the utility.

l
Name of the ROM format file Specify the name of the ROM format file to be converted.
Name of the Handy File format file Specify the name to be assigned File) to be generated to the Handy File format file (accessible by the Handy
by conversion,
and the 3.5 disk drive to which the file is output;
5 floppy disk cannot be used.
l-147
5. OPERATION
'ARITE (PROCRAMER--> HandyFile: FiM( FORMT FILE t&ME
A:YDATACSAAlNE.PEX
HandyFile FILE !iAME : C:YSAllF'LE.:SF :Specif! the floppydisk drive!
The following
operations
are performed
on the CNC side.
Connect
the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5 floppy disk generated
in step @ into
the Handy File.
5.6.8.2
[Operation]
PMC program transfer from the CNC to the personal computer
Connect
the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program
to a 3.5 floppy disk (MS-
DOS format).
The following
operations
are performed
on the personal computer
side.
from the main unit. File) from the input/output
Select menu.
[FDCAS]
(FLOPPY
CASSETTE
ADAPTER
& Handy
Select
[READ]
(read (programmer
<-
FLOPPY
CASSETTE
ADAPTER
& Handy
File)).
(See Fig. 5.6.7.1 (a).)
Convert the PMC program on a 3.5 floppy disk (Handy File format) generated ROM format by specifying
l
in step 0
to
the following
items and running
the utility.
Name of the Handy File format file Specify the program name output in step 0, and the 3.5 floppy disk drive where the
floppy disk is inserted.

l
Name of the ROM format file Specify the filename to be assigned to the ROM format data generated by conversion.
1-148
5. OPERATION
I.!0
; FROM FDC.AS
:::wc-Rc3
_\\ 1: ~ .,@ux%wm
.: ~_ \\\\,\...._
READ
(PROCRAWR
<-
Handy
File
!
C:YSAWLE. :SF PEX
Handy File FILE W.AME (Specify the floppy disk ROM FORUAT FILE NAUE
drive,
: A:YDATAYSAWLE.
Fig. 5.6.8.2 (a)
Input/Output
(from FDCAS) Screen
Discompile
the ROM format file after conversion,
and the resultant
file will become
able to
be edited on the personal computer.
5.6.9
FLOPPY CASSETTE
ADAPTER + 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)

computer is converted to Handy File format and output
If a ROM format file compiled
on a personal
to a 3.6 floppy disk (P-G format), the PMC program FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER connected
can be read into the RAM of the CNC via a This operation can be reversed.
to the CNC.
(Caution] There are two types of adapters for access to 3.5 floppy disk drives.
Name FLOPPY CASSETTE CASSETTE ADAPTER
Specification
number
Accessible
floppy disk type 2HD 2DD
Al 38-01 SO-BOO1 A13B-0131-8001
ADAPTER3
This function
uses P-G 200
<- > MS-DOS
format
conversion ADAPTER
supported 3 cannot
by FLPGMS.
FLPGMS
does not support Similarly,
floppy
disks, so CASSETTE
be used with FLPGMS. P-G <->
this function
cannot be used on the IBM PC/AT, because
it does not support
MS-DOS format conversion.
1-149
5. OPERATION
5.7 Mnemonic Editing
57.1
Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file
A source program is converted to a mnemonic file that can be edited with any standard text editor.
[Operation] Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.
The mnemonic menu screen appears (Fig. 5.7.1(a)).
1WiWW2SRCtXV3BAT&H
"5"
6 ,,V'. y,y:-< 8" ".;,, g"v ', ,O FJ@j -
Fig. 5.7.1(a)
Mnemonic Menu Screen
Select [MNECNV]
(conversion to mnemonic).
The mnemonic conversion screen appears (Fig. 57.1 (b)).
1) SOURCEPROCRAMNAFe: 2) HMINIC FILE NW 3'( ;ONEJ; DATA KIND SELECTION [ ; ; fW;M PARAWTER :
( 3 : SYmiOL& CU)IEah"T 4) MODE : FUR P-G
l-150
5. OPERATION
Specify the following

l
items:
Source program name Specify the name of the source program to be converted. Never specify an extension for the name. Up to eight characters can
be specified.
l
Mnemonic
file name file to which a source program is converted. Up to
Specify the name of the mnemonic 40 characters

l
can be specified. selection All data files can be specified or specific data
Data conversion
Specify data files subject to conversion. files can be selected.

l
Mode (setting item selection) Specify setting items. Select items from the table below, using the < t > and
< + > keys.
FOR-
P-G
P-G output format data is converted. Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to code format (Note 2). is converted.
Japanese anguage :omment (Note)
Comment Converts
data, which may include kanji characters, the text of a Japanese-language
message to Japanese-language
format (Note 3). Comment Data data, which may include kanji characters, address symbols and comments, is converted. and function instruction
WLL - OPTION
including
names treated as comments Data including all instruction
is converted. sections, operand sections, and comment
sections Converts
is converted. the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language
format (Note 3). _ABELI SUB-PROGRAM Data is converted (JMPB, JMPC, and the jump destination (label) of a function instruction is not
CALL. SP, or another
instruction)
used in a sub-program mnemonic section data does
highlighted.
The step number
of the converted instruction
agree with other setting.
(The function
used in the sub-
program does not agree with the other setting.) Converts the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language
format (Note 3).
(Note 1) (Note 2, 3)
The item specifying on an IBM PC/AT. Format displayed
Japanese
language
comment
conversion
cannot
be selected
on the code or Japanese-language
input
mode
screen
during
message editing.
Select (EXEC] upon completion
of item specification.
ci3 Source program is converted
to a mnemonic
file.
1 - 151
5. OPERATION
@I An error message is displayed conversion
if <RETURN
> is pressed after conversion.
The mnemonic
screen appears when
-z SPACE > is pressed after conversion.
5.7.2 Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program

A mnemonic text file edited in a certain format using a atandard text editor is converted version of FAPT LADDER. to a source
program that can be edited with the personal computer
[Operation] 0 Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.
The mnemonic
menu screen appears.
Select (SRCCNV]
(conversion
to a source program).
@I The source program conversion
screen appears (Fig. 5.7.2).
: FoRP4
Fig. 5.7.2 61 Specify the following

l
Source Program Conversion
Screen
items:
Mnemonic Specify specified.
file name file to be converted. Up to 40 characters can be
the name of a mnemonic
Source program name Specify the name of the source program can be specified. to which a mnemonic file is to be converted. for the name.
Up to eight characters
l
Never specify an extension
Mode (setting item selection) Specify setting items. keys. Select items from the table below using the < + > and < + >
(Note)
The item specifying IBM PC/AT.
Japanese
language
comment
conversion
cannot
be selected
on an
1-152
5. OPERATION
Select [EXEC] upon completion file is converted
of item specification.
(?J Mnemonic @
to a source program. if c RETURN > is pressed after conversion. The source
An error message program conversion
is displayed
screen appears when
< SPACE > is pressed after conversion.
5.7.3 Mnemonic file format

If a mnemonic file created using a commercially available text editor is to be converted format. to a source
program, the mnemonic
file must be in the following
(a) Identification
code
The mnemonic
file defines data with four different
identification
codes that each begin with %.
ID code O/o @A %@E %@O to 5 % only Beginning
Description of ALL-format data data data
End of ALL-format Beginning
of unit-format data
End of unit-format
The unit-format
data mentioned
above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below.
PMC model Unit-format data L Parameter Title Symbol & comment Ladder Message l/O module %@O ~ %@l %@2 O/o @3
X X
M
TO@0
N!NAKIA % @O %@l % @2 O/o @3 %@4 % @5
P % @O %@l %@2 %@3

X X
I series/PAl/PA3/QC/NB/NB: % @O %@l % @2 % @3 % @4 O/o @5
%@l %@2 /0@3

X
%@4
(b)
Linefeed code Control ignored. character LF (OAH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control character CR (ODH) is
(c) Reserved symbols

0
r;J
This special character

l
is reserved
for use in ladder data. to separate ladder data from a as a comment. and
A semicolon comment.
is used in the ladder data section Characters that follow a semicolon
are treated
When a mnemonic a comment
file is converted
back to a source program, a semicolon
that follows it are not generated.
1-153
5. OPERATION
r:j
This special character

l
is reserved for use in ladder and I/O module data.
A coton is used in the ladder data section to separate a net number from ladder data. Data that precedes a colon is treated as a net number. data section to separate a colon a channel as a
A colon number channel
is also used in the I/O module from 110 module data.
Data that precedes
is treated
number. SEQ NB2), mnemonic file has
In case of PMCRB4!RB4(STEP below format.
SEQ/RB5.!RBG)/RC4RC4(STEP
%@A r %@2-c R0200.0 UNIT 3 POWER KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON II $1 KEEP POWk?-ON R0200.1 UNIT $1 SPOWER$$ 3 ACT KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$ ON Control character (See 10.2) Description of symbol and comment (See 10.3) ID code (See 10.1)
R0300.0 KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON $1 KEEP POWER ON PO008 OPEN FRONT $1 OPEN FRONT COVER LO100 $1 % % @3 RD R1OO1.O OR R120.3 AND R1000.2 WRT Y2000.4 ( Net comment 3 RD R1OO1.O AND R1000.2 WRT Y23.4 (*SP 3 RD R1O1.O OR R123.4 AND R100.2 WRT Y200.4 %
y
INITIALIZE INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE
is written in here. Any characters computer is permitted.
you enter by using personal
Description
of net (See 10.4(l))
comment
Designation
of new page (for ladder diagram printing)
(See 10.4(2))
I%
@E file converted with version 08.1 or earlier is able to be converted to source program with version 08.4 or later. But a mnemonic file converted with version 08.4 or later is not able to be converted to source program with version 08.1 or earlier.
Note) A mnemonic
1-154
5. OPERATION
1)
ID code The ID code for symbol and comment Another ID codes are not changed. data has been changed to %@2-C.
RB4RB4 Data kind
(STEP)RC4;RC4
(STEP)
Ver. 08.4 or later System parameter Title Symbol/comment Ladder Message l/O module % @O %@l %@2-c % @a % @4 % @5
Ver. 08.1 or earlier % @O %@l % @2 %@3 % (94 % @5
Note) For PMC-RB5!RBG/NB2
is Ver 08.5 or later.
2)
Control character The dollar character character S is used as control character in the mnemonic file. file. Every dollar
in the sentence
must be described
as $$
in the mnemonic
3)
Symbol and comment
data
(1) Description of address and symbol

Describe the address data and the symbol strings in a same line. Describe the address data to top of line and the symbol strings describe or horizontal tabulation character as delimitter. after address data
with blank character 1 R0200.0
UNIT -- 3
POWER
(2) Description
of relay comment
and coil comment and coil comment after address defined in (1). marks after mark $1 is relay comment. And
Describe the relay comment The first string between
two single quotation
next string between two single quotation 1 $1 KEEP POWER ON
marks is coil comment.
KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON
Blank character
or horizontal
tabulation
character Mark of comment data line (only $1)
1-155
5. OPERATION
When relay comment single quotation marks.
is not used, a part of relay comment
must be described
by double
$1
INITIALIZE
OF SEQUENCE
Note) Every single quotation

described as $
mark in the relay comment file.
and coil comment
string
must be
+ *I in the mnemonic
4)
Ladder data
(1) Description
of net comment data is specified by (* and 3 characters.
The net comment
(2) Designation Designation
of new page (for ladder diagram printing) of new page for ladder diagram printing file. must be described as $P or $p in
the mnemonic
Characters
I Designation
Means of new page
$P or $p
(for ladder diagram printing)
1-156
5. OPERATION
5.7.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

(a) Parameter
PMC-L
ce
1
1
1. D address size
4001 01 501 301
(0 to 400 bytes) panel is used

(1: YES, 0: NO)
2 3 4 5 6 81
2. Whether an operators
3. Size of the area used for timers
(0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes)
4. Size of the area used for counters 5. 4-digit BCD display address 6. 2-digit BCD display address
101
501 tEoB1
PMC-M!M
(l/O LINK)/PMC-M
(MMC)
se
1
0 1
3901 1. D address size 2. Whether an operators panel is used (0 to 400 bytes) (1: YES, 0: NO) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (0 to 400 bytes) (100 to 200%) (0: 16 ms, 1: 8 ms) (0: Division, 1: Non-division)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 01
11 2001 401 201 101 1501 11 11 IEOBI
3. Size of the area used for timers 4. Size of the area used for counters 5. 4-digit BCD display address 6. 2-digit BCD display address 7. Ladder execution B. Ladder execution 9. Division/non-division time period method
(Note)
The parameter (MMC).
in Item 8 above (ladder execution
period) is not applicable
to PMC-M
PMC-P
ae
1 %l
01 20481
1. D address size (0 to 2048 bytes)
IEOBI
1-157
5. OPERATION
PMC-N/N
(VO LINKRB4)
%@ 0
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8
4040~ BINARY1 SOSPC-N1 8000001

581 0001 8100001
9 10 sl
NOi 041
[EOBI
m
PMC Series Counter data type (Binary or BCD) (0 to 100%) PASCAL execution time Setting not required (PC-N (fixed)) PASCAL TCB start address PASCAL PMC screen processing time time ratio Ladder execution (000 to 050%) PASCAL data start address Level-3 synchronization (NO: Asynchronous, 10. PMC edition (Note) Set a value subtracting
(4040: N, 4045: N (I!0 LINK))
(0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal)) (0 to 99%) (Note)
(0 to FFFFFF (hexadecimal)) YES: Synchronous)
(PMC edition (2-digit))
100 from an actual value for the
"7.Ladder execution
time.
(Example)
When an actual value desired for the ladder execution time is 125%, set 025 to that setting.
PMC-RAl
!RA2IPAl
/PA3PB4RB4
(STED)/RB5/RBG
%@ 0
1
2. 3. Counter data type Whether an operators (Binary or BCD) panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
2
3
BINARY1
No1
PMC-
RAll
14. PMC model
(PMC-RAl/PMC-RA2PMC RB4iPMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) PMC-
81 [EOBI
(Note) When specifying the KEY address, follows: YES in Item 3 above (whether LED address,
PAl/PMCPA3/PMCRB5/PMCRBG)
an operators
panel is used), specify as
KEY image address,
and LED image address
3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl
1-158
5. OPERATION
PMCRB,RB2RA3RB3
se
2 3 4 7 9
0 1 BINARY1 NO1 PMC-RB1 1001 YES1
2. Counter data type 3. Whether an operators 4. PMC model time method
(Binary or BCD) panel is used (PMC-RB, (YES: Used, NO: Not used) PMCRB2 or PMC-RB)
7. Ladder execution 9. Division/non-division
(100% (fixed)) (NO: Division, YES: Non-division)
01 [EOBI (Note 1)
When specify specifying YES in Item 3 above LED address, (whether an operators address, panel is used),
the KEY address,
KEY image
and LED image
address as follows:
(Note 2)
The parameter
in Item 9 above
(division/non-division
method)
is not applicable
to
PMCRB2/RA3/RB3.
PMCRCIRC3iRC4IRC4
(STEP)
%e 0
2 3 4 5 7 9
1 Counter data type Whether an operators PMC model Start address of language (Binary or BCD) panel is
BCDS. ND1 PMC-RCl 000000 100s. NOi
used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

(fixed)/PMC-RC4) data
(PMCRCRC3
program link control statement (0 or 800000 to 8FFFFF (hexadecimal))
81
[EoBl
Ladder execution Division/non-division
time
(1 to 150%) YES: Non-division)
method (NO: Division,
(Note 1)
When specify
specifying the
YES
in Item 3 above LED address,
(whether
an operators address,
panel
is used),
KEY address,
KEY image
and LED image
address as follows:
3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlO5.
(Note 2)
Parameter
9 Divisioninon-division
method
is not available for PMCRC3.
1-159
5. OPERATION
@I PMC-QC/NB:NB2
%@ 0 1
2 3 4 5 6 7
BCDJ NOSPHC-QCl 000000 501 1001
2. Counter data type 3. Whether an operators 4. 5. PMC model Start address of language
(Binary or BCD) panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used)
(PMC-QCPMC-NB!PMC-NB2) program link control statement (0 or 200000 to PFFFFF (hexadecimal)) data
81
fEoB1
6.
Percentage
of language time
program execution (Always 100%)
time
(1% to 99%)
7. Ladder execution
(Note)
If YES is specified addresses
in item 3 (whether
an operators
panel
is used),
specify
the
of KEY, LED, KEY image, and LED image as follows:
lb)
Title
(common
to all models)
%@
11
MACHINE MACHINE CNC PMC EDITION PROGRAM DATE PROGRAM ROM REMARKS1 WRITTEN
OF
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
TOOL TOOL 7 PMC NAMES PROGRAM NO.1 DRAWING
BUILDER NAMES NO.1 NO.1
NAME
PROGRAMING1 DESIGNED BY1 BYi
el
fEOB1
(c)
Symbols
and comments
(common
to all models)
1 x000.0
%@ 2
2PX.M 2PY.M
START BELT CONVEYER LIMIT SWITCH ON1
x000.1
%l (EOBJ
l-160
5. OPERATION
Symbols and comments
(at using the expanded
symbol function)
%@2-c
Symbol
R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER $1 'KEEP POWER ON' 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON' Relay comment Coil Comment
R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT $1 *$*P~wER$$' R0300.0

$1
*KEEP UNIT-~ $$PowER$' 0~'

IControl code
'KEEP POWER ON' OPEN-FRONT INITIALIZE
'KEEP INIT-
POWER ON'
PO008 LO100 $1 " % [EOBI
$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'

no Relay comment
(d)
Ladder
(common
to all models)
FOR -- P
%@ 31 RD X0.41 OR WRT SUB RD. SUB

21
Y80.61 DSOO.ll 11 NOT

401
X3.01
81911 03001 SUB 21
81 [EOBI
1 - 161
5. OPERATION
FULL- OPTION
%@3 1 NOOOOl: SUB N00002: RD SUB N00003: RD SUB N00004: RD SUB N00005: SUB N00006: SUB YOOO07: SUB VOOOOB: SUB YOOO09: RD DEC WRT 300010: SUB 300011: SUB I1
71 Pl x0.0 68 LlOO x0.1 73 LlOO x0.1 65 P2 66 P2 69 LlOO 72 71 P2 RO.0 DO 21 DO.0 72 64
; SP
;(SUBPRl ;(XADRSl ; JMPBl ;(LABELl ;(XADRS2 ; JMPCl ;(LABELl ;(XADRSZ ; CALL1 ;(SPlOOO ; CALLU5. ;(SPlOOO ; LBL 1 ;(LABEL~
; SPE
) [SUB PROGRAM
DATA NO.011 1
) [JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl] 1 ) [LABEL Looooi] 1

)
[JUMPB LABEL Looooi] J [LABEL Looooi] 1 [JUMPB LABEL LOOOOl]l DATA NO.lOOO] 1 DATA NO.lOOO]J
) )
) [SUB PROGRAM ) [SUB PROGRAM
1 [LABEL LOOOO~] 1
1 ) [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.1000
: -1 ; (SPlOOO
11
;(RADRSOO ) 1 ;(DADRS04 ) 1
SPE 1
; END 1
1-162
5. OPERATION
FULL-OPTION
(at using the expanded
symbol function)
%@3 1 NOOOOl: SUB 71 Pl

; SP [_,
Symbol Relay comment
;(SUBPRl ;
) "SUB PROG. N0.01"
[SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.011 1 L-Coil comment ) "JUMPB LABEL Lool" l-_-1
no Comment
N00002: RD SUB
x0.0 68 LlOO
;(XADRSl ; JMPBJ ;(LABELl ;(XADRSZ ; JMPCJ ;(LABELl

; LBL
)l
no Relay comment
; [LABEL ~ooool] 1A N00003: RD SUB x0.1 73 LlOO N00004: SUB 69 LlOO N00005: SUB N00006: SUB N00007: RD
DEC
) "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"$ )l
; [LABEL ~00001 11 1
)1
;(LABELl
; SPE
; [LABEL LOOOOlJ1 72 71 P2 RO.0 DO 21 DO.0 72 64 1

)
; (SPlOOO
-1
"SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.l"l
;(RADRSOO ) 1 ;(DADRSOII ) 1
WRT N00008: SUB N00009: SUB 81
1
; SPE 1 ; END 1
1-163
5.
OPERATION
@ LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM
H3
1 SP RD JMPB
RD JMPC
;UBPRl
71
;<Pl
>
[SUB
PROGRAM
DATA
NO.011 1
XADRSl :<Xo.o LABEL1 :<LlOo XADRSZ ;<Xo.l LABEL1 ;<Lloo XADRSZ ;<Xo.l SPlOOO :<P2 SPlOOO ;<P2 ;<LlOOO
1
> [JIJMPBLABEL LOOOO1]1 > [LABEL Looool] 1 > [JUMPB LABEL ~ooool] 1 > [LABEL L00001] 1 > [JUMPB LABEL Looool] 1 > [SUB PROGRAM > [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.looo]1 DATA NO.lOoo] 1
RD CALL CALLU LABEL1 iPlOO0 LBL

SPE
> [LABEL Looooi] 1 > [SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.lOoo] 1
SP RD DEC WRT
SPE 1
;<P2 RADROO ;<RO.O DADR04 ;<DO
1 1
'
21
DO.0 1
END 1 1
1
LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM (at using the expanded symbol function)
6)
%@3 1 SUBPRl
Address
Relay comment
SP
SUBPRl :<Pl r
Symbol
>. "SUB PROG. N0.01" DATA NO.011 1

Coil comment -
; [SUB PROGRAM RD JMPB RD JMPC LABEL1 LBL SPE 1 SPlOOO SP RD DEC WRT
SPE 1
XADRSl ;<XO.o LABEL1 ;<LlOO
> 'JUMPB LABEL LOOl"1
>l
Looooi] 1
[LABEL
XADRS2 ;<XO.l LABEL1 ;<LlOO ;<LlOOO

;
> "JUMPB LABEL LOOl"l > [LABEL Looool] 1 >1
[LABEL Looool] 1 > "SUB PROGRAM NO.l"l ' '
;<P2 RADROO ;<RO.O DADR04 ;<DO
21
DO.0 1
END 1 %
1-164
5. OPERATION
(e) Message
re
A0
(other than PMC-L, PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/M (MMC), PMC-P)
4 1
0. 0 2100020 ATC
DOOR
NOT SPEED KEY SWITCR
CLOSE1 ARRIVA ONi
AOO.l L SIGNAL AO0.2
2101022 NOT 2100020
SPINDLE ON1 EDTOK
%l
[EOBI
(f1 I/O module (other than PMC-UP)

%@ 5
x000
YO08
1
1 1 0 0 1 4 ID64Al
OD64Bl
81 L [EOBI
(Note) The ID code depends on the model as follows: . 0 %@4 : PMC-M/M (I/O LINK)/PMC-M (MMC) %@5 : PMC-N/N (I/O LINK), PMC_RAl/RA2/RB/RB2/RC
1-165
5. OPERATION
5.7.5 Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

(a) PMC-M
1 %@0 1
%@ A
1 2 8 9
3901 11 11
11
el ee 11
01
02 MACH MACH
INE INE WRITTEN RKSl
TOOL TOOL
BUILDER NAME1
NAMES
09
ROM
REMA
BYA
10
sl %@ 2 1 x000.0
x000.1
2PX.M 2PY.M
START BELT CONVEYER LIMIT SWITCH ONS.
%l %@ 3 1
SUB RD. SUB 11 NOT x3.01
401
21
81911 03005 SUB SUB 21
481
%l se 4 1
x000
YOO8
1 1
1 4
ID64Al OD64Bl
%l %@ E 1 [EOBI
1-166
5. OPERATION
PMC-N 1
1 %@0 1
%@ A
1 2 9 10 %l
sosol BINARY1 NO1 041
%@ 11 MACHINE 01 02
09
TOOL TOOL WRITTEN
BUILDER NAME1 BY1
NAME1
MACHINE ROM REMARKS1
10 sl
%@ 21 x000.0 x000.1
2PX.M 2PY.M
START BELT CONVEYER LIMIT SWITCH ON1
sl %@ 3
SUB RD. SUB
1 11 NOT K3.01
401
21
81911 DO001 SUB SUB %l %@ 4 1 AOO.0 AOO.l L rl %@ 51 x000 YOO8 %l %@ El tEoB1 1 1 0 0 1 4 ID64Al OD64Bl SIGNAL 21 481
2100020 2101022 NOT
ATC SPINDLE ON1
DOOR
NOT SPEED
CLOSE1 ARRIVA
1-167
5. OPERATION
(cl
PMC-FIB
1 se 0 1
%@ A
2 3 BCDJ. NO1
1001 YES1
%l %@11
01 02
09
MACHINE MACHINE ROM REMARKS1 WRITTEN
TOOL TOOL
BUILDER
NAME1
NAME1
BY' J
10
%l %@2 1 x000.0
x000.1
ZPX.M ZPY.M
START BELT CONVEYER LIMIT SWITCH 0 N 1
sl oe
SUB RD. SUB
1
11 NOT K3.01
21
81911 D3001 SUB SUB
401
21 481
sl %@4 1
AOO.0 AOO.l L SIGNAL 2100020 2101022 NOT ATC SPI ONS. DOOR NDLE SP N
OT
CLOSE1 ARRIVA
EED
x000
YOO8
%l %@ 5 1
1 1 0 0 1 4 ID16 OD32
%l %@ E 1 [EOBI
cl Al
l-168
5. OPERATION
(d)
PMC-RB4
%@A
%@O1 2 BINARY& 3 NO1 4 PMC-RB4
1 %@l1
% 01 MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME1 10 REMARKS1 % 1
ae2-c 1
RO200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1 $1 'KEEP POWER ON' R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1 'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$' ON'J. $1 '$'P~wER$$'
RO300.0 1
'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'1 $1 'KEEP POWER ON' OPEN-FRONT1 PO008 $1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1 INITIALIZE1 LO100 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'& $1 " $1 $@3 1 RD RlOOl.03. 3R R120.3 1 9ND R1000.2 1 nlRTY2000.4 1 (* Inscribe the net comment here. Any characters 1 which are input with personal computer can be used. R) RD R1OO1.O1 9ND R1000.2 1 dRT Y23.4 1 form feed position (in Ladder diagram) (* SP l1 RD R1O1.O 1 OR R123.4 1 AND R100.21 WRT Y200.41 % 1 %@a
AOO.0
Net comment
2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON 1
%
X000
%@5
1 0 1 IDlBC& YO08 1 0 4 OD32Al
1 %@E 1
%
1-169
5. OPERATION
5.7.6
The note if the step sequence function is selected when setting a model
method, mnemonic need following instructions notes: cannot be coded.
When using the step sequence The mnemonic conversion
functions
1)
Programming
by Mnemonic program
instructions cannot be created with mnemonic instructions. It is impossible to
A step sequence
create a step sequence
program with a text editor, or to read the program conversion.
into FAPT LADDER
by means of mnemonic-to-source
2)
Source-to-Mnemonic If source-to-mnemonic subprograms step sequence
and Mnemonic-to-Source conversion is executed
Conversions for a step sequence step sequence source program, being only ladder If a to
are converted source
to mnemonics,
subprograms
ignored. then
program
is subjected
to source-to-mnemonic
conversion,
mnemonic-to-source
conversion,
the original source program will not be replicated.
3)
Source Program Conversion A program can be converted
using Mnemonics by using mnemonics, as shown below:
PMC-RB3
, *
PMCRC3
t (STEP SEQ)
A program
for the PMC-FIB4
(STEP
SEC?) cannot
be converted 7.2.
for use with the PMCRC4
(STEP SEC), because
of the reason explained (For details
in Section
The program can be converted see the description of the
if a ROM file is used, however. decompiler.)
of this conversion,
l-170
5. OPERATION
5.7.7 User batch file execution

The batch file FLMNE.BAT can be executed by suspending the execution of FAPT LADDER.
A users own batch file generated text editor can also be executed.
by editing the contents
of the FLMNE.BAT
file with a standard
Examole 1
The execution
of FAPT LADDER
is suspended
and text editor VZ is activated.
(In this case,
VZ must be defined in the environment
variable PATH beforehand.)
[Operation ] Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNEBAT as follows:
vz
Select MNEEDT (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.
The mnemonic
menu screen appears.
Select ([BATCH]
(user batch file execution).
The following
message appears:
Execute 'FLMNE.BAT'. Add parameter(s)? [A(Add), N(Not add), S(Stop)]
Specify
A (Add), and specify
*.HEX
as the parameter.
VZ is activated
and a list of files
with the extension
.HEX is displayed.
To restart FAPT LADDER. terminate
VZ.
IReturn
to FAPT LADDER. Hit any key! I

The screen display returns to the mnemonic menu screen.
Press any key.
Example 2
The
execution
of
FAPT
LADDER
is
suspended. commands
Then,
the
command Create
processor as
COMMAND.COM follows:
is activated
and MS-DOS
are enabled.
FLMNE.BAT
COMMAND
1 - 171
II. APPLICATIONS
(NOTES ON THE PC ENVIRONMENT)
1. COMMON OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PGAT
1. COMMON OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT
1.1 Function for Transferring Data between the P-G and PC

This function is used to transfer data in ASCII (mnemonic) format between a P-G (including the
Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS232 cable. FLOAD98, and the command
The command
for NEC PC9801 series PCs is
for IBM PC/ATs is FLOADAT.
Use this function (data exchange provided
to transfer function)
the sequence
program
between
the P-G and a personal
computer
if
cannot
be used with 3.5 floppy,
for example,
in a system with the P-G not provided with a
with a 5 floppy disk drive or in a system
with a personal
computer
3.5 floppy disk (1.2 Mbytes) drive.
1.1.1
Command input during startup
(1)
Uploading Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.
FLOAD98 FLOADAT -
[name of file for storing uploaded data] [name of file for storing uploaded data] -
-u (for PC9801) -u (for IBM PC/AT)
When a file with the same name as the file specified current directory, the following message is displayed.
for receiving
data already
exists
in the
File is exist.
Over write?
<Y/N >
(2)
Downloading Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232 port.
FLOAD98 FLOADAT _
[name of file for storing downloaded [name of file for storing downloaded
data] data] _
-d (for PC9801) -d (for IBM PC/AT)
As shown above, the load commands
have the following
two parameters:
-u: Uploads data from the P-G to the PC. -d: Downloads data from the PC to the P-G.
(Note)
The above parameters
can be specified
with either lowercase
or uppercase
characters.
2-l
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1 .1.2
PC side
Communications
settings
NEC PC9801 Series (MS-DOS SPEED command)
baud rate: character parity: stop bits: X parameter: length:
4800 or 9600 7 bits even parity 2 bits none
IBM PC/AT Series (PC DOS MODE command)
MODE COMI: MODE COMl:
4800,E,7,2 9600,E,7,2 (for 9600 baud)
P-G side IO NC,CNl,Fl ,F6 (for 9600 baud)
10 NC,CNl,Fl,F6,BRlO
(Note 1) The baud rate can be set to either 4800 or 9600.

baud rate is set to 9600, the parameter for the P-G.
However,
note that when
the PC
BRlO must be added to the baud rate setting
(Note 2) It is necessary to set these communications

using this function, 1). please restore (Chapter
setting only for doing this operation. settings as the section
After 2.1
the communications
The CN number is not fixed. CNl to CN4.
For the P-G or P-G Mark II, the CN number can be any setting from to CN3. However, Use the
For the P-G Mate, the CN number can be any setting from CNl selected 1.
note that the CN number cables specified
here must match the CN number of the IO command.
in Appendix
2-2
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
Operation examde
During uploading Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents
c PC > < PG > Turn on power. < PG > Enter IO command settings.
; IONC,CNl
; i Settings)
,Fl ,FG(,BRlO)
c PC > PC9801 Series: Enter SPEED command settings. IBM PC/AT Series: Enter MODE command < PG > Store transmission settings.
(See Section 2 of Communications
i : i Press the [F2] key to select menu item no.2. FLOAD98 FLOADAT FILE NAME -u FILENAME -u is displayed. START
data in P-G memory.
< PC > Execute
FLOAD98.
Enters waiting state. Enters waiting state.
i i
Execute FLOADAT.
i < PC > < PG > Set [F6] ON. Select no.4 on the menu. i
LOADER
c PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the submenu. 3egins transmission. Completes transmission. e PG > Returns to the menu. ( PC > The message Operation displayed, ANY KEY. followed Complete is i =zPC > Operation i ; i Complete is displayed. HIT ANY KEY is displayed. i c PG > EXECUTING is displayed.
by the prompt HIT
Hit any key to end operation.
During
downloading Operation procedure Example of input and screen contents
< PC > < PG > Turn on power. < PG > Enter IO command settings. settings. ; i i < PG > Turn on [Fl] menu. key. Select no.2 on the IO NC,CNl,(BRlO,)Fl,FG (See Section 2 of Communications Settings) is displayed.
< PC > Enter SPEED command
! =zPG > EXECUTING
Enters waiting state. ; ; FLOAD98 FLOADAT FILE NAME -d FILENAME -d
< PC > Execute FLOAD98. Execute FLOADAT.
Begins transmission. Completes transmission. <PG> Returns to the menu. Operation Complete is
i <PC>
Output
Start is displayed.
< PC > The message displayed, ANY KEY.
: < PC > Operation i i
Complete
is displayed.
followed
by the prompt HIT
HIT ANY KEY is displayed.
Hit any key to end operation.
2-3
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PGAT
1 .1.3
Protocol
Durinq uploadinq When the FLOAD98 or FLOADAT command is executed begins. on the PC side, a communications DC 3 is
request is issued for the P-G and reception sent and transmission is completed.
After all data has been received,
0 8 Q @
DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmission Data is received. Completion code is received and reception
request).
is completed.
DC 3 code is sent.
Transmission output.
and reception
both use the l-byte
machine-dependent
BIOS call for input and
Durina downloadinq After the P-G issues FLOADAT is activated a transmission request, the P-G enters begins. the waiting state. FLOAD98 or
in the PC, then transmission is completed.
After all data has been sent. DC 4
is sent and transmission
0 8 @ @
The P-G issues DC 1. DC 2 code is sent to the P-G. Data is sent. DC 4 code is sent.
Transmission output.
and reception
both use the l-byte
machine-dependent
BIOS call for input and
1.1.4
BUSY control
speed is faster than reception In the PC9801 processing, series, BUSY control is performed by
When the transmission issuing
the DC 1 and DC 3 codes. is set to off, which
the X parameter support
in the DOS SPEED In the
command
allows the application
to provide
for BUSY control.
IBM PC/AT series, there is no X parameter,
which effectively
has the same result.
2-4
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1.1.5 Data start and end codes

The system will automatically is used. terminates. When determine codes which of the following are used, an error seven pairs of start and end codes message is displayed and operation
none of these
(Note)
The end codes
shown here must appear at the beginning of a line. In
other words, strictly speaking, a data reception end code is
actually denoted by the sequence code. appearing CR + LF + an end within comments
End codes (% etc.)
are ignored.
1.1.6 Data conversion (return codes)

(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received, (ODH) followed by LF (OAH). it is converted into two characters, the first of which is CR
(2) When a CR code (ODH) is received,
it is discarded.
(3) When an end code (DE) is received,
CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended
to it in that order.
1.1.7 Transmission and receive data

Until a data start code (DS) is received, data is discarded.
1 1 1 1 . . ..-Discarded Valid data I...
After the end code (DE) has been sent or received, downloading, then the file is closed.
DC 3 is sent for uploading
or DC 4 is sent for
2-s
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1 .1.8
Error detection
and messages
four types of errors.
This software detects the following
(1) When
there is an error in the command
line
Error in the file name, -u. or -d. Parameter FLOAD98 Error FILENAME -u/-d set parameter. (FILNAME, upload or download.)
(2) When
the specified
file cannot be found cannot be opened. I
Output file cannot be found or file for receiving
I~- ~~~
Cannot open output file
(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER format is sent or received Wrong data received
(4) When there is a definite problem with the start code, Start Code error detected or there is a definite oroblem with the end code
IEnd code
error detected
This software only detects errors in the command This software does not support detection
line and in the FAPT LADDER format. of FAPT LADDER data.
of errors in the contents
Messaaes
When the file name specified the following
as the file for receiving
data already
exists
in the current
directory,
message is displayed. Over write? <Y/N >
File is exist.
2-6
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1.1.9
1. 2. 3.
Error detection
and handling
Incorrect entry found in the command line. Specified file cannot be opened. Data not in the FAPT LADDER format was sent or received.
The following 0 0
l l l
causes can be considered
for the above errors:
The end code has been omitted (% or %@E was omitted). The start code has been omitted (%@, where Garbage data exists at the beginning of the file.
l
is A or 0 to 5. was omitted).
Garbage data exists between each unit of data. The file format is completely different from the FAPT LADDER format.
When any of the above errors is detected,
the current operation
is canceled.
During screen.
downloading,
if an error
is detected
on the PC, the system
will return
to the DOS
At the same time, a %, %@E or other end code is sent to the P-G to return it to the
menu screen.
4. Others
When, for some reason, data transfer is interrupted (When the power to the PC or P-G is interrupted during operation, etc.)
When data transfer
is interrupted
during
uploading,
the system
will enter a waiting + <C >). corrupt
state until
data transfer is restarted. When data transfer
(To interrupt
the waiting state, press cCTRl_> downloading,
is interrupted
during
the data becomes
and data
transfer must be started over from the beginning.
2-7
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT
1.2 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Program

By changing the mnemonic file, it is possible to convert some PMC type sequence program to
another type of it.
1.2.1 Converting by system parameter editing

On the following parameter However, different. PMC type, it is possible data. usable functional instructions and range of address are to edit the different PMC type data by changing system
of the mnemonic
format of the system parameter,
1~
CNC TYPE
PMC TYPE PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RB!YRB6~RC/RC3/RC4
FS16f 18-T/M Power Mate-MODEL D
PMC-PA1 /PA3
[Example:
PMC-RB
+ PMC-RC3] the original source program to mnemonic fife to PMCRC3 LADDER system file.
(1) (2)
Set the PMC type to PMC-RB and convert Change the system parameter PMC type
of the mnemonic on FAPT
with a standard text editor. and convert the mnemonic
(3) Set the file(+(2))
to PMC-RC3
to source program.
Original %@A %@O
file (PMC-RB)
Converted
file (PMCRC3
%@A %@O 2 BCD 3 NO

b
2 ECD 3 NO 4 PMC-RB 7 100 9 YES % %@l 01 ABC-KIKAI 02 S-DRILL
Change system parameter
4 PMC-RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 % %@l 01 ABC-KIKAI 02 S-DRILL
%@5 X000 1 YO08 1 %

%@E
0 0
1 ID16C 4 OD32A
$65 X000 1 YO08 1 8 %@E
0 0
1 IDl6C 4 OD32A
2-8
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1.2.2
Convert with signal address
converter
CONVERTER FILE NAME FS()T CNV.SYM
APPLICABLE PMC-uM/M(MMC) (FSO-T)
PMCCNC -+ PMC-RAl
TYPE iRA2IRA3IRB
REFERENCE FANUC PMC PROGRAMMING (LADDER
MATERIALS
/RB2RB3RB4RB5 RBG/RC/RC3/RC4 (FS16/18-T) + PMCRAl/RA2/RA3/RB /RB2/RB3!RB4/RB5/ RBG/RC/RCB/RC4 (FS16/18-M)
MANUAL
LANGUAGE) B-61 863E
FSOM
CNV.SYM
PMC-UM/M(MMC) (FSO-M)
PM-C_CNV.SYM
PMC-P (Power Mate -MODEL C)
PAllPA (Power Mate -MODEL D)
(Note)
[Example:
The converter
file is stored in the directory
APPENDIX
of module floppy disk.
PMC-P + PMC-PA11
(1) (2)
Set PMC type to PMC-P, and Set PMC type to PMC-PAl.
convert the original source program to the mnemonic And input the source program name and select
file. (+A.) at edit
[END]
mode without editing the ladder program. (3) Convert the source program(2) to the mnemonic file. (+B.)
(4) Quit FAPT LADDER, and activate any standard text editor. (Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.) (5) Replace the symbol and comment (PM-C.CNV). (+C.) file (PMC-PAl) to the ladder data of the original data of the mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) to the converter file
(6) Replace the ladder data of mnemonic mnemonic file (PMC-P). (+D.) (7) Complete
the text editor, and activate FAPT LADDER. and convert the mnemonic file@) to source program. data.
(8) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl,
(3) Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment
2-9
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
Convert file PM-C - CNV.SYM %@2 A. Original file (PMC-P)
60004.3 G68.3 60005.0 695.0 60005.2 695.2 60005.3 G95.3 60005.6 G83.7 G0006.2 675.2 60006.4 674.4 60007.2 G68.2 G0007.5 684.5
%@A %@O B. Converted file (PMC-PAl)
%@A %@O 1 2048 % be1 B

b@2 b b@3 ?D X21.4
2 BINARY 3 NO 4 PMC-PA1 % eel % se2

c D. insertion ,-
X1027.4 X23.4 X1027.5 X23.5 X1027.6 X23.6 X1027.7 X23.7
iRT G121.4 tD.NOT X22.3 fRT.NOT 6122.3 :UB 1 IUB 2 fRT 6121.4 !D.NOT X22.3 rRT.NOT 6122.3 UB 1 UB 2
@E
I$-
b ae3 b se4 b se5 b b@E
2-10
1. COMMON OPERATIONS FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT
1.2.3 Using data in a sequence program for another program

Data (such as title, symbol & comment, ladder, message, and I/O module method. data) in a sequence
program can be used for another sequence
program, by the following
The range of addresses Refer to the programming
used varies from one model to another. manual of the respective models.
They may have to be modified.
[Example
: Using the symbols
& comment
data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]
%@A %@O
%@A
2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-RB 7 100 9 YES % eel
%@O 2 BCD
3 NO
4 PMC-RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 9 YES % %@l X000.0 ZPX.M X000.1 ZPY.M
%@2 x000.0
2PX.M
x000.1 2PY.M
1.3 Standard Symbol Data

When a mnemonic file and the standard by FANUC. symbol data are combined, it is possible to use the
standard symbol name provided
CNC TYPE FS16/18-T FS16/18-M Power Mate-MODEL Power Mate-MODEL D H
DATA FILE NAME F16&F18-T.SYM FlG&F18-M.SYM PM-D.SYM PM-H.SYM
(Note)
The standard symbol data is stored in the directory
APPENDIX.
2-11
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1.4 Changing
Each parameter
Printer Output Format

file of this software can be rewritten using a commercially frames can be changed. available text editor so
that the output format shown in each of the following -AMROFTRP. 1 Diagram output % 1. 2. 3. 4.
L
DAT
Change the paper selection name Set the top margin Set the net interval Set the printer model and
paw
-CROSSING. DAT
(Setting the cross-reference list output format) 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the output format guidance information Set the output information Specify the output format Set the read/write coil guidance information Specify the linefeed Specify the page break 5. 6. 7.
-PR201-10 . INF PR201-15 . INF PR201-A4 . INF PRlO-A . INF PRlS-A . INF PRA4-A . INF ESC-P-10 . INF ESC-P-15 . INF ESCPl O-A. INF ESCPl5-A. INF -FANUC-10. INF Set the line spacing Set the left margin Set the title of printout
For these parameter
files, do not change any item not described
here.
2-12
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
: LI : z
#PAPER=lO-G : flO-A=lO-inch/ASCII i LENGTHL=ll i LENGTH=11 : WIDTHL=lO : WIDTH=10 ; PTCHL=lS/lZO
Print format
:.......)
.:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..: lo-inch/ASCII . *lo-inch/graphic 15-inch/ASCII 15-inch/graphic A4 portrait/ASCII A4 portrait/graphic
b-1
- ,:gq: .,...
. .. .:.:,~:.:,~~:-:
>:: ,. : :
6:~:~7~8~,.g~~10 ,.y F
:;
~j$.#).. ,,..
:.
.((.,., .,...,._._.
I-
LEFTMGL=O LEFTWG=O TOPMGL=O TOPMG=O LCNTL=4 C_FI LE+-ij O_FILE;PRTDAT.DMP #END,:' #lQ'G=lO-inch/graphic LENGTHL=ll LENGTH=11 WIDTHL=lO WIDTH=10 PTCHL=lS/lZO
A.
SETUP screen (diaqram output)
b-2
LEFTMGL=O LEFTWG=O TOPMGL=O TOPMG=O
:.
: : : : .*.
B. /
.. ..:.. >:
AMROFTRP.DAT
file
:,:...:.. .
:... ,,.. .
::., ~ ,,,.,.... .,>,,: ..... ...... ,.,
C-l.
l .lNF files selectable at #l O-A jindicated aoainst a white backaround)
C-2. l .lNF files selectable at #10-G lindicated aaainst a white backaround)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._...... (Example) If lo-inch/graphic is selected in A: 0 In 8, setting b-2 is valid. @ In C-2, a setting of PR201-lO.INF isvalid. i . . . . . . . ...................................................................................
2-13
1.4.1 Changing the paper selection name

This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format
Name of file to be edited 9MROFTRP.DAT
Point of change
Settings
#l O-A = lo-inch!ASCII
Arbitrary
character
string consisting (or 15 full-size)
of
#l O-G = 1O-inch!graphic #15-A = 15inch/ASCII #15-G = 15-inch/graphic #A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII #A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic
up to 30 half-size characters
(Note)
#A4L-A = and #A4L-G = are unavailable
in the IBM PC/AT system.
1.4.2 Setting the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.
Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP.DAT
Point of change
Settings
TOPMGL = 0 TOPMG = 0 (for each form)
Decimal number
1.4.3 Setting the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying changed this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used during diagram printout can be
in the manner shown below.
NO0003 C 00001 +00006 NO0004 D YO.7 00001
II
YO.0 l 00006
II
YO.0
l 00006
YO.7 00001
YO.1
YO.0
.00006
YO.1
YO.7 00001
YO.2 +00008
NO0005 E
YO.0
+00006
YO.1
YO.7 00001
YO.2 +00008
When LCNTL = 4
When LCNTL = 5
2-14
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PCiAT
File edited AMROFTRP.DAT
Modifications LCNTL = 4 (Set for each sheet)
Settings Specify either 4 or 5 I
1.4.4 Setting the printer model and print paper

This item can change the printer model and print paper that are specified during paper selection.
PR201 is not usable in the IBM system.
Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP. DAT
Point of change #l O-A : C;FILE =
l .lNF that can be

set PRlO_A .INF PR201_10 .INF ESCPlO_A.INF ESC_P_lO . INF FANUC_10. INF .INF PRlO_A PR201_10 .INF ESCPlO_A. INF ESC P lO.INF FAN%zlO. INF PR 15-A .INF PR201_15 .INF ESCP15 A. INF ESC_P_i5. INF .INF PRlS_A PR201_15 .INF ESCPIS A.INF ESC _ P1 15.INF PRA4_A PR201_A4 .INF .INF
Printer name PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000 FANUC printer PR201 PR201 VP1 000 VP1000 FANUC printer PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000 PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1000 PR201 PR201
Print paper type/print 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch 1O-inch lo-inch
15inch
mode
continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous
form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic
#10-G . C.-FILE =
#15-A
C-FILE #15-G
continuous 15-inch continuous 15-inch continuous 15-inch continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous
C;FILE
15-inch 15-inch 15-inch 15-inch
#A4L-A : (Note) C;FILE =
A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic
#A4L-G : (Note) C;FILE =
PRA4_A PR201_A4
.INF .lNF
PR201 PR201
A4 portrait, cut sheet/ASCII A4 portrait, cut sheet/graphic
(Note)
This item is not supported
in the IBM system.
2-15
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
1.4.5 Setting the line spacing

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output. one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4. The file to be edited is the
Name of file to be edited l .INF LPI LDRLPI
Point of change
Settings
(H) (1 B) (C) (120) ; (H) (1 B) (C) (T15) ;
(H) (1 B) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ; (H) (1B) (C) (Tedecimal number >) ;
1.4.6 Setting the left margin

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output. one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4. The file to be edited is the
Name of file to be edited
Point of change LMARGIN (H) (1B) (C) (LOOO); 1
Settings
I(H) (1B) (C) (LKdecimal
number>)
2-16
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC,AT
Environment
settings for diagram printout
- example
1 (settings
in file AMROFTRP.DAT)
When 1 is selected as the printout paper
#PAPER = 10-G L #10-A= 10 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIOTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 2/3 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 l TOPMGL =0 * TOPMG = 0 * LCNTL = 4 L C FILE = PRlO AJNF O-FILE = PRTtiAT.DMP &ND L #10-G = 10 inch/graphic LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 ;/w&i ; A0 PITCHL: 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 l TOPMGL = 0 . TOPMG = 0 + LCNTL = 4 * C-FILE = PR20l_lO.INF OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP + #I 5-A = 15 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 15 WIDTH = 15 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 213 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 16 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 1 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 + TOPMGL = 0 + TOPMG = 0 + LCNTL = 4 . C-FILE = PRl S_A.INF OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP *#15-G-15 inch
Changing the types of printout paper The name is changed from 1:lO inch to l:NEC 10. see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.) *
#PAPER = I O-G #lo-A=NEC 10 LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH- 10. PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 uw:L ;E RATIO; = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 ;c$w-=,5 LCNTL = 4 C-FILE = PRlO_A.INF 2EFlkE * PRTDAT.DMP #l O-G = EPSON 10 LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO - 2M GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 0 ym& ;40 C-FILE :ESCPlO A.INF fEF&E = PRTDAf.DMP 115-A = 15 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 15 WIDTH = 15 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 #L ;k RATIO; = 2/3 RATIO = 2M GRAMODL = 16 GRAMOD = 16 ;;EIg;L 71 LEFTMGLZ 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 0 TbPMb = 0 LCNTL = 5 C FILE = PR15 A.INF O-FILE = PRT@AT.DMP #END *#15-G--15 inch
Changing
the upper margin
(The upper margin is set to ) 5 characters.) Changing the types of printout paper * (The name is changed from 2:15 inch to 2:EPSON 10. See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.)
Changing
the type of printer
) (The printer is changed to EPSON VP1000 and the paper is changed to IO-inch forms.)
Changing the spacing between :he LADDER nets * :The net spacing for the -ADDER diagram is widened.)
(Note)
An asterisk (*) indicates
data which can be modified.
2-17
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
FOR THE
PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT
Environment
settings for diagram printout
- example 2 (settings
in fife PR201_1O.INF)
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
PRZOlH3 CNTINF CRLF FORMF CPI CANCEL LDRCP I * LPI * LDRLP I * LMARGIN RMARGIN LDRCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET 1
. . . . . .
(H) W)(C) (T2D); (H) w (C) (Tl5) ; (H)WW)(LDDD); (H) W (C) t/D781 ; (H) (18) (C) (50014); (HwB)ww; (H) W W (H) ;
. . . . . .
Setting the spacing between lines (Line spacing is set to 25.) I I
Setting the left margin (Left margin is set to 5 characters.)
PRZOlH3 CNTINF (
CRLF FORMF CANCEL W)(OD,OA); yw{:
CPI LDRCP I LPI LORLP I LMARGIN RMARGIN LORCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET
OWhH); (H) (1B) (C) (Q) ; (H)W)WT25); (HWWC)(Tl5); (H) (1B) (C) (LOD5) ; (H) (18) (C)(/078); (H) (16) (C) (50014); (H) W) w (K); (H) W (C)(H);
(Note)
An asterisk (*) indicates
data which can be modified.
2-18
1.4.7 Setting the title of printout

This item can change specified according the title of a diagram when it is output. The file to be edited is the one
to the descriptions
in Section 1.4.4.
Vame of file to be edited :INF SYS-TITLE (C) (
Point of change ~~
-T
(C) (<any characters > ) ;
Settings
character
string consisting (or 30 full-size)
System parameter
of up to 60 half-size
CMT-TITLE (C) ( Symbol & comment ) ;
LAD-TITLE (C) (* Ladder diagram ) ;
IO-TITLE (C) (* I!0 module data ) ;
MSG-TITLE (C) ( Message data 7 ;
TIT-TITLE (C) ( Title data 7 ;
CRS-TITLE (C) ( Cross-reference ) ;
BIT-TITLE (C) ( Bit address map T ;
LS-TITLE (C) (List file 7 :
(Note)
Half-size
katakana characters
cannot be used.
1.4.8 Setting the cross-reference list output format guidance information

This item can specify reference guidance listing. characters to be output as guidance information to be output at the beginning during cross-
In the CROSSINF.DAT
file, lines with no semicolon
are valid as
information.
Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE =
Point of change
Settings
Any character to 19 bytes
string consisting
of up
2-19
1.4.9 Setting the cross-reference list output information

This item can specify step and/or net numbers step and net numbers CROSSINF.DAT information. file, are specified, lines with which to be output as cross-reference is to be printed at the information. If both In the
first can also be specified. are valid
no semicolon
beginning
as cross-reference
Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT NET-INF =
Point of change
Settings
When only the net number is output: NET-INT = 1 STEP-INF = 0 When only the step number is output: NET-INT = 0 STEP-INF = 1 When the net and step numbers output in the stated sequence: NET-INT = 1 STEP-INF = 2 When the step and net numbers output in the stated sequence: NET-INT = 2 STEP-INF = 1 are are
STEP-INF =
1.4.10 Specifying the cross-reference

This item enables a character the CROSSINF.DAT
list output format

of the step and net numbers. are valid. In
string to be printed at the beginning at the beginning
file, lines with no semicolon
Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT 1 FORM =
Point of change
Settings
I Character
string + %s
(Note)
Only letters in lowercase
are valid as %s.
Z-20
1.4.11 Setting the cross-reference list read/write coil guidance information

This item can set a comment semicolon at the beginning about coil attributes. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no
are valid.
Vame of file to be edited XOSSINF.DAT READ = WRITE =
Point of change
Settings
Character
13 bytes.
string consisting
of up to
When coils are indicated graphic symbols,
using
specify as shown as the
below, and select graphic diagram output format. READ = -I IREAD = -I IREAD = READ = -l/l-l/l-I I-I I-(/): : : : : :
WRITE = -()WRITE = -()-
1.4.12 Specifying the cross-reference list linefeed

This item can insert a space line between semicolon at the beginning are valid. addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no
Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT 1NL =
Point of change
IDecimal
as the linefeed count,
number
(Note)
In this case, space lines as many as the specified addresses. addresses.) (If 0 is specified
value plus 1 are inserted no space line is inserted
between between
1.4.13 Specifying the cross-reference list page break

This item can specify a page break between no semicolon at the beginning are valid. address types. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with
Name of file to be edited FF =
Point of change
Settings
:ROSSINF.DAT
0 = the page is not advanced 1 = the page is advanced
2-21
1.4.14 Setting the output format guidance

A desired character the CROSSINF.DAT valid. string can be output as guidance file, data of a line beginning when the cross reference list is printed. In (;) is
with a character
other than a semi-colon
File edited CROSSINF.DAT
Modifications GUIDE =
Settings Desired character bvtes string of up to 19
1.4.15 Setting the output information

As the cross reference output information, step numbers, net numbers, or both can be output.
When both step and net numbers In the CROSSINF.DAT valid.
are output, the order in which they are printed can be specified. with a character other than a semi-colon (;) is
file, data of a line beginning
Modifications NET-INF = STEP-INF =
Settings Only net numbers NET-INF = 1 STEP-INF = 0 Only step numbers NET-INF = 0 STEP-INF = 1 Net numbers and step numbers are are output. are output.
output in that order. NET-INF = 1 STEP-INF = 2 Step numbers and net numbers are
output in that order. NET-INF = 2 STEP-INF = 1
1.4.16 Setting the output format

A character string can be printed in front of each step or net number. with a character other than a semi-colon In the CROSSINF.DAT file,
data of a line beginning
(;) is valid.
1 I FORM
Modifications =
I I Character
Settings string + %s
(Note)
With %s,
only the lowercase
letter s is valid.
2-22
1.4.17 Setting the read/write coil guidance

A comment beginning about each coil attribute with a character can be specified. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, data of a line
(;) is valid.
File edited CROSSINF.DAT READ =
Modifications Character
Settings string of up to 13 bytes.
WRITE =
To print a coil with graphic characters, specify as follows and
select graphic diagram output.
READ=READ=-IIREAD= READ=
1 I- -I/j-: -I/I-: -1 I-I I-(I): : : :
WRITE = -()WRITE =
-()-
(Note)
With %s, only the lowercase
letter s is valid.
1.4.18 Setting line feed

Blank lines can be inserted data of a line beginning between the data of different addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file,
with a character
(;) is valid.
-1
File edited CROSSINF.DAT NL =
Modifications Decimal value
Settings
(Note)
Blank lines of the specified (If zero is specified
number
plus one are inserted
between
the data of different
address types.
as the line feed value, no blank lines are inserted.)
1.4.19 Setting form feed

The printing of the data of each address type can be started on a new page. In the
CROSSINF.DAT
file, data of a line beginning
with a character
(;) is valid.
File edited CROSSINF.DAT FF =
Modifications
Settings 0 = Form feed is executed. 1 = Form feed is not executed.
2-23
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
Environment
l
settings for diagram output - example 3 (sample setting 1 of the CROSSINF.DAT file
file)
Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT :
GUIDEsSTEP No./NET No. NET-INF=2 STEP-INF-1 FROM=S%s/N%s READ--I I- -I/I- : WRITE=-()-(/): NL=l FF=O ;
0 Sample cross reference 6
output
1 [A:YFLADDER4(SAMPLE]
*** Address x0.0 -II-Yl+ x0.1 Cross reference Symbol Comment ***
PAGE 1 STEP NO./NET No.
: S00045/N00009 SOOO88/NOOO20
SOOO49/NOOO12 S00053/N00013 SOOO94/NOOO2 SOOO54/NOOOl2 SO0059/N00015
S00082/N00017
-It-+
YO.0
s00050/N00010 S00077/N00029
S00065/N00017
Double writing S00045/N00009
U-Q-:
RO.0 -Ii-++
SOO128/NOOO62
S00256/N00098
: S00009/N00003
S00022/N00010
S00047/N00019 SOOOO2/N00001
SOOOl2/NOOOO8 S00014/N00009 SOOOl5/NOOOlO S00024/N00012 S00033/N00015 S00045/N00017 S00074/N00032 S00079/N00035
2-24
1. COMMON
OPERATIONS
Environment
l
settings for diagram output - example 4 (sample setting 2 of the CROSSINF.DAT file
file)
Sample setting of the CROSSINF.DAT
GUIDE-Step number NET-INF=O STEP-INF=l FROM=S$s READ=read WRITE=Write NL-0

FF=O :
0 Sample cross reference
output
[A:YFLADDERYSAMPLE] l ** Cross reference
** Step number
PAGE 1
Address Symbol Comment x0.0 : SO0045 SO0049 SO0053 SO0082 SO0088 SO0094 Read
x0.1 Read YO.0

Write
: SO0050 SO0054 SO0059 SO0065 SO0077 Double writing : SO0045 SO0128 SO0256
RO.0
Read Write
: SO0009 SO0012 SO0014 SO0015 SO0022 SO0024 SO0033 SO0045 so0047 so0074 so0079 : soooo2
2-25
III. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE
FUNCTIONS
1. OVERVIEW
1.1 What is a Step Sequence ?
The step sequence is one method for programming the sequence control governed by a
programmable flow chart. Therefore
controller.
This method features
the direct representation as a subprogram,
of the control using the ladder
flow on a method. to
Each block of processing it provides
is described visualized
an easy-to-understand
flow of the processes
and is well-suited
the control of entire processes. For details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual.
FANUC PMC-MODEL
PROGRAMMING
PA1 /PA3/RAl /FWWtA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RB6/RC/RC3/RC4~NB/NB2 MANUAL(LADDER LANGUAGE) B-61863/06
1.2 Programming with the Step Sequence Method

The programming editing function with step sequence method is supported by Fapt ladder, not but by the built-in
on FANUC PMC-MODEL
RB4!RB6/RC4/NB2. or ladder, is used.
Setting a model in Fapt ladder decides which method, step sequence
1.3 A Program Configuration Screen

If a model that supports the step sequence subprograms. To enable this, a subprogram function is selected, a program can be edited in units of
configuration
screen has been added. and editing of a target subprogram.
This screen lists subprograms,
and supports the selection
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE)
RCa(STEP SEQ) [A:yFLYDATAYSFCOl] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
0 LEVEL1 0 i0"'tiUOO1.' 0 0 PO008 0 0 PO021 0 . . . . 0 PO101 0
LEVEL2 PO002 PO009 PO022
0 0 0 0 . .
LEVEL3 PO004 0 PO005 PO014 0 PO015 PO024 0 PO025 . .
0 PO006 0 PO016 0 PO026 . . 0]PO406
0 0
PO007 PO017 q]POO27 . .
PO202
0 JPO304
q]PO405
qJPO407
Sub-program
: PO001
DELETE
NEW
ZOOM
3-l
FUNCTIONS
1.4 The Configration
of a Sequence
Program
A sequence program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit; - The 1st level of ladder
- The 2nd level of ladder - The 3rd level of ladder - Subprograms of ladder sequence - Subprograms of step sequence
LEVEL 1 (LADDER)
LEVEL 2 (LADDER)
LEVEL 3 (LADDER)
Sub
Program Pl (Step Sequence)
Sub
Program P2 (LADDER) 1
ISub
Program P3 (LADDER)
Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)
3-2
FUNCTIONS
1.5 Data Flow
-PC9801*IBWPC/AT Source program Ladder 1st level Ladder 2nd level Ladder 3rd level Subprogram Subprogram Pl P2 7 Mnemonic program Mnemonic conversion A mnemonic program without step sequence
Compilation/Decompilation
Object code
I
L
ROM format program I

t
'71
Input/Output
Input/Output
Input/Output
Transfer data
Floppy cassette
Memory card
4
- RS232C
4
- Handy File. - FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTER
4
- Memory card
-CNC
I
v
1) [PMCI 2) II/O1 3)[HOST]
+
1) [PMCI 2) I I/O1 3)[FDCAS]
v
1) IPMCI 2) II/O1 33) [MCARD] (Boot process also can read the memory card)
The operation of soft key when input/output
3-3
FUNCTIONS
2. SETTING A MODEL
2.1 Operation
(1)
Starting FAPT LADDER At the MS-DOS prompt, key in FLADDER.
(2)
Displaying
the initial screen and other information have been displayed, press any key.
Once the system edition, copyright.
FAPT
LADDER
AOEB-92014502#EN Ver 08.0 (C) 1994.07.22 1991 FANUC LTD
Copyright
END ? (Y:END, 0THER:RESUME MENU)
(3) Displaying
the main menu as shown below, press the < F7 > (SETUP) key.
When the menu screen is displayed
MAIN MENU Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 FE F9 FlO KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY : : : :
:
[A:YFLYDATAYSFCY EDIT PRINT COMPILE DISCOMPILE LINK I/D SETUP MNEMONIC EDIT UTILITY END
: :
:
: :
EDIT
COMPIL
DISCPL
I/D
SETUP
UTILTY
END
3-4
FUNCTIONS
(4) Setting the PMC model To use the step sequence (model which supports function, select PMC-XXX(STEP function) SEQ or PMC-RB6 or PMC-NB2)
the step sequence
from the listed models.
SETUP
RCQ(STEP SEQ)
PMC-RAl PMC-RA2 . . PMC-RB4

.
.
(STEP SEQ)
* PMC-RC4
. .
(STEP SEQ)
Select by cursor and hit [Enter] key. END
COPY
3-5
FUNCTIONS
3. EDITING
This section describes how to create a step sequence program.
3.1 Basic Operation

(1) Displaying the main menu
Press the < Fl > (EDIT) key.
MAIN MENU Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FlO KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY : : : : : : : : : : EDIT PRINT COMPILE DISCOMPILE LINK I/O SETUP MNEMONIC EDIT UTILITY END
[A:YFLYDATAYSFC%
EDIT
COMPIL
DISCPL
I/O
SETUP
UTILTY
END
(2)
Selecting
the program to be edited
Enter the name of the source program to be edited.
SELECT SOURCE PROGRAM
Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC%
SOURCE PROGRAM NAME : TEST
EXEC
END
Press the c Fl > key.
The screen changes,
depending
on the program to be entered.
1)
If a new program name is specified: The model setting screen is displayed. Then, the edit menu is displayed. Re-confirm the selected model.
2)
If the specified selected model:
name
is that of a program
created
for a model
which
differs
from
the
The selected
model is automatically
changed
according
to the specified
program.
Then,
the edit menu is displayed. 3) If the specified name is that of a program created for the selected model:
The edit menu is displayed.
3-6
FUNCTIONS
To return to the main menu, press the < FlO> up to eight alphanumeric characters,
or < ESC>
key.
As the program name, enter
without an extension.
(3) Displaying the editing menu Press the < F2 > (LADDER/STEP
SEQUNCE)
key.
EDIT Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 FlO KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY KEY
RCI(STEP SEQ) : : : :
:
[A: YFL~DATAYsFcY
: :
TITLE LADDER / STEP SEQUENCE SYMBOL h COMMNET MESSAGE I/O MODULE SYSTEM PARAMETER END
1 TITLE ILADSFC ISYMBOL IMESSAG IMODULEISYSPRM 1

I
I I I I
I
I
I
I
I END I
I
(4) Subprogram
configuration
screen screen is displayed as shown below:
The subprogram
configuration
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE)
RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:YFLyDATAYSFCOl] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
0 . . . 0 0
. . 0
LEVEL1 ........... . 0 m;iJ)@ti$., 0 PO008 PO021 0 0

. .
LEVEL2 PO002 PO009 PO022
0 0 0 0
. .
LEVEL3 PO004 0 PO014 0 PO024 0

. .
PO005 PO015 PO025
0 0 0
. .
PO006 PO016 PO026
0 0
. .
PO007 PO017 qJPOO27
PO101
PO202
q]PO304
q ]PO405
q]PO406
q]PO407
Sub-program
: PO001
DELETE
NEW
ZOOM
3-7
FUNCTIONS
Note
1)
The 3rd ladder level can be omitted. If the [ZOOM] key was used screen to nest a program to a certain depth, and if the key,
Note 2)
subprogram
configuration
is displayed
upon a single press of the [MAIN] key was pressed
the editing of the subprograms Such subprograms
for which
the [ZOOM]
is suspended.
are marked with A].
(5)
Step sequence Position
diagram to a program marked with 01, then press the [ZOOM] or <RET> key.
the cursor
The step sequence
editing screen is displayed
as shown below:
DIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE)
,..:.)))):. .... .,:,: (..>:t:i J@J$,
Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
s3
cl Sll
s13
q s21
cl s31
4 (Note 1) Note 1)
The current The entire position screen of the cursor on the screen across is indicated. the screen to consists of 32 elements
and 64 elements
from top to bottom.
The cursor is positioned
any element on the screen.
3-8
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
3.2 Creating a Step Sequence 3.2.1 Creating a subprogram of the step sequence
EDIT(LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE) RCI(STEP SEQ) [A:~FL~DATAfSFCOl] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
0 LEVEL1 0 LEVEL2 ;/$;;-'i:&jflQ~!n ,.. . . . . ]POOO2 .: . . . i........ i,,. 0 PO008 0 PO009 0 ]POO21 0 PO022
. . . .
0 0 0 0
. .
LEVEL3 PO004 0 PO014 0 PO024 0

. .
PO005 PO015 PO025
0 0 0
. .
PO006 PO016 PO026
PO007 PO017 q]POO27

.
0 0
I
Following keys are useful in this screen. Function key : Deleting a subprogram ] : Creating a new subprogram ] : Modifying a subprogram
DELETE
NEW
ZOOM
Other keys [ROLL UP] : Displaying previous screen
[ DELETE] [NEW [ZOOM
[ROLL DOWN] : Displaying
next screen
Meaning of display
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
Edit (LADDER/STEP PMC-RC4 [A: Y FL..
SEQUENCE)
:
RC4(STEP SEQ) [A:%FLYDATAYSFCOl]

FAPT LADDER editing screen The list screen of subprogram Setting a model Current directory
SEQUENCE)
: : :
(STEP SEQ)
I
PROGRAM
PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

: Remarks which is one of the title data
aLEVEL
LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 : : :
q LEVEL2
OLEVEL3 I
The 1st level of ladder The 2nd level of ladder The 3rd level of ladder (In case of PMC-RC4 the 3rd ladder level can be omitted, in case of PMCRB4
the 3rd ladder level does not exist.)
PO001
q]POOO2
a subprogram
PO004
PO005
PO006 0
PO007
Cl
-:
of the ladder of the step sequence
01
a subprogram
3-9
3. THE STEP SEQUENCE FUNCTIONS
(1) Creating a new subprogram Press the [NEW] key.
New program
name ? m
Enter the number of the subprogram
to be created (P200, for example).
Press the [F2 ] key.
(2) Modifying -
a subprogram of the subprogram key. to be modified position (P200, for example), the cursor to P200 then press the then press the
Key in the number [ZOOM] [ZOOM] or <RET>
Alternatively,
or <RET > key.
If a subprogram message
number
marked
with
A ] (P21, for example)
is selected,
the following
is displayed:
Editing
this
subprogram
is not completed. (Yes/No) [Yl 1

from suspended previous editing and edit
Continue to select it 7
To continue session,
the editing
session
using
the results
obtained
press the < RET > key.
To cancel the results of the previous
editing session
the subprogram
from its original state, enter < N >.
3.2.2 Creating a step sequence program

The basics and configuration FANUC PMC-MODEL of the step sequence Supplementary are described Description in the following document: (Ladder Language)
RB4/RC4
of Programming
B-61 863EI05-3
On the step sequence cursor.
screen,
different
soft keys are displayed,
depending
on the position
of the
When the cursor is on the step line, following
softkey menu is displayed.
I
cl
I
cl] s2
:ti;:ili;;$;$
...I
I
0 s20
+cl
La s30
101
01
-+ JHP
FUNC
CHK
ZOOM
3-10
FUNCTIONS
1
1
0 UJI
01
I
I:
Step subprogram Initial step subprogram Block step subprogram Line for link Jump to label
[ tLBL
Label for jump The end of block step
1:
I: I :
] :
I
[
ACHK
I:
] ] ] : : :
[
1
( FUNC
Various functions Grammatical Zooming checking
[ +JMP
( ZOOM
into a subprogram
When the cursor is on the transition
line, following
softkey menu is displayed.
FUNC
CHK
ZOOM
I:
1: I:
Transition
I l[ l==
I : Divergence of selective sequence

Divergence Line for link Convergence Convergence of selective sequence sequence of simultaneous sequence
I I I t[t==
[
[ FUNC [ CHK
I :
1:
I ] ] ]
of simultaneous
:
: : : Various functions Grammatical Zooming checking
[ ZOOM
into a subprogram
(1)
Entering a step Position the cursor to the desired input position, Then, enter a step number and subprogram then press the [Cl] key.
number.
Pressing the [n]
key causes a step to be created, as shown below. assigned.
A free step number is automatically
iii;iij,t~.:.:.~.:.Y::: ~~~
.;:.S
$5
::::!,:i-i_._:~: ..,.:.._
STEP ACTION :. Sl . . . . . :? l-1
JMP
+LBL
-L
FUNC
CHK
ZOOM
The specified
subprogram
number (PlO in this example)
is displayed
below Sl.
3-11
FUNCTIONS
STEP : 81 ACTION : PlO l-l
To change the step number, press the <RET>
key to position the character cursor .? on
STEP and use the [BS] key to change the number.
.:$:f :B~~:.:~ ~~~~:

T;f;y
)::::::,
.:
::::::...:.:.:.:.:.~..~:
.). :.:.:, :.:.: :.
.. ..... :.:.::.: ,,i;;,;i;y::::::::: :>:.. ,... ,.:.:::::::::
STEP : Slg ACTION : PlO l-l
(2) Entering a transition

Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [ + ] key. Enter a subprogram number Press the [ + ] key.
ACTION : .:$
l-2
FUNC CHR
ZOOM
Enter a subprogram number.
I
o)i
,:ilFI:t:~:~::s:~~~~~~
:..:::p::; ;I:,. ,.:
.\: ..
.),.
:.:~~~~~ 3 : .::.::. ....:: j::+ ::~.~:~,~.~::~~~:~,:::~.:,~,.~:i.~

.::.;
,:,
: +
:........, ..:.:::>,. .> ... ... ;,.;.. : ...i.;:; 1:::....::.:.I,., :..
ACTION : $100 l-2
3-12
FUNCTIONS
(3) Divergence
of selective
sequence
Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 --_I key.
FUNC
CHR
ZOOM
Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ 1 -_I key.
(4) Convergence
of selective
sequence key.
Position the cursor to the desired input position and press the [ f -]
ACTION : PlO& 2-4
1 +. I+_Il=zl
It-_lt__l
FUNC
CHK
ZOOM
3-13
x g
u -
z
-
z II II c i -
z II II t -
j_ -
II II + -
II II -_, -
I + -
I + -
+ -
t -
FUNCTIONS
Specifying
a label for jump destination (step line), then press the [LBL] key.
Position the cursor to the desired input position Then, enter a label name.
Press the [+
LBL] key.
LABEL
Ll@;
l-l
FUNC CHR ZOOM
JMP
+LBL
Enter a label name.
STEP : Sl ACTION : PlO l-l
3-15
FUNCTIONS
(8)
Specifying a label jump Position the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [+ JMP] key. Then, enter a label name. Press the [+ JMP) key.
LEBEL :
A...
$$
2-3
JMP
LBL
FUNC
CHK
200?4
Enter a label name.
+- L10
101 s1 I
, q ]s 2
f-r
PlOO PlOO
PlOO
I::,::' :.i,jjj.~:~:i'i.li~:~;i: :;.; ._ .,;::;. '; y<.:.y ;I:;:-"' :i'i.:.:?.i':... &A:itxiO

., :,,; ,:>, ::: ...... .I.:::::i.: ...... .y, .:.:...:.:.:;.:.:.:.:.:.: :~~:~.~:~::...:::::::~::::~:~:~:::::
LEBEL : Llfi: 2-3
3-16
FUNCTIONS
(9)
Deleting an element Position the cursor to the element to be deleted, then press the [DEL] key.
Select
the element
by the <DEL> key and press
the
<return>
key
In the example shown above, two figures (elements) selected. video.
of a selective
branch and transition in reverse
are
Specify the element to be deleted with the narrow cursor, displayed in reverse video, press the [DEL] key.
To position the cursor displayed
To restore the
state shown above, press the (ESC] key.
If the [RETURN] the following
key is pressed in the state shown above, the selective
branch is deleted and
screen is displayed:
3-17
FUNCTIONS
To specify another figure, press the [DEL] key again.
I
I01 Sl
..I
... ,..,....... .
>:..A .. .. .. :
.:..
:::..
... :~l;;;i;~g~. .
.k
.,
Inserting an element Position the cursor to the desired insertion mpty row, press the [INS] key. o create an empty column, press the [SHIFT] and [INS] keys. position, then press the [INS] key. To create an
STEP ACTION
: S2 : p 2 0 0 @$ l-3
3-18
FUNCTIONS
Press the (INS] key.
l-3
Press the [SHIFT]
and [INS] key.
IO1 Sl
c
Pl Cl Sll cl s21
I
STEP : S2 ACTION : PlO2
I
l-3
3-19
FUNCTIONS
(11) Search
_.. .,. ..,::,,... : .. $5:": ;;. t (, ~, :)>>::..,: : >: : :.::.: . . .. ".."."..."~>;.> .:.,.::.:.> z:. .: . .?.... ,.i.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ,., Pl Pll
g$j::$i:.;.:l:li: I-J
q;;..;. = = = = = i= ,, =
....::::. ...:j:::ji(ij:j. ..;:.II:;::: :.:.::: jj ::..:.
SlO
Cl s20 t P21
T2
cl SlO I
Cl s20 I
If the [F8] (FUNC) key is pressed in the state shown above, a pop-up menu is displayed shown below:
as
Fl F2 F3 F4
FS
Search Copy Move Main List cl Sll

I
Y3
Press the [Fl]
cl s21
I
(Search) key.
A pop-up menu is displayed,
as shown below:
Pl
Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Step Action Label symbol Position Top Bottom
3-20
FUNCTIONS
Then, press the (Fl]
(Step) key.
Another
pop-up menu is displayed,
as shown below:
Enter the step number to be searched The system starts searching
for (S20, for example),
then press the < RET > key.
through the part subsequent
to the cursor.
Copying
or moving an element
Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.
Pl
3-21
FUNCTIONS
When the [F8) (FUNC) key is pressed, a pop-up menu is displayed
as shown below:
Fl F2 F3 F4 FS
Search Copy Move mAin List
Press the [F2) (Copy) key.
The system prompts the operator to enter a start point.
ACTION : Specify Start position
l-2
Position the cursor to the desired start point (position 2-3 in the example press the < RET > key.
shown below), then
The system prompts the operator to enter the end point.
It
Pl
,.:: $;;;y;: .gi.lj?
q]S2
Pl
i
,(, ,.:.: ,.,.: ;;::,&T ..:*:... 1 s20
:,:.: .>.::.:::::: ,. ... ...... .._ :: :: :::::.::::::
..:.:.:..q:-: IJ :..:.. ./\. ...:.: ...., ,.,.. : ::::.y:::: ::: .,. ,.:. ::,:;. :: :.,::.:,,. .. :::.; .j,. :.;. .,,.. ,...,i :::::.::::::.;::.:.+:
Pll
+ +
P21
ACTION : Specify End position
2-3
3-22
3.
THE STEP SEQUENCE
FUNCTIONS
Position the cursor to the desired end point (position 3-4 in the example shown below), then press the < RET > key. The system prompts the operator to specify a copy destination.
qlS2
p1 i
;;; ~~~ :~~~~~~:~~~~ I:::iliii:ll:i:li#i:~,::,:~:~:~:~~: ::.. j..:.:...: .....:>:...:.:i\:.: :::.zy :i.~.I_:~~I:I:I:i.i:~~~~~~~~~:~~:~:,,~,~~ ,., :i,i:I:I:I:II:i:II:I:i::I:i6:i: . . ,. . . . ...\. . ..\\ .:. . . . . . . ._.. ,, ., ,,,,,.,,, :j;j;y ;:~~:~,~:~:~:~:~:~:~::::::.,.~~.~::i:~.~r~:~~:::~~:..~, ::;:;:y:;:~:..:::::::::.:.:.:..:.: ._.,. :.:.::;::::::: .. .........:.: . ... .. .y,,: :...::::z::i ,:, :::.:;;:: ::~~~~~::5::iili:~Bi:~:~~:::::~: C. :,;:;i:@!:qgg .; ,,,. <,, ,::I:~;~~ws ~~;~~~:;:,::.;..:,, q.:.: . . . . . . . . . . . . ,.( ,.l,L..i_ :.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:i(.:.,.;.. .,.,.,... :.:.:..,:.:.:.:.:. ;: ..:,, :::;:y:i:::; ,::: ,.,. :,:::,:::::::z:i:: L............. .....:..: :.:.:::::::::::::::::::::::: I:::.::: ,,):,: ::,:,...: .,.y:: i:,., :.:..... ::.:f+;~:::.:.:.::::::.:.:::.:.:.: ..:.. ....:,. + .., c
:z: J::
ACTION : Specify End position
3-4
Position the cursor to the desired copy destination then press the < RET > key. The specified
(position 4-3 in the example shown below),
part is copied.
Pl
ACTION : PlOO
When a part is copied, The S address is not copied. The P address is copied. Assign a free number. change the address.
If required,
3-23
FUNCTIONS
(13) Returning procedure
from the ZOOM destination
to the program configuration screen, displayed
screen (MAIN).
To return to the program configuration below.
when editing was started, follow the subprogram,
The system assumes that the editing of the step sequence key was pressed, is suspended.
from which the [ZOOM] The edited subprogram
is not saved in the source program file.
Press the [F8] (FUNC) key.
_....\\.. ........................ $1:: ::;;g:: :.:;:::y:y:;:~:: _, ,.,.,. .. ,.,_
$Q;
..Y y.*
$.:rii:
1 SlO
~~~~
tpll
Cl s20 i P21
After pressing
the [F8] (FUNC) key
F3 F4
Move
F5
mAin List
rfter pressing
the (F4] (MAIN) key
EDIT(LADDER/STEP
SEQUENCE)
R~~(~TEP PROGRAM:(STEP
SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~) SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
LEVEL1 $@,iip;&#$
LEVEL2 0 ~0002
LEVEL3 0 PO004
pooo5
poooe
p(JoO7
q ~0008
A]~0021 . . 0 ~0101
0 PO009 0 PO022 . b ~0202
0 PO014 0 PO024 . . q JPO304
0 PO015 0 PO025 . . 0JPO405
q PO016
0 PO026 . . c]]PO406
0 .
PO017
q lPOO27
&PO407
3-24
FUNCTIONS
If the subprogram
whose previous
editing session was suspended message is displayed:
(marked with A])
is
selected again for editing, the following
Editing this subprogram is not completed. Continue to select it ? (Yes/No 1 [Yl
To continue Otherwise,
the previous
editing session, press the [RET] key. editing session is cancelled.)
enter N. (The result of the previous
(14)LIST
The list of subprograms edited is displayed. referenced by the stepsequence subprogram that is currently being
Press the (F8] (FUNC) key.
:.:::::.:::::ii::I:i8iiiiiiii i_i:.::~~.::;:.; :~~~~~~~
7====j =
Cl SlO
cl s20
t
....... ..:::...::.:.;.: ........:.:,:.:::.:::.::::::~:;::~::,: .I... ... ....... .. .I + :::,t .:: ~i;::i:::i::i::_:~::.~
Pl
Pll
P21
After pressing the [F8] (FUNC) key
Pl =II=I=t=III Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 Search Copy Move mAin List
After pressing the [F4] (LIST) key
EDIT(LADDER/STEP OJP200 0 0 PO008 PO021 0 0
SEQUENCE)
R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)
PO009 PO022
0 0
PO014 PO024
PO015
q PO025
0 0
PO016 PO026
PO017
q ]POO27
I
3-25
MAIN
CHANGE
ZOOM
FUNCTIONS
Following
keys are useful in this screen.
Function [ MAIN
key ] :Displaying configuration the subprogram screen
Other keys [ROLL UP] : Displaying previous screen
[ROLL DOWN] : Displaying
next screen
[ CHANGE [ ZOOM
] :Creating ] :Modifying
a new subprogram a subprogram
Screen display
q ]P200
I
The subprogram
which is being edited is displayed. numbers for which The subprogram
If the [ZOOM] are arranged the [ZOOM]
key is pressed
to nest the first is
program to a certain depth, the subprogram which they are nested.
from the left in the order in key was pressed
displayed
at the left end.
( 0
PO008
PO009
[I3 PO014
PO015
PO016
PO017
Subprograms following cl cl] (15)Checking : :
referenced
by the subprogram
that is currently
being edited
are listed with the
mark: : Ladder subprogram Step sequence subprogram
the syntax
Press the [CHK] key.
t
j:,...,
Pl
.;:.(.:.:.:.:.~:.~::::::::::,
gqc. :.::.:::,:::I:.:,:,::::....:.
0 ;-,~:il~:~:~~
;,.,; ::~...,.,.:
:.:7 ./.
s1 0
I
0 t s20
:,t-ll~~ Pll
P21
3-26
FUNCTIONS
is satisfactory,
the following
message is displayed:
$."f: "
.:.:.::
~~~~~~~~ I
... . ... . .....
.....
: : : >: :
... .................... .;...::..:.::;: .: ..?..): ..: ..:.:.::::
..................
..
slo
.:.::.:..:. .. .: :.:::j::::::::
:>::z: .::i;i::,i:i::llii;ili:iliiilcy;
2;:s:: ............ ......> ...
. :.:.
....................
...................
Pl
t t
Pll
Check completed
is invalid, the following
message is displayed:
Pl
~11 [Chart
I
Sequence
error
1
I
I
(16)Modifying
I
a subprogram key.
(ZOOM)
Press the [ZOOM]
~~~~~~~l,;~~.~ i= = = = 7= :::::::: :;:;:::::::; ;::: :.:,:g:>::;:;:i:

~~:~~~~di 0
Pl SlO
. ::.:i.:.:.:::::+ :. .2;. t :; :.... ::,:::.::.:: : :;$,.,,,,,;,:., .jjj,::jjj:,:~~g::j:~::
cl s20
t
Pll
P21
cl SlO Y2
I
Cl s20
I
3 - 27
FUNCTIONS
When the [ZOOM]
key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides
the type of subprogram
which is to be edited.
L
Figure 0 101 01 t
Meaning Step sequence
of the figure
Subprogram
to be edited
subprogram subprogram subprogram
Ladder subprogram Ladder subprogram Step S8qU8nC8 subprogram Ladder subprogram
Initial step sequence block step sequence Transition
(17)End of modifying Press the [ESC] key.
Fl F2 F3 F4 F5
Save(update) Quit Edit save Rename, Optimize
h quit
h quit
Menus
Menu
Save Quit Edit Rename optimize
I IEnd
End
Editing
Result of editing
Display
IOptimized
Discarded Continued Updated Optimized and continued Not optimized Optimized Optimized
Continue End Continue
3-28
Z LJJ CL
APPENDIX
1 DATA TRANSFER
CABLES
APPENDIX
1 DATA TRANSFER
CABLES
Use the cables below to transfer data from a PC to a CNC, ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer), or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).
1.
For PC9801 PC980 1 25pin male connector On-line cable 25pin male connector CNC, ROM writer, or P-G
2.
For IBM PC/AT IBM PC/AT g-pin female connector 25pin male connector 25pin female connector IBM PC/AT cable CNC, ROM writer, or P-G On-line cable
II 25-pin male connector
3.
For IBM PS/2 IBM PSI2 25-pin female connector 25-pin male connector 25-pin female connector IBM PS/2 cable On-line cable
25-pin male connector 1 CNC, ROM writer, or P-G
Al-l
APPENDIX
1 DATA TRANSFER
CABLES
On-line
cable
(AOSB-0031-K8Ol/K802)
2 SD RD 4
2 SD RD 4 RS 5 I cs ER DR
RS
25dn male connector I cs ER DR 5
25-pin male connector
CD
ZI 7
E 7
CD SG
SG
1 1
FG
FG
IBM PC/AT cable
1 CD 2 RD 3 SD g-Din female connector 4 ER 5
8 CD 3 RD 2 SD 20 ER 7 SG 6 DR 4 RS 5 cs 22 Cl 25-pin female connector
SG
6 DR 7 RS 8
cs
9
Cl
Al-2
A!
P
APPENDIX
2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-UM WITH RAM
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING RAM 1. GENERAL

This appendix describes the procedure for operating
THE PMC-L/M WITH
the PMC-L using built-in
RAM or the PMC-M
using the optional
RAM board.
It also describes
related notes.
2.
HARDWARE
CONFIGURATION
(1) PMC-L
No extra hardware is needed. with the ROM and without The PMC-L is operated with ROM only when the PMC-L is provided the Ladder Edit Cassette (printed circuit board).
(2) PMC-M
The optional RAM board is necessary. It is also necessary OEl to mount the Ladder Edit Cassette and OE2, on the memory board. or to mount ROMs for the PMC-M on the ROM sockets,
Mount the PMC-M ROMs on the sockets as shown below.
ROM number OF1 OF1 -_) +
Socket location on the memory card OEl OEl
Memory card (A16B-1212-0210)
(Note 1) When the PMC-M is provided with the ROM board, it is operated with ROM whether
the Ladder Edit Cassette is mounted or not. using the Ladder Edit Cassette on the PMC-M stored
(Note 2) When a ladder program is modified

provided in the ROM board, and the modified DGNOS ladder diagram display
with the ROM board, the PMC-M executes
the original
ladder program
ladder program is displayed function. The program
on the screen with the executed and the
being
program being displayed
are different.
A2-1
APPENDIX 2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM
3.
RAM OPERATION
shown below to perform the RAM operation.
Follow the flowchart
(1) PMC-L
Yes
Contents of the backup RAM
No
Is the EPROM
Parameter for displaying the PMC load select screen
Yes
(Note) Ladder programs stored in the EPROM are copied to the RAM.
=I pk
(see Section 4)
A2-2
APPENDIX
2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM
(2) PMC-M
Contents of the backup RAM

I
Yes
Is the EPROM ROM operation No (Note) Ladder programs stored in the EPROM on the ROM board are copied to the RAM.
Parameter for displaying the PMC load select screen
Yes
PMC LOADING ADDRESS:OOOOH DATA: OOH
==k
RAM
(Note) Transferring ladder programs from the FAPT LADDER is needed. RAM contents are deleted when the power is turned off.
PMC load select screen i (see Section 4)
AZ-3
APPENDIX
2 FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM
(3) Notes on RAM operation Follow the description
in the PMC-M
below.
@ When a ladder oroaram sent from the FAPT LADDER is executed Mount memory the ROMs board. for the PMC-M into the sockets usually
on RAM ooeration on the that is that
used for the PMC-L management software
Write data into the ROM using the PMC-M as that used for transferring
the same version only contains
a ladder program.
A ladder program
the END code (SUBl,
SUB2, and SUB48) can be used. a program which can
When a ladder program is sent from a ROM or a floppy disk that contains be executed, follow the description above.
When a ladder oroctram chanaed RAM ooeration Merhod 7: Mount the
or created usina the Ladder Edit Cassette
is executed
on
Edit Cassette.
The
PMC-M
management
software
in the
Edit
Cassette executes Mefhod 2: Mount sockets
the ladder program. Also mount the ROMs for the PMC-M board. The into the
the Edit Cassette. usually used
for the
PMC-L
on the memory
PMC-M
management
software in the ROM executes
the ladder program.
To change above.
a ladder
program
which
is executed
on RAM
operation,
follow
the description
If an attempt
is made to perform
RAM operation
in conditions
other
than those
described
above, ROM parity alarm 604 is issued. operation.
Satisfy the above conditions
first.
Then perform RAM
A2-4
APPENDIX
FUNCTION FOR OPERATING THE PMC-UM WITH RAM
4.
PMC LOAD SELECT SCREEN

on hardware configuration.
The PMC load select screen shown below varies depending
When the Edit Cassette is not mounted Item (5) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.
When the PMC-L is not provided When the PMC-M
with ROMs on the sockets; with ROMs on the sockets nor the ROM board is not
is not provided
mounted on the PMC-M; Item (2) in Fig. 4 is not displayed.
PMC LOAD SELECT ( 1) LOAD FROM I/O (2) LOAD FROM EROM (3) RUN (4) RUN WITHOUT PMC (5) EDIT LADDER PUSH l-5 KEY :
Fig. 4
Whether
the PMC load select screen is displayed CNC parameter.
or not is determined
by the setting of DPCRAM,
a bit of the following
NO.71
I #7
DPCRAM #6 #5 #4 #3 #2
I #l #O
DPCRAM
1: 0:
The PMC load select screen is not displayed. The PMC load select screen is displayed.
A2-5
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES 1. MAIN MENU/SETTINGS

Message xxx executable Hit any key! file not found. Description and action to be taken
Executable file xxx does not exist in the system directory. System directory is not specified in the declaration made by environment variable PATH. Main memory is insufficient. Arrange setup so that sufficient main memory can be acquired (500 KB or more). Error occurred while loading executable file xxx.
Insufficient memory. Hit any key!
xxx process error. xxx file l/O error.
Hit any key!
I/O error for the xxx file occurred during system setup for the type of machine being used. The executable file of compiler Install the system again. was not found.
Not found I_COxxx.EXE.
Not found FLxxx.TBL.
No system setup file was found. There is no machine type setting file that can be used by the compiler. install the system again.
A3-1
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
2.
ERRORS AT [LIST] COMMAND

Message (compilation & printer) FILE DATA Meaning and Dealing
MAKING WRITING
DATA TABLE SELECTED
Data table for target program list is making. When source program list screen exit, writing selected files into P INTERF.DAT. There is no P INTERF.DAT in current directory.
OPEN ERROR P_INTERF.DAT HIT ANY KEY... READ ERROR P_INTERF.DAT HIT ANY KEY... WRITE ERROR P HIT ANY KEY... NOT ENOUGH KEY... FILE ALREADY KEY... MEMORY. HIT ANY INTERF.DAT
Reading error about P INTERF.DAT.
Writing error about P INTERF.DAT.
Memory is not sufficient screen.
for source program list
SELECT.
HIT ANY
- The number of selected
file is out of range.
NOT BE SELECTED
FILE, YET.
When any file are not selected as target file, you cant move the cursor to target file list screen. Specified strings is not found. (Search for file name) Specified strings is not found. (Search for PMC model) files
NOT FOUND IN CURRENT DIRECTORY. HIT ANY KEY... NOT FOUND SPECIFIED HIT ANY KEY... STRINGS.
NOT MODIFIED EXTEND, ALREADY SELECTED FILES. HIT ANY KEY... ABSOLUTE PATH MUST BE SPECIFIED. HIT ANY KEY... INPUT ERROR DIRECTORY L-IIT ANY KEY. NAME.
- You cant change the extension, when selected are exist in select file list screen. - Absolute path must be specified, [DRIVE ] command. with using
Specified directory name is not found, with using [DRIVE] command.
A3-2
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
3.
EDITING (SOURCE PROGRAM SELECTION)

Message Description and action to be taken
Insufficient
memory.
There is not sufficient main memory for loading an executable file. An area of 500 KB or more is required. Disk space was used up during file l/O. System setup file xxx does not exist in the system directory. Software management system directory. file xxx does not exist in the
nsufficient
disk space.
\lot found xxx Set-up file.
\lot found xxx PMC-OS file.
(xx file I/O error.
I/O error occurred for file xxx during creation of a source program file. Invalid characters appear in the name, xxx, of the input source program file. Machine type for the input program and the machine type for the system (common table file) do not agree. Perform proper system setup for the type of machine being used. Neither the input program name nor the output program name were specified when a source program name was specified. File already exists with the name specified for the output program. To overwrite this file, enter 3. To cancel, enter N. Specified input/output program name does not exist. A new file is being created. Specify an output program name. Names of the input program and output program do not agree and the input program does not exist. Symbol and comment contain error(s). data in input program xxx
llegal xxx Source-program
name.
inachine Kind And Input Program Not >onsistency! PMC series is xxx.
lease Appoint Program Name
Output Program Already Exist! All Right? (Y/N)
nake New Source Program
lease Appoint Output Program Name Ippointed Input Program Not Exist
xx Symbol & Comment
data broken.
A3-3
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
3.1 Ladder Diagram
Editing
Message ILLEGAL OPERATION -
Description
and action to be taken
Only the RETURN key was pressed. Address data input is incorrect. Editing is not being performed within the limits when creating function instructions. Function instructions cannot be created while the cursor is on the right-hand side. Editing buffer was exceeded during net creation.
EDIT BUFFER OVER 70LINE/l NET OVER LARGE NET APPEARED 256STEP/l MNEMONIC NET OVER BUFFER OVER
Editing cannot be continued due to the large size of nets being edited. Make nets smaller.
Attempt was made to make a LADDER program of more than 21,840 (24,000 when an EMS board is used) steps. Too many items in data table Non-numeric character(s) were specified for [COPY], [INSLIN], ]C-UP], or [C-DOWN]. Input address was specified in a coil. Data table contains invalid character(s). Relay or coil address is not specified. Relay or coil is required. Horizontal lines in LADDER diagram are unconnected. Vertical lines in LADDER diagram are incorrect. Function instruction parameters have not been set.
SET COUNT OVER INPUT INVALID
ADDRESS
BIT NOTHING
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL
VERTICAL ARAMETER -ADDER
LINE ILLEGAL NOTHING
ILLEGAL
LADDER diagram is incorrect. Incorrect net found when [COPY][MOVE] was specified. Error found on the screen during a search beyond the screen. Unnecessary An incorrect relay or coil exists. net was found.
ERROR NET FOUND
3ELAY OR COIL FORBIT LEASE COMPLETE NET
LLEGAL NETS CLEARED
Net which did not match the specified level of the stack was found and deleted from the LADDER program which was read in. Specified search. address was not found during address
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING
-UNCTION
NOT FOUND
Specified function function instruction
instruction search.
was not found
during
A3-4
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Message STACK REGISTER OVER (8bit) ERR -
Description
There are 9 or more continuous stacks in the LADDER program which was read in. There is not enough data area for the specified Disk space insufficient Error occurred Error occurred during writing file.
NOT EXIST APPOINT FILE NOT READ DISK SPACE NOTHING FILE NOT WRITE INSUFFICIENT KEY!
DATA SIZE
when reading data from a file. when writing data to a file.
MEMORY.
HIT ANY
- Area to be used in editing could not be acquired.
3.2 Other Editing (Applicable to Title, Message, and Comment, and I/O Module Editing)
System Parameter,
Symbol
Message File Read Error! File Write Error! File I/O Error! Hit Any Key Hit any Key -
Description
File could not be read. File could not be written. File I/O error occurred. Work area for message editing could not be acquired due to insufficient memory. Symbol data already exists that is identical symbol data that was input. Nonexistent address was specified. data was to
Hit Any Key
Not Enough Space
Same Symbol Data Exist
No Definition
Address Appointed
Data Save Error
Error occurred when symbol or comment being registered in the work area.
Not Found Data Error
Required data could not be found during symbol data lookup. There is an input error in the l/O module settings. There is an error in the group that was input. There is an error in the base that was input. There is an error in the slot that was input. There is an error in the ID code that was input. Undefined Specified search. key was specified. address could not be found during
Input Data Invalid Appointed Appointed Appointed Appointed group Not Exist Base Not Exist Slot Not Exist ID Code Not Exist
Input Key Not Used Invalid Address Appoint
Invalid Value
Error -
Out-of-bound value was input. Data other than a numeric value was input. Addresses panel. have not been set at the operation
Operate Panel Address
A3-5
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
4.
PRINTER
Message Description and action to be taken
DATA INPUT ERROR
There is an error in the data input in the setup screens such as the type selection screen for diagram output. Nonexistent file name was entered in the source program selection screen. Machine type codes in the common the management file do not agree. table file and
NOT FIND FILE
DIFFERENT
MACHINE
CODE.
WRITE ERROR COMONDAT.TBL. HIT ANY KEY... NOT EXIST AMROFTRP.DAT. HIT ANY KEY... WRITE ERROR AMROFTRP.DAT. HIT ANY KEY... DATA INVALID AMROFTRP.DAT. HIT ANY KEY... NOT ENOUGH MEMORY. HIT ANY KEY... FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY...
Error occurred when a program name was written to the common table file. AMROFTRP.DAT exist. (print format data file) does not
Error occurred when the paper size was written to AMROFTRP.DAT. Data in AMROFTRP.DAT system program. is incorrect. Reinstall the
Tried to acquire memory but there was no memory area of a sufficient size. There is no title file or system parameter file. Either symbol or comment file could not be found during LADDER diagram printing or cross-reference printing. Existing file could not be read in. [BREAK] key was pressed during printing.
CHANCEL PRINTER HIT ANY KEY... SEL SWITCH OFF DATA INVALID xxxxxxxX. HIT ANY KEY... OPEN ERROR OUTPUT HIT ANY KEY... FILE. OUTPUT. -
SEL button of the printer is off. Error occurred data file.
Turn it on.
during reading of the print format
Error occurred during opening of output file. is not sufficient space on the disk. No output file is specified file.
There
OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED. HIT ANY KEY... OUTPUT FILE ALREADY OVER WRITE (YIN) WRITE ERROR OUTPUT HIT ANY KEY... CANCEL FILE OUTPUT. HIT ANY KEY... SYMBOL & COMMENT DATA BROKEN. HIT ANY KEY... EXIST.
in the print format data
File exists with the same name as the output file. Enter Y to overwrite or N to cancel output. Error occurred during writing to the output file. There is not sufficient space on the disk. [BREAK] key was pressed during file output.
FILE.
Symbol and comment
data files are invalid.
A3-6
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
5. COMPILATION,
Message Error title 80
DECOMPILATION,
AND LINKING
Description and action to be taken by PMC was found
Character code not permitted during title compilation.
Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER). Proceed to discompile using NO
System parameter that specifies use of the operation panel was specified and there was an invalid address specified in the external DI (KEY data) address, external DO (LED) address, PMC image address (DI), or PMC image address (DO). This system parameter is forcibly turned off and processing is continued (PMC-R series only). Size of a message exceeded the system. Character code not permitted during message compilation. the maximum size for
Error message 60
Error message 61
by PMC was found
Error symbol/comment
70
During compilation, the size of a symbol or comment exceeded the maximum size for the system. During compilation, when the message area was extended, symbol and comment data overflowed the permitted ROM size. Character code not permitted during symbol compilation. Character code not permitted during comment compilation. by PMC was found
71
72
73
by PMC was found
Error ladder 40 Error end 2
During LADDER compilation, the size of the LADDER program exceeded the maximum size for the system. During LADDER compilation, when the symbol and comment area was extended, the LADDER program overflowed the permitted ROM size.
Error ladder 41
Error ladder 42 Error end 2
Invalid intermediate LADDER code was found during LADDER compilation. - Invalid LADDER object was found during LADDER decompilation. There is an invalid intermediate intermediate code file. There are no intermediate There is no #LA file. code in the
Error ladder 48
Error end 25
codes for the LADDER.
Error end 3 Error end 4
Number of partition codes exceeded
99.
Execution time for the first level ladder exceeds the PMC default value or the time set in the system parameter.
A3-7
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Message Error end 17 -
Description
END2 was found before END1 or END1 was not found before the LADDER program ended. END3 was found before END2 or END2 was not found before the LADDER program ended. END3 was not found before the LADDER program ended. (Does not include third level ommission mode.) There is more than one ENDl. There is more than one END2. There is LADDER program code following END1 exists in common END2 exists in common END3 exists in common control mode. control mode. control mode. END3
Error end 18
Error end 19
Error end 20 Error end 21 Error end 24 Error end 5 Error end 6 Error end 7 Error end 11 Error end 12 Error end 13 Error end 8 Error end 9
END1 exists in jump control mode. END2 exists in jump control mode. END3 exists in jump control COM exists in common mode.
control mode.
COME exists in common control mode in which the number of coils is specified. COME exists outside of common JMP exists in jump control mode. JMPE exists in jump control mode in which the number of coils is specified. JMPE exists outside of jump control mode. WRT or WRT.NOT function instruction WRT.NOT. does not exist following that requires WRT or a control mode.
Error end 10 Error end 14 Error end 15
Error end 16 Error end 27
Uarning end 29
Number of coils was specified in a machine type for which the number of JMP coils cannot be specified. The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE specification mode) and processing is continued. Number of coils was specified in a machine type for which the number of COM coils cannot be specified. The parameter is forcibly set to 0 (JMPE specification mode) and processing is continued.
Narning end 30
A3-8
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Message Error link 90 Error link 92 -
Description
During linking, SO record was not found before the end of the load module. Different S record exists before the SO record.
During linking, the value for the record length area in the S2 record was less than 4. - S record other than SO, S2, S8, or S9 was found. - No S8 or S9 record was found before the end of the load module. During linking, an attempt was made to load a load module into an area other than the specified address area. No source program was specified decompilation. for compilation or
irror link 93
\lot appoint source program name
riot appoint ROM format file name
ROM format file name was not specified compilation, decompilation or linking. No load module file name was specified
for
Jot appoint load module file name Iut of memory
for linking.
- Work area required for processing cannot be acquired. This occurs because a device driver which requires a large amount of memory is resident, because data is too large, or for some similar reason. Not enough space is available on disk for file creation during compilation, decompilation or linking. Name specified for ROM format file during compilation already exists.
Jot enough space
:ile already exist ?enewal (Y/N)? rogram already exist ?enewal (Y/N)? qead error
- #CN file of the source program specified for decompilation already exists. #CN or #PA file of the source program specified compilation does not exist. Some sort of disk l/O error occurred. for
Iead error
lead error -
ROM format file specified for decompilation or linking does not exist. Machine type of the ROM format file specified for decompilation differs from the machine type specified in the machine type setting. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Load module file specified for linking does not exist. Some sort of disk l/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.
Vrite error Vrite error
A3-9
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Message (System parameter) Read error
Description
- Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) When no #PA file exists for the specified source program, the following message is displayed. Cannot read source program j-l-j-\. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #TA file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #IO file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #ME file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #SY file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #Cl file exists for the specified source program. - Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. (Note) Error termination does not occur even if no #LA file exists for the specified source program.
(Title) Read error
(I/O module)
Read error
(Message)
Read error
Symbol)
Read error
Comment)
Read error
:Ladder) Read error
System parameter) :Title) Write error
Write error
Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk t/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred. Some sort of disk I/O error occurred.
I/O module) Write error Message) Write error
Symbol) Write error Comment) Write error
Ladder) Write error EXECUTING
Time-consuming processing is being performed during compilation, decompilation, or linking. (Note) This is not an error message.
A3-10
APPENDIX 3 ERROR MESSAGES
6.
COMPILE ERRORS
two basic groups:
Compile errors can be divided into the following
Error:Processing
is stopped because of a fatal error.
The processing
can not be continued
unless the cause of the error has been removed.
Warning: Processing The processing
of a subprogram
for which a warning is output is stopped. is continued.
of other subprograms
6.1 Path O/warning

001 - Editing sub-program (Cause) has not completed ( Pn ) (Pn.$SJ) has not been completed.
The editing of a subprogram
002
- Multiple (Cause)
sub-program
with same number exist ( Pn ) program have identical numbers.
A ladder program and step sequence
003
. The title data which could not be display on the CNC was replaced with space code (Cause) The title data contains for example). a code which cannot be processed (a Japanese code,
004
* Illegal OP.PANEL( (Cause) Although
PARAMETER
). Proceed to discompile
using NO.
the system parameter
for the use of the FO machine operatorspanel
is set to YES, the DI/DO address data is not specified.
6.2 Path O/error/password 005

* Verification (Cause) error. is invalid.
The password
006
* This word can not be used as password.Try (Cause) (Action) The entered password Enter another password. is not valid.
another word.
007
* Only alphabetical (Cause)
and numerical
characters
are allowed.
A non-alphanumeric
character
is specified.
6.3 Path O/error/others

008 - Not appoint source program. (Cause) No source program name is specified.
009
* Not appoint ROM format file name. (Cause) No ROM file name is specified.
A3-11
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
010
- Not enough disk space. (Cause) There is insufficient free space on the disk.
011
- Out of memory. (Cause) There is insufficient free space in memory.
012
* xxx Source-Program (Cause)
name illegal.
The source program name is invalid.
013
- xxx file not found. (Cause) An installation error may have occurred. Retry the installation.
014
* xxx read error. (Cause) The source program may have been damaged or destroyed.
015
* xxx write error. (Cause) A write error occurred, the cause is not known.
016
-xxx file already exist. (Cause) A ROM file having the same name exists. (warning)
017
* xxx Source-program (Cause)
not found.
The xxx source program cannot be found.
018
- xxx(System (Cause)
parameter)
read error. data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.
The system parameter
019
* xxx(Title) (Cause)
read error. The title data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.
020
* xxx(V0 module) read error. (Cause) The I/O module data of xxx may have been damaged or destroyed.
6.4 Path l/warning

001 - Not found Sub-program. (Cause) An empty file was compiled.
002
* Sub-program (Cause)
number is different
from Source-program.
The specified
program number does not agree with a stored programnumber.
003
* There is no SP instruction (Cause) The specified Alternatively,
at the head of the subprogram. does not begin with the SP instruction. file has been damaged or destroyed.
subprogram
the data of the specified
A3-12
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
004
* SP instruction (Cause)
was detected
in the subprogram.
Data was already present before SP instruction.
005
* There is no SPE instruction (Cause) Data remained
at the bottom of the subprogram.
after SPE instruction.
006
- There is an undefined (Cause)
instruction. instruction is stored.
A code of other than a step sequence
007
* Specified (Cause)
value for a parameter The parameter
of the xxxx instruction
is outside the range. range.
of the xxxx instruction
falls outside the predetermined
008
* An illegal program number is specified (Cause) The program number specified predetermined range.
for the xxxx instruction. for the xxxx instruction falls outside the
009
- An illegal label number is specifed for the xxxx instruction. (Cause) The label number specified predetermined range. for the xxxx instruction falls outside the
010
- The label of xxxx is used twice or more. (Cause) A label number is duplicated within a single subprogram.
011
* The number of label exceeds (Cause)
the limit. number of labels that can be
An attempt was made to exceed the maximum defined in a single subprogram.
012
* Illegal DSTEP (Cause)
instruction
was detected, is not defined. Alternatively, the definition of the DSTEP
The DLBL instruction instruction
is duplicated.
013
* LADDER execution (Cause) (Action)
time at the 1st level is too large. time of the first level exceeds the predetermined limit.
The overall execution
Reduce the size of the program of the first level. . is other
014
* The coil number specification (Cause) The parameter than 0. (Action)
of JMP instruction
is not allowed.
of the JMP instruction
(number of coils to be jumped)
Specify 0 for the parameter.
015
- The coil number specification (Cause) The parameter other than 0. (Action)
of COM instruction
is not allowed. (number of coils to be controlled) is
of the COM instruction
Specify 0 for the parameter.
A3-13
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
016
* There is no LADDER program. (Cause) (Action) The level 3/subprogram Add an END3 or SPSPE is empty. instruction.
017
- The symbol data which could not be displayed code. (Cause) The symbol contains
on the CNC was replaced with space
a code other than 20H to 7EH or OAH.
018
- The comment code. (Cause)
data which could not be displayed
The comment
contains
019
* The message data which could not be displayed code. (Cause) The message contains
6.5 Path l/error

020 * Not found FLCOMMON.MSG (Cause) An installation file. Retry the installation.
error may have occurred.
021
- Not found FLCOSTEP.MSG (Cause) An installation
file. Retry the installation.
error may have occurred.
022
- Not found FLxxxxx.TBL (Cause) An installation
Set-up file. error may have occurred. Retry the installation.
023
* FLxxxxx.TBL (Cause)
Set-up file broken. error may have occurred. Retry the installation.
An installation
024
* Insufficient (Cause)
disk space. There is insufficient to the file. free space on the disk, preventing data from being output
(Action)
Delete any unnecessary
data from the disk.
025
* LADDER program exists beyond END instruction. (Cause) A program is specified after the END instruction.
026
the limit. the limit (up to 256 for each
The number of labels used exceeds level/subprogram).
027
- There is no label of Lxxxx. (Cause) (Action) The jump destination label for the JMPB instruction is not defined.
Define the label with the LBL instruction.
A3-14
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
028
- The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more. (Cause) The definition of the label is duplicated.
029
* There is no END1 instruction. (Cause) A program of level 1 does not end with an END1 instruction.
030
* There is no END2 instruction. (Cause) A program of level 2 does not end with an END2 instruction.
031
- There is no END3 instruction. (Cause) A program of level 3 does not end with an END3 instruction.
032
* There is no LADDER program. (Cause) The program of level 1 or 2 is empty.
033
* There is no SP instruction (Cause)
at the head of the program. of a subprogram is not SP.
The first instruction
034
. Illegal SPE instruction (Cause)
was detected. is not preceded by the SP instruction.
The SPE instruction
035
- LADDER program exists beyond END1 instruction. (Cause) Within level 1, a program is specified after the END1 instruction.
036
037
* LADDER program exists beyond SPE instruction. (Cause) In a subprogram, a program is specified after the SPE instruction.
038
* END1 instruction (Cause)
cannot be used excluding
the 1st level. was attempted within level 2 or 3.
The use of the END1 instruction
039
. END2 instruction (Cause)
the 2nd level. was attempted within level 1 or 3.
040
the 3rd level. was attempted within level 1 or 2.
041
* END instruction (Cause)
cannot be used. was attempted within level 1.
The use of the END instruction
042
* Program number is different (Cause) The subprogram parameter
from program name. in the
file number does not agree with the number specified
of the SP instruction.
A3-15
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
043
- The size of LADDER program is too large. (Cause) (Action) The object size of the ladder program exceeds Reduce the size of the ladder program. the predetermined limit.
044
* The range controled (Cause)
by COM instruction
is beyond END1 instruction. before the COME instruction.
An END1 instruction
was encountered
045
by COM instruction
An END2 instruction
was encountered
046
by COM instruction
An END3 instruction
was encountered
047
- COM instruction (Cause) (Action)
was detected
in the COM mode. before the COME instruction. then restart control with the
A COM instruction Terminate
was encountered
control with the COME instruction,
COM instruction. 048
- Illegal COME instruction (Cause)
was detected. cannot be found before the COME instruction.
The COM instruction
049
* The destination (Cause)
of JMP instruction
is beyond END1 instruction. before the JMPE instruction.
An END1 instruction
was encountered
050
. The destination (Cause)
of JMP instruction
is beyond END2 instruction. before the JMPE instruction.
An END2 instruction
was encountered
051
- The destination (Cause)
of JMP instruction
is beyond
END3 instruction. before the JMPE instruction.
An END3 instruction
was encountered
052
* JMP instruction (Cause) (Action)
was detected
in the JMP mode. before the JMPE instruction. then restart control with the JMP
A JMP instruction Terminate instruction.
was encountered
control with the JMPE instruction,
053
* Illegal JMPE instruction (Cause)
was detected. cannot be found before the JMPE instruction.
The JMP instruction
054
055
* LADDER program is broken. (Cause) No instructions can be recoonized.
A3-16
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
056
* There is no coil in the functional (Cause) No output instruction output.
instruction is specified
which needs the coil. after a functional instruction which requires
057
can not be used in the main program. was attempted within the main program.
The use of the SP instruction
058
. SPE instruction (Cause)
can not be used in the main program. was attempted within the main program.
The use of the SPE instruction
059
can not be used in the subprogram. was attempted within a subprogram.
060
061
- END3 instruction (Cause)
062
* Specified (Cause)
value for a parameter instruction.
of the functional
instruction
is outside the range. of a functional
An illegal value has been specified
for the parameter
063
* An illegal program number is specified (Cause)
for the CALL instruction. for the parameter of the CALL
A non-P address has been specified instruction.
064
An illegal program number is specified (Cause)
for the CALLU instruction. for the parameter of the CALLU
A non-P address has been specified instruction.
065
. An illegal program number is specified (Cause)
for the SP instruction. for the parameter of the SP instruction.
A non-P address has been specified
066
. There is an undefined (Cause)
instruction. instruction which is not
An attempt was made to use a basic or functional supported by the selected model.
067
* There is no SPE instruction (Cause) A subprogram
at the bottom of the subprogram.
does not end with the SPE instruction. in the subprogram. was encountered before an SPE instruction.
068
was detected
An SP instruction
069
by COM instruction
is beyond SPE instruction. before a COME instruction.
An SPE instruction
was encountered
A3-17
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
070
of JMP instruction
is beyond SPE instruction. before a JMPE instruction.
An SPE instruction
was encountered
071
* CALL instruction (Cause)
The use of the CALL instruction
072
* CALLU instruction (Cause)
The use of the CALLU instruction
073
. The range controled (Cause)
by COM instruction
is beyond END instruction. before a COME instruction.
An END instruction
was encountered
074
of JMP instruction
is beyond END instruction. before a JMPE instruction.
An END instruction
was encountered
075
by COM instruction
is beyond SP instruction. before a COME instruction.
An SP instruction
was encountered
076
of JMP instruction
is beyond SP instruction. before a JMPE instruction.
An SP instruction
was encountered
077
- The range controled (Cause)
by COM instruction
is beyond CALL instruction. before a COME instruction.
A CALL instruction
was encountered
078
. The range controled (Cause)
by COM instruction
is beyond CALLU instruction. before a COME instruction.
A CALLU instruction
was encountered
079
of JMPB instruction
is beyond COM instruction. the JMPB instruction of common from the outside to the
An attempt was made to execute
inside, or from the inside to the outside,
line control.
080
* JMPC instruction (Cause)
cannot be used in the main program. was attempted within the main program.
The use of the JMPC instruction
081
. An illegal label number is specified (Cause)
for the JMPB instruction. as the parameter of the JMPB
A non-L address has been specified instruction.
082
* An illegal label number is specified (Cause)
for the LBL instruction. as the parameter of the LBL instruction.
A non-L address has been specified
083
- An illegal label number is specified (Cause)
for the JMPC instruction. as the parameter of the JMPC
A non-L address has been specified instruction.
A3-18
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
6.6Path 2/warning
001 * Unreferenced (Cause) subprogram Pxxxx. is
A subprogram encountered.
which is not called by a CALL or CALLU instruction
6.7 Path 2/error

002 * Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment (Cause) The total size of the message, predetermined limit. )
symbol, and comment data exceeds the
003
* Data too large. ( ladder + step sequence (Cause) predetermined limit.
) data exceeds the
The total size of the ladder and step sequence
004
- Data too large. ( message + symbol + comment + ladder + step sequence (Cause) The total size of the message, data exceeds the predetermined symbol, comment, limit.
ladder, and step sequence
005
the limit. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA
The total number of labels used within LEVELl, the predetermined limit.
LEVEL2, or LEVEL3 exceeds
006
* The label of Lxxxx is used twice or more. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA (Cause) An identical or LEVELB. L address is specified
) LEVEL2,
for two or more labels in LEVELl,
007
* Program exists beyond END inctruction. (Cause) A program including
( Pxxx.#LA
) by another program.
an END instruction
is followed
008
- There is no label of Lxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA (Cause) The destination
label of JMPC cannot be found in LEVEL2.#LA.
009
* The label of Lxxxx exists in the COM mode. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA (Cause) The destination label of JMPC is found between
COM and COME.
010
- The label of Lxxxx to refer exists in another level. ( xxxx net in Pxxxx.#LA (Cause) The destination label of JMPC is found in LEVELl.#LA
or LEVEL3.#LA.
011
- There is no subprogram (Cause) The subprogram
Pxxxx. ( xxxx net in LEVELx.#LA
to be called by CALL or CALLU cannot be found or is empty.
A3-19
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
7. INPUT AND OUTPUT

Message INVALID RECEIVE DATA TIME OUT ERROR Description and action to be taken
Data other than IS0 codes was sent. During reception processing, a command was sent from the PC, but there was no response within a certain period of time. Confirm for the receiving side that the power is on, settings are correct, cables are properly connected, parameters (baud rate and stop bits) are correct, and that CONFIG.SYS is correct. No xxx.DAT files exist in the directory containing FAPT LADDER. Install the system again. Specified ROM format file does not exist on the disk [write and verification for the ROM writer, download and comparison for the PMC]. Specified file already exists [read operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC]. To overwrite, enter Y. To change the name of the file, enter N. There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified ROM format file [write operation for the ROM writer]. There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified ROM format file [download for the PMC]. To download in this state, enter Y. To cancel, enter N. There is an error in the ROM parity of the specified ROM format file [read operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC). No data was received during transmission [read operation for the ROM writer, upload for the PMC]. Press the break key to interrupt processing, then check cable connections and the power supply, etc. of the sending side.
xxxx.DAT file format error. 4it any key VOT EXIST APPOINT =lLE ROM FORM
ALREADY EXIST FILE! 3JPERSCRlPTlON REAL FILE? (Y/N)
3OW PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT -ILE
3OM PARITY WARNING OF 4PPOINT FILE. CONTINUE TO TRANSFER? (Y/N)
3OM PARITY WARNING APPOINT FILE
OF
NAITING FOR RECEIVE. WHEN TO STOP. PUSH BREAK KEY
NITIALIZE
EXECUTE
Work file is being created during upload from PMC (PMC-N). Checking ROM data parity [write operation for the ROM writer, download for the PMCJ. Wait while processing is performed. Inserted cassette or module is incorrect present machine type (PMC-N, 431. Cannot open specified Cannot close specified Cannot write to specified ROM format file. ROM format file. ROM format file. for the
4OM ID UNMATCH
ERROR
:ILE OPEN ERROR :ILE CLOSE ERROR ILE WRITE ERROR
A3-20
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Message
Description I-
and action to be taken ROM format file.
IFILE READ
ERROR
Cannot read from specified
I-
ROM FILE > ROM ERROR
During writing, the specified ROM format file could not be fully written to ROM (cassette or module). ROM file format is incorrect. There is not enough space on the disk for the work file area (512K bytes) [PMC-N]. EROM is installed with incorrect EROM is faulty. Cannot write to EROM because it has not yet been erased. EROM has not yet been erased. orientation.
IROM
FILE FORMAT
ERROR ERROR
I-
WORK FILE INITIALIZE
ROM SET ERROR EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR
IWIIT.5
DATA SEND ERROR PARITY ERROR RUNNING WRITER! ERROR ROW TYPE ERROR PORT ERROR (OVER RUN) PORT ERROR (PARITY)
- The number of the sent data items does not match that of the received data items. A parity error occurred during data transfer.
The ROM writer is being used. Incorrect type of ROM
Overrun (determined by the status check information from I/O ports) Parity error (determined by the status check information from I/O ports) Framing error (determined by the status check information from I/O ports) Break interrupt error (determined by the status check information from I/O ports) Time-out error (determined information from I/O ports) by the status check
PORT ERROR (FRAMING)
PORT ERROR (BREAK INTERRUPT)
Data transfer error (determined information from l/O ports)
by the status check
TIMER SET/CANCEL
ERROR
The system timer malfunctions. Update the text file (FL10 AT.DAT) information. For details, see the comments of the file.
A3-21
8.
MNEMONIC
EDITING
(System Parameters >
Description System parameter character(s). and action to be taken is followed by invalid

Message
Invalid qualifier.
Unknown
data number.
Data number was specified the system parameters. System parameter System parameter data. contains contains
that does not exist in
Illegal value. Out of value.
invalid numerical out-of-bound
data.
numerical
Expected
a multiple of 5.
System parameter required to be a multiple of 5 is not a multiple of 5. System parameter required to be a multiple of 2 is not a multiple of 2. System parameter contains invalid character(s).
Expected
a multiple of 2.
Illegal character(s). Data not found. Too many characters in 1 line.
There is no system parameter data.

System parameter contains a line of data that exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters.
Illegal data number. Too long strings.
System parameter contains invalid data number(s).

System parameter contains character exceeds the maximum length. System parameter System parameter contains data that
Illegal address Expected parameter(s) Illegal OP. PANEL (PARAMETER) Proceed to discompile using NO.
an invalid address.
is missing or incomplete.
As OP.PANEL (parameter) of the system parameters is invalid, it is assumed to be NO and operation continues.
A3-22
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
<Title Data B
Description Title data is followed Specified and action to be taken by invalid character(s). number does not exist. the maximum length.
Message Invalid qualifier. Unknown data number.
data identifier
Too long strings. Include KANA or KANJI character(s). Illegal character(s) Data not found. Too many characters in 1 line.
Length of title data exceeded
- Title data contains Title data contains
m-type characters. invalid character data.
There is no title data. Title data contains a line of data that exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters. Data identifier number specified is incorrect.
Illegal title number.
(Symbol
and Comment Data >

Description Comment and action to be taken
Message SYMBOL data not found.
data exists, but there is no symbol data. data is followed by invalid
Invalid qualifier.
Symbol and comment character(s). Invalid character comment data.
Illegal character(s).
data was specified
in symbol and
Illegal address.
Invalid address was specified comment data. Symbol and comment address data. Mnemonic data.
in symbol and
Redefinition
of address data.
data contain identical
Redefinition
of symbol data.
symbol data contains
identical
symbol
Include KANA or KANJI character(s) comment data.
in
Comment data which contains m-type characters was converted without the m-type character conversion option (J option). There is no symbol or comment data.
Data not found. Too long characters in 1 line.
Symbol or comment data contains a line of data that exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters. Only symbol data was converted Only symbol or comment the address. Mnemonic bounds. data contains for the address. for
Comment data not found. Symbol or comment data not found.
data was converted
Out of address limits.
an address that is out of
A3-23

Message Expected address.
(LADDER
Data >
Description Basic command and action to be taken
has no address. by invalid character(s).
invalid qualifier. Expected parameter(s).
LADDER data is followed Function Function Function instruction instruction instruction
has no parameters. is missing parameters. has too many parameters.
Not enough parameter(s). Too many parameters. Illegal address. Out of address limits. Undefined instruction. name.
Unspecifiable Out-of-bound Data contains Unspecifiable
address was specified. address was specified. an undefined function command. was specified.
Invalid functions
instruction
Cannot specify byte address on basic instruction. Cannot specify the input address with coil. Cannot specify the odd address.
Byte address was specified
in a basic command.
Address coil.
which cannot be output was specified
in a
Odd address was specified cannot be odd.
for an address that
Illegal value of parameter.
Numeric parameter of a function contains an incorrect value.
instruction
Dut of parameter
value.
Numeric parameter of a function instruction contains a value that exceeds the maximum. Bit address was specified in the byte address parameter of a function instruction. Address which cannot be output was specified the output address parameter of a function instruction. for
Cannot specify bit address of oarameter. Cannot specify the input address.
Cannot specify the address prohibited Jsing as parameter.
Address which cannot be specified as a parameter was specified as a function instruction address parameter. Invalid address was specified in a function instruction address parameter. Invalid value was specified instruction data table. in the function
llegal address of parameter.
llegal value of parameter.
3ut of value in data table.
Out-of-bound value was specified instruction data table. LADDER data contains output.
in the function
_ogical product remains in register(s).
a register which is not
_ogical operated with unused ,egister(s).
Operation was performed with a register which was not input in LADDER data.
A3-24
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Message Not enough control condition(s). -
Description Function instruction insufficient. Too many function
and action to be taken control conditions are
Too many control conditions. Expected control condition(s).
instruction
control conditions. control conditions.
There are no function
instruction
Data not found. Unexpected address.
There is no LADDER data. in a section that does not
- Address was specified require an address. -
Unexpected
parameter(s).
Parameter was specified for a function that does not require parameters.
instruction
Unexpected
control condition(s).
Basic command was specified for a function instruction that does not require control conditions. Coil was specified for a function does not require coils. instruction that
Unexpected
coil(s).
Too many characters
in 1 line.
Mnemonic data contains a line of characters exceeds that maximum allowed number of characters. Function instruction bound address. Function instruction address. Function instruction bound address. parameter contains
that
3ut of address limits of parameter.
an out-of-
llegal address in data table.
data table contains
an invalid
3ut of address limits in data table.
data table contains
an out-of-
A3-25
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
8.5 Mnemonic
Editing
<Message
Data>
Message Too long strings. -
Description
and action to be taken the maximum
Length of message data exceeds allowed length. Invalid address was specified setting address. Message data contains
Illegal address.
for the message
Include KANA or KANJI character(s). Invalid qualifier. Data not found. Too many characters in 1 line.
m-type characters. by invalid character(s).
Message data is followed
There is no message data. Message data contains a line of characters exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters. Message address. Message Mnemonic mnemonic setting address contains that
Out of address limits of address.
an out-of-bound
Illegal character(s). Not found data at $ address.
data contains
invalid character
data. Only
message data was not specified. address data was specified. type and data machine
Cannot convert PMC series.
in case of specified
Specified machine not agree.
type do
A3-26
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
<I/O Module Data>

Description and action to be taken by invalid character(s).
Message Invalid qualifier. Illegal address.
I/O module data is followed Invalid address specified address. Out-of-bound address.
for l/O module data
Out of address limits.
address specified
for I/O module data
Not found group data. Illegal value in group data.
l/O module data has no group data. Group data of I/O module data contains value. Group data of I/O module data contains bound value. l/O module data has no base data. Base data of I/O module data contains value. Base data of l/O module data contains bound value. I/O module data has no slot data. Slot data of l/O module data contains value. Slot data of I/O module data contains bound value. I/O module data has no module name. I/O module data has an invalid module name. Output module is specified the l/O module data. Input module is specified the I/O module data. at the input address of an invalid an invalid an invalid
Out of value in group data.
an out-of-
Not found base data. 811egal value in base data.
Dut of value in base data.
an out-of-
Vat found slot data. llegal value in slot data.
3ut of value in slot data.
an out-of-
\lot found module name. nvalid module name. Cannot specify output module at input Iddress. Cannot specify input module at output address. 2annot specify same group, base and ;lot. rot.9 value of base and slot is over.
at the output address of
Group, base, and slot data of I/O module data have the same data. Sum of base and slot data of I/O module data exceeds the maximum allowed value. There is no I/O module data. I/O module data contains a line of characters exceeds the maximum allowed number of characters. Specified machine type and conversion machine type do not agree. data that
Data not found. Too many characters in 1 line.
2annot convert in case of specified MC series.
A3-27
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
9. STEP SEQUENCE
Error message Illegal source code Symbol file read error Comment file read error
EDITING ERRORS
Description The input file data is illegal. The symbol data cannot be read. The comment data cannot be read.
Title file read error Memory allocation Insufficient error
The title data cannot be read. Sufficient memory space cannot be allocated. free space on the specified drive.
disk space
There is insufficient
Buffer size over Number of nest branch too big Number of branch too big Size of table buffer too big Unconnected Selected step sequence diagram
The program is too large. The program contains The program contains too many branches. too many branches.
The program is too large. A line is not connected. The program contains The program contains A syntax error is found. A step line contains A transition an illegal code. an illegal code. too many branches. too many branches.
branch error
Parallel branch error Syntax error Step line syntax error Transition line syntax error
line contains
Cannot insert Cannot make diagram
The program is too large. The wrong soft key was pressed to change an element. The point at which a branch must be closed is left as a horizontal line. The jump destination The specified cannot be found.
Horizontal
fine illegal
Jump forward check error File open error File close error Check incomplete Chart sequence error error
file cannot be found.
The file cannot be closed. The source program contains The sequence The beginning is incorrect. of the sequence is incorrect. an illegal code.
Chart start code error Chart end code error Jump close error -horizontal line duplicate 3ranch unconnected 3ranch sequence error
The end of the sequence An instruction The sequence
is incorrect. after a label jump.
is encountered is incorrect.
error
A branch is not closed. A branch is invalid.
error
A3-28
APPENDIX
3 ERROR MESSAGES
Error message Cannot copy diagrams Cannot move diagrams Illegal specified position
Description The program is too large. The program is too large. The corresponding The specified coordinates cannot be found.
Strings not Found Step Number Duplicate Error
character
string cannot be found.
The specified subprogram. The specified The temporary
step number is being used by another
Label Number Duplicate Cannot delete temporary Same sub-program
Error file
label is used in two or more positions. file cannot be deleted. extension,
name exists
A file having the same name, but a different exists. The specified address data exceeds predetermined range. No subprogram number is specified. the
Input invarid
Expected
address of nest branch too big
Sub-program
An attempt was made to nest a program to a level of eight or more, by using the [ZOOM] key.
A3-29
APPENDIX
4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)
APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC=RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)

The PMCRA3/RB3RC3 has special sub-program functions that allow modular programming.
When the sub-program unbroken sequence
function
is used, a Ladder program,
which
must have been coded as an
before, can be coded in units of sub-programs. enables FAPT LADDER to manage a program by dividing it into two or
The sub-program more modules
function
(modular programming.) by the ladder diagram to a program editing function to produce to connect a
The modular
programming
is accomplished
module from a program modules.
and connect
a module
and the compile
function
In the later part of this book, the terms module 0 Module : Logical unit of a program. program.
and source A module
program
mean the following: correspond to a sub-
does not always
A single module can be the first or second half of the main program unit of a program stored on a floppy disk or hard disk
or a group of sub-programs.
l
Source program
: Physical
1.
LADDER DIAGRAM
a source program
EDITING FUNCTION
(1) Dividing
l
The function
copies or moves a part of a source
program
and creates
another
program,
to
which a name is specified. 0 The function produces a module from a program.
Source program
Module
A4-1
APPENDIX 4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)
(2) Combining
l
source programs combines all or part of a source program to another source program that is
The function being edited.
The function
combines
a module (program) to another program. Module Source program Source program
Source program
. . .. .. *..* _.... *
......
...
Edit . . ...*. . ... <.....
For the details of (1) and (2), see (8) Copying 5.1.2, Ladder Diagram Editing.
Sections
of a Sequence
Program
in Section
2.
COMPILE FUNCTION
modules compiles a batch of separately edited programs and unites the programs. in a control statement (text file having the
(1) Combining
l
The function files
0 The
to be combined #LS).
can be specified
extension
0 The control statement 0 The function
is coded by the [LIST] command
on the compile or print screen.
can handle modules
(files) made up of any units (nets or sub-programs). Control statement (MAINFILE.#LS) File selection MAINFILE SUBFILEI SUBFILE . SUBFlLEn
MAINFILE.#LA SUBFILEl.#LA SUBFILE2.#LA . . SUBFILEn.#LA
1Main program
I
1
1
I
I
ROM data Main program Sub-program Sub-program . . Sub-program n 1 1 2 I 1 1
1Sub-program I Sub-program
I
1 1 2 , I
I
For details, see Section 5.3, Compilation.
A4-2
APPENDIX
4 MODULAR PROGRAMMING (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY)
(2)
Control statement
(.#LS file) text file in which the source programs See the following example. to be combined are coded in
The .#LS file is a MS-DOS
the order in which they are combined.
Sample control statement
(File name = MAIN.#LS)
Parameters,
symbols,
comments,
the title, and other data, except data for the ladder, from the
first program are used for the second and later programs.
(3) Advantages 0 Programs can be edited quickly and easily because small source programs 0 A source changing program its name. in the control statement can be used for another are handled. purpose only by
Program
Program 2
ESub-program ..................
A4-3
APPENDIX
5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING
PROCEDURE
(FOR THE FSZO)
APPENDIX 5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING (FOR THE FS20)

This appendix describes how to use the BOOT SYSTEM
PROCEDURE
for the FS20.
The operating
procedure refer to
varies from one CNC model to another. the respective manuals.
For other models such as the FSlSB
(PMC-NA),
AS-1
APPENDIX
5 BOOT SYSTEM OPERATING
PROCEDURE
(FOR THE FSZO)
Hold down the [NEXT] key and a soft key at its immediate left simultaneously, and switch on the NC. The IPL screen will appear (00).
(NEXT]
The (0
entry to 0).
procedure
is described
below
@ @
Hold dowrf both simultaneously. Switch on the power.
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 'liB:i';~~f~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~, 2. SYSTEM'DATA 3. SYSTEM DATA CHECK DELETE @ Place the cursor on 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING using [UP] or [DOWN], then press [SELECT].
*** MESSAGE l ** SELECT MODE AND HIT [SELECT] [ YES I[
[SELECT] ~0 11 up
KEY.
1 [ DOWN ] DATA LOADING
'SYSTEM
Place the cursor on the desired filename using [UP] or [DOWN], then press [SELECT].
FILE DIRECTORY ~~~~~~~~ TEST. DAT END

l ** AND HIT
*** MESSAGE SELECT FILE
[SELECT] ~0 1[ up
KEY.
=-I
0 Press [YES] or [NO].
[SELECT] [ YES
1[
1 [ DOWN
t
*** MESSAGE *** LOADING OK ? HIT
I
Cy
[YES] OR
[NO] KEY. UP ][ DOWN ] I /
1
I
j 1
(SELECT][ YES
I *** MESSAGE *** HIT [SELECT] KEY. ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE [SELECT] I YES I[ NO
][
NO
I
][
]I
UP
I[
DOWN
A file in a format that cannot be handled by the BOOT SYSTEM was selected. End of entry
I
:\ LOADING COMPLETE. I[ HIT NO [SELECT] I[ up KEY. I[ DOWN
[SELECT] [ YES
AS-2
APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMC-RAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)
APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMGRAlIRA3, NB, AND QC)
If a CNC or off-line programmer operating on an upgraded edition is used to output a sequence
program to a memory card, the sequence programmer operating
program may not be able to be input to a CNC or off-line
on an earlier edition (see below). A08B-XXXX-J502, A08B-XXXX-J501, editions editions 06.3 and later 06.2 and later
Series 4080, edition 06
Series 4080, edition 04 Series 4047, edition 01 Series 4054, edition 01 CNC
AO8B-XXXX-J502,
editions
06.1 and later
Off-line programmer
: Operating
on an upgraded edition f+___ -+ ___+ : Unconditionally possible
: Operating
on an earlier edition
: Possible under some condition
Cases 0, below.
0,
0,
and 0,
where
input/output
is possible
under
some condition,
are explained
A6-1
APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMGRAVRA3, NB, AND QC)
Cases 0 output Input : :
and @ No special operation is required. to enter a sequence program.
Use the BOOT SYSTEM
Case 0 Output : To output a sequence program, specify the output format as 1 (S-format) on the
PMC l/O SETUP screen shown below. value (put in effect by pressing
Note that for the output format, the default is 0 (binary).
soft key [INIT])
PMC I/O PROGRAM CHANNEL DEVICE ~~~~4~~~1 = 1 = M-CARD _ "RITE
MONIT STOP
DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. = ( #NAME ) [ EXEC l[CANCEL][WRITE ][ READ ](COMPARJ I [SETUP ]
[DELETE][ LIST ][FORMAT][
PMC SETUP M-CARD
MONIT STOP
:.,.. :,.......i OUTPUT FORhfAT(pROGRAM) +$$:_ii; (O:BINARY,l:S-FORMAT)
[INPUT ] [
Input : To enter a sequence program,
II
select
I[
F6 (input/output),
1 [ INIT 1
then F3 (Handy File &
memory card) from the main menu screen.
Case @ output : Output a sequence program to a memory card by selecting F6 (input/output), then
F4 (FLOPPY CASSETTE Input : Select F6 (input/output),
ADAPTER
& Handy File) from the main menu. card) from the main menu; a sequence
then F5 (memory
program can be read as usual.
A6-2
APPENDIX
7 CAUTIONS
FOR USING THE 0:s
APPENDIX 7 CAUTIONS
(1) MS-DOS version 05.0
FOR USING THE O/S
DOSKEY.COM When DOSKEY.COM is used in insertion mode, pay attention to the following:
Insert mode specification
DOSKEY.COM/INSERT
Be
careful
especially
when
the
AUTOEXEC.BAT
contains
a command
line
of
DOSKEY.COM.
When
DOSKEY.COM
is used in insert
mode on the PC-9801,
the symptom
described data type
below occurs.
l
When an attempt on the conversion
is made to move the cursor to 3) Select conversion to mnemonic screen, the cursor disappears,
but the desired
data type is selected normally. This symptom does not occur on the IBM/PC or compatible.
[Measure] Use DOSKEY.COM in replace mode.
(2) Windows
3.1
SMARTDRV.EXE When SMARTDRV.EXE is used with write caching enabled, pay attention to the following:
Enable write caching
SMARTDRV.EXE
Be
careful
especially
when
the
AUTOEXEC.BAT
contains
a command
line
of
SMARTDRV.EXE.
When SMARTDRV.EXE
l
is used with write caching enabled,
the following
symptom
occurs.
The following entry.
alarm occurs during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC writer, disabling
Alarm message
Received OVERRUN
data invalid
(for the PC-9801) (for the IBM/PC and compatible)
[Measure] When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for the following disk drives:
a. b.
Drive where the FAPT LADDER system exists Drive where ROM format files are created
A7-1
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
APPENDIX 8 TOOL FOR CHANGING

This function is a tool(CHGMES) for easy changing
MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

the message data incorporating sequence
program of FANUC PMCs . This tool extracts only message data from Handy file format file. The message data in CNC(PMC) can be replaced with this extracted data, if both message data
size are the same. This tool is usefull when it is necessary example: Supporting multi-lingual to use some message data files in one ladder program.(For
message.)
c Method of Message size Check > (1) Memory map information is output when the source program is compiled. changing ladder and the ladder for
Please check each symbol top address of the original changing to be the same value. the message data execute
(2) This tool for changing execute
with the compare
file,
then this tool
the same check of the message data size.
c Applied PMCs > FANUC PMC-MODEL RAlIRA2!RA3iRB/RB2/RB3/RBWRC/RC3/RC4/NB
1.
PROCEDURE
OF THE MESSAGE
DATA CHANGING
(1) Load the basic message ladder file of handy file format to the NC by using the memory card or floppy disk on the PMC input!output (2) Input the CHGMES file format). data on the NC is changed ([I!01 screen). by loading the output file of this tool on the PMC command operation with ([I/O] screen). data for changing and dummy ladder
the message
file(handy
(3) The message input/output
operation
2.
OPERATING
ENVIRONMENT
operating environment for this tool.
It is necessary (1) Memory
to use following
235Kbytes LADDER. (2) Temporary
or more main memory
is required
when activating
this function
without
FAPT
files generates following temporary files for work area on the drive/directory which
This function
is set by environmental This function generate
variable TMP temporary files
of PC-DOS. on the route directory of current drive when
environmental It is necessary $TMPD.T-,
variable TMP
is not set. disk space for these temporary files.
to free max.65KBytes $TMPW.T
(= 00-99) automatically.)
(These temporary
files are deleted by this function
A8-1
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
(3) Hard disk It is necessary

l l
to use following
disk space. 68KBytes
For installation To generate temporary (In case of environmental files variable TMP
65KBytes
of PC-DOS set on hard disk) TOTAL 133KBytes
3.
INSTALLATION
copy EXE-FILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory from FAPT LADDER system floppy
Please
disk(Vol.3). Key in I_ CHGMES * CHGMES.EXE * RB3DUMMY.SFM Example command. files(.SFM) on the installed directory, * ASC2lMG.EXE * RB3BASIC.SFM are used to confirm then following files are generated. : : Execute files (.EXE) example files(.SFM) by activating example * IMG2ASC.EXE * RB3MES.SFM the installation
of this function
4.
ACTIVATION
command at the DOS prompt activated in the utility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main
Key in following menu). Or,Please
change the directory
in which this tool is installed. when the PATHis set.)
(It is not necessary Then key in following
to change the directory command.
CHGMES
[INPUT FILE]
[OUTPUT
FILE]
[PMC TYPE]
( [COMPARE
FILE] )
<return> data
INPUT FILE
: : A handy file format file that consists
of a dummy ladder and message ladder file.
to replace the message data in the basic message Create this file by compiling
the source file and converting
to a handy file
format file using FAPT LADDER. OUTPUT FILE : : A handy file format message file created by this tool. This file contains only message data. data in the CNC memory can be
By loading this file to the CNC, message substituted. PMC TYPE : : PMC TYPE (RAl or RA2 or RA3...etc.)
Please key in PMC TYPE that is defined
<Applied
PMCs>
item.
Error will occur at key in other than applied PMCs. COMPARE (Optional) FILE : : Basic message ladder file (Handy file format) outline. size of the INPUT FILE Then, replaced and you the can
Please refer to the Fig.Operation This tool compares FILE that only message to determine the
COMPARE guarantee crashing
if there will
is a match.
message
be correctry
without
other data when you load the OUTPUT
FILE to CNC.
A8-2
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
<Outline
of Operation 7 Message for changing + Dummy ladder Generation, Editing +
Basic message ladder +
t I COMPILATION
Check the SYMBOL top address by memory map display.
+,
+,
J INPUT/OUTPUT (F4:FLOPPY CASSETTE
t Handy File)
Handy file format ROM file FLOPPY MEMORY CARD
Handy file format
(Note)
%l %2
%2 FLOPPY
%3 MEMORY CARD
(Note)
r/
r]ORu
Only message data for changing Loading at [I/O]screen operation of PMC.
of ROM file
(Note)
It is possible FSl5-B
to load by memory
card
only for FS16 -B, FS18-B,
FS-20,
FS21-B, and
(PMC-NB). manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory
Please refer to the following
card or handy file. It is not possible to load on boot screen. FANUC PMC MODEL PAl/PA3/RAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RBURC/RC3/RCWNB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B-61863EI06)
A8-3
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
5.
USING EXAMPLE
of this function by using the following example. this function.
Check the installation
There are some sample files in FAPT LADDER system floppy disk for checking
RB3DUMMY.SFM
: :
Message data and dummy ladder file (Handy file format) (Message data (50KB) + Ladder (END1 + END2)) ladder file (Handy file format) data) for above OUTPUT
RB3BASIC.SFM
: :
Basic message (Message
data (50KB) + Ladder data + Symbol&Comment the result (Message output data(50KB)) file, when to check
RB3MESSFM
: :
Data for checking (This
file is a normal
this tool execute by comparing
sample data.
It is possible
result
FILE and this file.) Execute body.) as the following (In this case the system is installed in main
(1) Please
A: y
7
key in the following CHGMES
command. USERTEST.SFM FILE.ln RB3 RB3BASIC.SFM < return 7 is used.
RB3DUMMY.SFM
You can specify any name for OUTPUT
this example,USERTEST.SFM
(2)
Following
file is generated
on current drive. data (50KB))
USERTESTSFM
(Message
COMMAND). (3) Check the result by using FC/A(PC-DOS A: Y 7 FC/A USERTEST.SFM RB3MES.SFM If NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED is displayed, the result is correct.
6.
ERROR MESSAGES
Message Meaning (pmc type) and countermeasure applied
chgmes : PMC type unmatch
PMC type does not match between PMCs.
(input file)
PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do not match.
(compare
file)
PMC type of compare type do not match.
file and key in PMC
chgmes : Message
sizes of (input file) and
Message
size of input file and compare
file do size by
(compare file) are mismatched
not agree. Please adjust the message
adding some dummy message to the input file. Please confirm compile function chgmes : Cannot start ASC2lMG ASC2lMG.EXE directory the MAP display on the
of FAPT LADDER. does not exist in the same
of CHGMES.EXE.
A8-4
APPENDIX
8 TOOL FOR CHANGING
MESSAGE
DATA (CHGMES)
Message chgmes : Cannot start IMG2ASC
Meaning and countermeasure IMG2ASC.EXE directory does not exist in the same
of CHGMESEXE. to make temporary file.
chgmes : Cannot make temporary $tmpd.t chgmes : Cannot make temporary $tmwd.t
file
It is impossible
* Disk is insufficient. file - It is impossible to set the file name, because exist.
$tmp*.tOO -$tmp*.t99 Temporary
chgmes : Cannot close file $tmpd (w).t*
file can not be closed.
Please check the disk space. ssc2img : Cannot allocate memory (bytes)
Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB

or more memory, and re-activate.
ssc2img : Conversion zonflicted asc2img : Unknown
area in input is
Ladder header of the input file is crushed. Please re-make the input file, and re-activate.
file type
Illegal format of the input file. the format, and re-activate.
Please change
asc2img : (input file) : Record No. has
There is an invalid data of input file. Please correct as error message, reactivate. and
3sc2img : Cannot open file Isc2img : Cannot close file
There is no input file. It is impossible to close the file.
Please check the disk space. Isc2img : Cannot write It is impossible to write the temporary file.
Please check the disk space. mg2asc : Cannot allocate memory (bytes) Memory is insufficient. Please free up 235KB
or more memory, and re-activate. mg2asc : Cannot write It is impossible to write the output file.
Please check the disk space.
A8-5
APPENDIX
9 SOFTWARE
VERSION TABLE
APPENDIX 9 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE

To use the software described in this manual, each CNC unit requires a different system disk.
As described disk.
in Section products
2.1 in Part I, each system of specific versions
must prepare an area of 3 Mbytes
in its hard
If software
listed below are used, however,
they can be stored
in the same directory When the software
and can be operated. products of specific versions are stored in one directory, the required capacity just by
of hard disk is a little more than 3 Mbytes. moving the cursor on the model selection
in addition,
any PMC model can be selected
screen.
1) System floppy disks of different
versions
that can be used together
Software (-Jxxx) PMC-FIB/FE (-J502) PMC-N (-J501) PMC-L/M/P (-J500) Ol.l01.12 Ol.l02.3 02.002.3
Combinations
of different
versions
that can
be entered into an identical Ol.O02.0 03.003.1 03.0 03.003.6 04.004.8 04.004.8 04.006.0 -
directory 06.2 06.3 06.4 07.008.4
06.1
05.0
06.1
06.2
06.3
05.0
06.1
06.2
06.3
A9-1
APPENDIX
9 SOFTWARE
VERSION TABLE
2)
System floppy disks and module floppy disks for the FS16/18/15B,Powe that can be used together
Mate-D, F-D Mate Mini
software (-Jxxx) MC-RB/RC (-J502) ?Al/RA2 MODULE 01.0 02.0 01.0 02.0
Combinations
of versions
03.0-03.6
04.004.2
05.006.0 04.0
06.1
06.207.1
08.008.1 05.0
08.308.4 05.1
02.1
03.003.4
04.1
04.204.4
PMCRAl/RA2/RA3 PA1 /PA3) (-J603) IB/RC MODULE PMCRB/RB2/RB3 164/RC/RC3/RC4) (-J604) 1C MODULE (-J605) JB MODULE (-J606) 01.0 02.0 03.0 03.103.2
04.004.4
04.5 04.6
04.7
04.805.0
06.0
06.1
(Note) 01.0 01.1 01.2 02.0 02.1
01.0
Ol.l01.2
02.0
02.1
Note)
When using installation.
PMCRB4iRC4,
install the RBIRC MODULE
floppy disk(-J604)
at last of all
3)
System floppy disks and module floppy disks for the FSO,Power Mate-ABC
Software PMC-L/M/P L MODULE M MODULE M (MMC) MODULE
I -J*
500 600 601 602
I
01 .l -04.8 01.1-02.0 01.1-03.0 01 .l -02.0
Combinations 05.0 03.0 04.0 03.0
of versions 06.1 04.0 05.0 04.0 06.2 -06.3 05.0-06.0 06.0 -07.0 05.0-06.0
Note)
The column
entitled
-JXXX
indicates
the last three characters
of software
code A08B-
9200/9201 -JXXX
A9-2
APPENDIX
9 SOFTWARE
VERSION TABLE
Software products
products
listed in the same column in the same directory
can be stored in the same directory. have the different first. version
When software however, a
to be stored
numbers,
software product with a smaller number must be installed
The following
are examples:
1)
Software J502/03.0
products
J502iO3.0 and JSOliO4.3 can be stored in the same directory.
However,
must be installed first.

products J502!03.0 and J501/03.0 cannot be stored in the same directory.
2)
Software
A9-3
APPENDIX
IO MANAGING
A SOURCE PROGRAM
APPENDIX IO MANAGING A SOURCE PROGRAM 1. TYPE OF SOURCE PROGRAM

There are two types of the source program of the following. The file name and the control method are different though both are preserved Especially, the function of ZOOM and G-SRCH can not be used at FORMAT-A as some files. but FORMAT-B.
1)
FORMAT-A The source program is managed using the following or more source programs. - xxxxxxxx.#CN : - xxxxxxxx.#PA - xxxxxxxx.#TA - xxxxxxxx.#sY - xxxxxxxx.#c1 - xxxxxxxx.#c2 - xxxxxxxx.#ME - xxxxxxxx.#l0 - xxxxxxxx.#LA : : : : : : : : names. A single directory can contain two
File managing
user programs
File storing system parameters File storing the title data File storing symbols File storing comments File storing comments File storing messages File storing the I/O module data File storing ladder (reserve)
(xxxxxxxx
is the specified
source program name.)
2)
FORMAT-B A directory managed programs. is created with the specified under the following names. source program name. A single directory In the directory, contain the program is
cannot
two or more source
- CONTROL - SYSPARAM - TITLE - SYMBOL - COMMENT1 - COMMENT2 - MESSAGE - IOMODULE - LEVEL1 .#LA - LEVEL2.#LA - LEVEL3.#LA - PYYYYY.#LA - PYYYYY.#SS
: : : : : : : : : : : : :
File managing
the source program
File storing system parameters File storing the title data File storing symbols File storing comments File storing comments File storing messages File storing the l/O module data File storing ladder of the first level File storing ladder of the second level File storing ladder of the third level File storing ladder subprograms File storing step sequence subprograms (reserve)
(yyyyy is a subprogram
number.)
A10-1
APPENDIX
10 MANAGING
A SOURCE PROGRAM
3.
SAMPLE MANAGEMENT
functions
OF FORMAT-C
(STEP SEQRCWRC4 (STEP SEQ.
The following
have been added to PMCRB4RB4 by below files.
The FORMAT-C
source program is organized
<A case of specifying
C: y DATA y PRG - C as source program >
C:Y
data Y PRG t t CY Source program managing file System parameter data file Title data file Symbol & Comment data file Message data file I/O Module data file First level ladder data file Second level ladder data file Third level ladder data file Sub-program ladder data file Sub-program step sequence data file Net comment data file Setting of option Memory card syste file
-CONTROL - SYSPARAM * TITLE - XSYMBOL.xxx - MESSAGE - IOMODULE * LEVEL1 #LA * LEVEL2.#LA * LEVELWLA * Pyyy.#LA - Pzzz.#SS . NETCMT.xxx * OPTION - * MCARD
(Note 1)
(Note (Note (Note (Note
2) 3) 3) 1)
(Notel) (Note2) (Note3)

The format
xxx is number of multi file managing. Only for use LEVEL3 ladder at PMCRC4IRC4(STEP). yyy, zzz is number of sub-program.
of newly
created
source
program
is specified
by %%%FLSET.CNF
data file.
The
initial settings for RB4!RB4(STEP)/RC4/RC4(STEP)
are FORMAT-C.
Data file name : %%%FLSET.CNF 7; kB4 3; RB4 STEP :3; RC4=3; RC4_STEP = 3; Source program type
Parameters
value
1 = FORMAT-A 3 = FORMAT-C (initial setting)
A10-3
APPENDIX
10 MANAGING
A SOURCE PROGRAM
4.
SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE AND PMC MODEL
The source program type is decided by setting the PMC model. 1) FORMAT-A.
* * -
PMCRC/RC3RBiRB2/RB3.:RAl/RA2/RA3 PMC-NBQC PMCPAl!PA3 PMC-NN (10 LINK)/QA PMC-LMIM (MMC) PMC-RB4/RC4(A08B-9200/9201 -Jr502 ver.8.0 or earlier)
2)
FORMAT-B
-
PMCRB4 (STEP SEQ)/RC4 (STEP SEQ) (A08B-9200/9201-J502 Ver. 8.1, 8.2, 8.3) PMC-RB4/RC4 (A08B-9200!9201-J502 ver.8.0, 8.2, 8.3)
3)
FORMAT-C
*
PMCRB4.RB4 (STEP SEQ)IRCWRC4(STEP SEQ) (A08B-9200/9201-J502 Ver 8.4 or later) PMC-RBMRBG!NB2 In case of PMCRBWRC4, FAPT LADDER creates two types of source program as above mentioned. ver.8.1. For the operation of conversion refer to next chapter 6.4 Conversion from FORMAT-A to FORMAT-B Therefore, the source program of ver.8.0 needs conversion for using on
Note)
A10-4
APPENDIX
10 MANAGING
A SOURCE PROGRAM
5.
CONVERSION
FROM FORMAT-A TO FORMAT-B

is updated from ver.8.0 or earlier
When FAPT LADDER
for PMC-RB4iRC4(A08B-9200!9201-J502)
to ver.8.1 or later, it needs source program conversion. The operation is the following.
1)
Convert the source program FORMAT-A LADDER(A08B-9200!9201-J502)
into an all-format
mnemonic
data with FAPT
ver.8.1 or later.
2)
Convert the mnemonic The conversion
data into a source program with the same FAPR LADDER. by above mentioned.
is completed
In case of using a control operation is the following. Do the operation
statement
file, which
has extension
.#I.$,
for combining
modules,
the
of 1) by each source program in the control statement. data into an all-format mnemonic data.
Combine each mnemonic Do the operation of 2).
Note)
It is possible
to use FORMAT-A
without
conversion.
In that case, you need to modify a
%%%FLSET.CNF. For the
But it is not recommended. refer to the APPENDIX 7 System configuration file
%%%FLSET.CNF
%%%FLSET.CNF.
6.
COPYING AND MOVING A SOURCE PROGRAM

to enable the copying or moving of a source program.
FAPT LADDER does not support a function Because the source program file manipulation is managed directory
as described with
above, it can be copied or moved by using or another MS-DOS command. Only
on a specified
the COPY
programs for an identical
model can be handled in this way.
For example, following
to make a backup copy on floppy disk of the source program shown above, enter the at the MS-DOS prompt:
command
1)
Suppose that the floppy disk drive is B:.
2)
Create a source program storage directory
on B:.
A > MKDIR B: +r BACKUP
[RET]
3)
Copy all files under the directories
specified
with the source program name.
The source program is copied. To edit the copied source program, program name. start FAPT LADDER and specify B:Y BACKUP as the source
A10-5
APPENDIX 11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE %%%FLSET.CNF.
APPENDIX 11
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FILE %%% FLSET. CNF.

is a file of the text form and some setting parameters, by which the behavior
%%%FLSET.CNF
of FAPT LADDER is decided, are described there. The file exits in the directory in which the system of FAPT LADDER is installed. And the parameters can be changed by a text editor on the market.
1. Sample of %%%FLSET.CNF
;IIIII=tll trrfllllllllllltlll1111111111111110 IPttLtllLlDlttPOltt=It
FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File
( 'key word =' <= Scharactets ) t ;rPlrllLIIDl====ltll IILDIIIILrt=rlllllPL-======-= Illll'llttllllltlll=
f =t=tff== System Setup ====t=== lS: : editor =; Text Editor : ladkey = 1; Ladder editing key buffer size ( 1 <= ladkey <- 16 ) ;
:
password=O;
: f
;
i
0:No password l:Password(R/W)and(R) 2:Password(R/W) 3:Password(R)
===f==== Utility Information ==t==== lU: : N = UTILITY; Utility Guidance

i
Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
= DOS / command.com; = file List / ISCREENZ; = flOadat / FLOADAT; =; =; =; =;
F8 =; F9 =;
FlO=;
i :
Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance Soft Key Guidance [FE] Soft Key Guidance [F9] Soft Key Guidance [FlO] Soft Key Guidance
[Fl] [FZ] (F3) [F4] [FSJ [F6] [F7]
6 EXE h EXE 6 EXE L EXE C EXE h EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE & EXE 6 EXE
*T;
.
======== Source program type r======= '1' or '2'. PMC+B4(STEP SEQ) only supports '1' or '2'. PMC-RCI(STEP SEQ) only supports
'2; RB4_STEP=2; '2; RC4 RC4_STEP=2;

i
LB4
'2'. '2'.
IEOFI
All-l
APPENDIX
11 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
FILE %%% FLSET.CNF.
All parameters Hereafter,
in the %%%FLSET.CNF
are described is explained
following
the form of key word = .
content of setting parameters
by each item.
1)
Specification
of source program type
a) Function
FAPT LADDER source, editing will newly create the source program at conversion of mnemonic -> new source program and decompilation.
The type of created source program is decided at this time.
key word By each PMC model, a setting parameter will be described succeeding ========= Source program type = = = = = = = = . Key word shows the model and uses the same character information on the status line displayed the line of I* T;
string as the display
of model
in each screen of FAPT LADDER. = , RC4 = .
This setting is effective

_ .I w 1 = FORMAT-A
only in case of Key word RB4
As for the value, either "1" or 2 is effective.
- 2
= FORMAT-B
It is FORMAT-B of ZOOM
in initialization.
When the source program type is FORMAT-B,
the function
and G-SRCH
can be used.
All
-2
APPENDIX
12
INQUIRY FORM
APPENDIX 12 INQUIRY FORM

Comoanv name Section Phone No. Fax No. FANUC sales person ( t 1 )
Person in charqe Address
No.
Product name
Ordering code
2 3 4 5
[Usage environment] Machine DOS tvpe used (PC) Version Yes I No (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: and AUTOEXECBAT files on a sheet and attach it to this form. 1 1
MS-DOS
EMS board: Other equipment
(printer, etc.)
Please print out the CONFIG.SYS [Details of inquiry]
Please use this form when you have any questions
about this product.
AlZ-1
INDEX
(PMC-RA~/RA~/RB~/RB~/RB~!RB~!RC~/RC~/NB!NB~)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - 99
A Program Configuration ACTIVATION
Screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 1 l-15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
<B>
BASICOPERATION Basic Operation BOOT SYSTEM BUSY control ............................................... ................................................... OPERATING PROCEDURE (FOR THE FS20) ................ l-17 3- 6 A5 - 1 2- 4
....................................................
<c>
CAUTIONS Changing Changing Changing Command COMMON Common FOR USING THE O/S Printer Output Format ..................................... ...................................... .................................. .................................... A7 - 1 2 - 12 l103 the Order of Subprograms the paper selection input during startup OPERATIONS name
2 - 14 2- 1 .................. 2- 1 1 - 19 2- 2 1 - 94
........................................
FOR THE PC9801 AND IBM PC/AT ........................................ ............................................
System Operations settings
Communications Compilation Conversion Conversion
..................................................... of a mnemonic file to a source program file ....................... .......................
1 - 152 l-150 2- 8 2- 9
of a source program to a mnemonic Program
Convert the PMC Type of Sequence Convert with signal address converter Converting Converting a step sequence
.............................
................................... to the model .................
program according editing
1 - 113 2- 8 3 - 10 3- 9 3- 9
by system parameter
..................................
Creating a step sequence Creating a Step Sequence Creating a subprogram
program
....................................
........................................... ..............................
of the step sequence
Data conversion DataFlow
(return codes)
........................................
2- 5 3-3 2-5 Al-l l-110 l-109
....................................................... ............................................ .........................................
Data start and end codes DATATRANSFERCABLES Decompilation DOScommand
.................................................. .................................................
<E>
Editing EDITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22 3-6
Error detection Error detection
and handling and messages
.......................................... .........................................
2- 7 2- 6 A3 - 1
ERROR MESSAGES
..............................................
<F>
FLOPPY CASSETTE FUNCTION ADAPTER + 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format) THE PMC-UM WITH RAM ............... 1 - 149 A2 - 1 2- 1 FOR OPERATING .................... ......................
Function for Transferring
Data between
the P-G and PC
<H>
Handy File + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . l-147
l/O module editing IBM PC/AT operating Input/Output Input/Output INQUIRYFORM Installation
................................................ environment ..................................... F-MODEL D Mate) ...............
l-70 l-10 l-134 1-119 A12l-11 1-5 Net comment) to ROM format file1 - 103 1
for PMC-QA
(FANUC SYSTEM
................................................... ................................................ ..............................................
Procedure
INSTALLATION
...................................................
It is possible to choose output data (SymbolComment,
<I_>
Ladder diagram editing Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l-26 1-116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MANAGING MEMORY
A SOURCE
PROGRAM
.................................. (FOR THE PMCRAl/RA3, NB, AND QC) ............. ......
AlOA6-1 1-142 1-17 1-113 l-68 l-150 l-153 l-21
CARD COMPATIBILITY
Memory card interface Menu Configuration Merge
in the personal computer ...............................................
and memory card
........................................................ ................................................. ............................................... .............................................
Message editing Mnemonic Mnemonic Editing
file format
Model Setting MODULAR
................................................... (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 ONLY) ....................
PROGRAMMING
A4-1
co>
Operating Environment .............................................. 1- 6 l-22 1 - 95, l-110,3-4 1-112 1 - 1,3-l OPERATION Operation Outputting OVERVIEW .................................................... .............................................. to split files ............................................
...................................................
<P>
Password set function environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 7 l-85 3- 1 2-4 PC9801 operating Printout
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with the Step Sequence Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Protocol
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-122
<s>
Sample mnemonic Sample mnemonic SETTINGAMODEL Setting form feed Setting line feed files (all-format) files (single-format) ................................... ................................. 1-166 l-157 3-4 2-23 2-23 information .............. 2-19 2-20 ............. 2-21 2-16 2-16 2-22 2-22 2-22 2-15 2-23 2- 14 2- 19 2-14 A9-1 2-21 2-20 2-21 2-11 l-60 ..................... All-l l-73 ............................................... ................................................. ................................................. list output format guidance list output information list read/write
Setting the cross-reference Setting the cross-reference Setting the cross-reference Setting the left margin Setting the line spacing
.......................... information
coil guidance
............................................. ............................................ ....................................
Setting the output format guidance Setting the output format
........................................... ........................................ ................................
Setting the output information
Setting the printer model and print paper Setting the read/write coil guidance
.................................... ............................
Setting the spacing between the LADDER net Setting the title of printout Setting the top margin SOFTWARE Specifying Specifying Specifying VERSION
...........................................
............................................. TABLE ....................................... list linefeed ............................... ........................... ............................
the cross-reference the cross-reference the cross-reference
list output format list page break
Standard Symbol Data Symbol and comment SYSTEM
............................................. editing ........................................ FILE %%% FLSET.CNF. ..........................................
CONFIGURATION editing
System parameter
<T>
The Configration of a Sequence Program ................................. 3- 2 l-105 ........ l-170 l-25 ...................... A8 - 1 l-124 B) ...... l-131 The list of source program The note if the step sequence Title data editing ......................................... function is selected when setting a model
................................................. MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)
TOOL FOR CHANGING Transfer Transfer
to and from PMC-UM to and from PMC-N/NA
(FANUC Series 0) ......................... (FANUC Series 15-MODEL A, -MODEL
Revision FAPT LADDER (For Personal Computer)
Record OPERATORS MANUAL (B-66131 E)
05
Dec., 95
- Corresponding descriptions for PMC-RBSIRBGiNB2
* Addition of PMC-MODEL RA3/RB3/FKX/PAl/PA3/QC/NB . Addition of symbol and comment edit function on Ladder Edit
screen
04
Jun., 93
* Addition * Addition . Addition . Change
of of of of
external ROM format file conversion function cross reference print format setting function mnemonic edit label/subprogram Item symbol and comment edit function
03
Dec., 92
Correction of errors
02
Sep., 92
Total revision
01
Jun., 90
Edition
Date
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents
EUROPEAN
HEADQUARTERS
- GRAND-DUCHt
DE LUXEMBOURG
GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. Zone Industrielle L6469 Echternach 4 (+352) 727979- 1 I (+352) 727979-214 BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. - Netherlands Branch Postbus 7230 - NI.4800 GE Breda Minervum 1603A - NI.4817 ZL Breda %I (+31) 765783 201 (CNC) %I (+31) 765783 212 (PLC) I (+31) 765870 181 FRANCE GE Fanuc Automation France S.A. 45, rue du Bois Chaland Lisses F-91 029 Evry Cedex %I (+33) 1 69 89 70 39 (CNC) %I (+33) 1 69 89 70 20 (PLC) I (+33) 1 69 89 70 49 GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Elberfelder Str. 45 D-40724 Hilden %I (+49) 2103 87011 (Laser/CNC) %I (+49) 2103 240 415 (PLC) I (+49) 2103 87 160 (Laser/CNC) I (+49) 2103 242 153 (PLC) GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation Deutschland Bensheimer Str. 61 D-65428 Russelsheim 4 (+49) 6142 357600 I (+49) 6142 357611 GmbH CZECH REPUBLIC GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. c/o GETSCO Inc. Husova 5 CZ-110 00 Praha 1 4 (+420) 22440 1284 I (+420) 22440 1284 GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Bernhauser StraBe 45 D-73765 Neuhausen %I (+49) 7158 187 I (+49) 7158 187 455 I (+49) 7158 187 466 a.d.F 400 (CNC) (PLC)
GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Otto-Schmerbach-Str. 20 D-091 17 Chemnitz 4 (+49) 371 8448 113 (CNC) %I (+49) 371 8448 114 (PLC) I (+49) 371 8448 115 GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB Hammarbacken 4 S-l 9149 Sollentuna 4 (+46) 8 444 5520 I (+46) 8 444 5521 ITALY GE Power Controls Italia S.p.a Via Tortona 27 I-201 44 Milan0 4 (+39) 2 4242 280 (PLC) I (+39) 2 4242 511 (PLC) SPAIN GE Power Controls Iberica S.A. Calle Miiio, S/N E-08223 Terrassa (Barcelona) %I (+34) 3 736 58 28 (PLC) I (+34) 3 783 45 82 (PLC) UNITED KINGDOM GE Fanuc Automation (UK) Ltd. Unit 1 - Mill Square Featherstone Road Wolverton Mill South Milton Keynes MK12 5BZ %I (+44) 1908 84 4000 I (+44) 1908 84 4001
01/98
ITALY GE Fanuc Automation Italia S.r.1. Piazza Tirana 24/4B I-201 44 Milan0 %I (+39) 2 417 176 (CNC) I (+39) 2 419 669 (CNC) SPAIN GE Fanuc Automation Espaiia S.A. Poligono Industrial Olaso Calle Olaso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11 E-20870 Elgoibar %I (+34) 43 744 450 (CNC) I (+34) 43 744 421 (CNC) SWITZERLAND GE Fanuc Automation Filiale Suisse/Niederlassung Schweiz MullerstraBe 3 CH-2562 Port %I (+41) 32 332 87 00 (CNC) %I (+41) 32 332 87 04 (PLC) I (+41) 32 332 87 01 (CNC) I (+41) 32 332 87 05 (PLC)
TECHNICAL REPORT (MANUAL)
NO.TMN 98/
Date1998 General Manager of Software Laboratory FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (For personal computer)
1. Communicate this report to: Your information only GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON Machine tool builder Sales agency End user 2. Summary for Sales Documents
3. Notice This manual describes the additional functions of FAPT LADDER for personal computer 4. Attached Document Drawing B-66131E/05-5 (1/8 to 8/8) No.
IDE V.G.M
Original section of issue Manager Chief Person in Charge
FANUC
FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (For personal computer)
TYPE OF APPLIED TECHNICAL DOCUMENTS
Name Spec.No./Ed.
FAPT LADDER OPERATORS MANUAL (For personal computer) B-66131E/05
SUMMARY OF CHANGE
Group
Name/Outline The system of 3.5-inch FD version has been added. Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of Windows NT4.0.
New, Add, Correct, Delete Add.
Applicable Date July 1998
Basic Function Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice Correction Another
TITLE
FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (FOR PERSONAL COMPUTER) 01

EDIT
98.06.22
DATE
Hanaoka Additioanl 3.5-inch FD version

DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW.NO.
B-66131E/05-5
SHEET
CUST.
1/8
FAPT LADDER OPERATORS SUPPLEMENTARY MANUAL (For personal computer)
Contents
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. OUTLINE ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................................ .................................................................................... ....................................................3 ....................3 APPLIED SOFTWARE ................................................................ ................................................................................................ .............................................................................................. ..............................................................3 ..............................3 ADDITION OF SYSTEM SYSTEM OF 3.5-INCH FD VERSION ................................................................ ........................................................................... ...........................................3 ...........3 WORKING UNDER A COMMAND PROMPT OF A FULL SCREEN OF WINDOWS NT4.0 .............4 .............4 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE ................................................................ ................................................................................................ ................................................................................ ................................................6 ................6
TITLE

EDIT
98.06.22
DATE

DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW.NO.
B-66131E/05-5
SHEET
CUST.
2/8
1. Outline
The following specification and function have been added to the PMC programming software FAPT LADDER for personal computer. The system of 3.5-inch FD version . Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of Windows NT 4.0. This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other points (existing functions and operation, etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items FAPT LADDER B-66131E Existing functions and OPERATORS MANUAL operation for FAPT LADDER
2. Applied Software
The additional functions described herein apply to the following software. FAPT LADDER for IBM-PC/AT series (3.5-inch FD) Software Series Version PMC-L/M/P system A08B-9201-J500#EN07 08.0 PMC-N/NA system A08B-9201-J501#EN07 07.0 PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB/PA/QC system A08B-9201-J502#EN07 09.0 PMC-L module A08B-9201-J600#EN07 06.0 PMC-M module A08B-9201-J601#EN07 07.0 PMC-M(MMC) module A08B-9201-J602#EN07 06.0 PMC-SA/PA module A08B-9201-J603#EN07 05.3 PMC-SB/SC module A08B-9201-J604#EN07 07.1 PMC-QC module A08B-9201-J605#EN07 02.3 PMC-NB module A08B-9201-J606#EN07 03.1 FAPT LADDER for PC98 series (3.5-inch FD) (Note) Software Series Version PMC-L/M/P system A08B-9200-J500#JP07 06.3 PMC-N/NA system A08B-9200-J501#JP07 06.3 PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB/PA/QC system A08B-9200-J502#JP07 08.9 PMC-L module A08B-9200-J600#JP07 06.0 PMC-M module A08B-9200-J601#JP07 07.0 PMC-M(MMC) module A08B-9200-J602#JP07 06.0 PMC-SA/PA module A08B-9200-J603#JP07 05.3 PMC-SB/SC module A08B-9200-J604#JP07 07.1 PMC-QC module A08B-9200-J605#JP07 02.3 PMC-NB module A08B-9200-J606#JP07 03.1 (Note) These FD are the 1.44MB format FD. If the machine can not read the 1.44MB format FD, these FD are not available for the machine.
3. Addition of system of 3.5-inch FD version

The 3.5-inch FD version has been added to the PMC programming software FAPT
TITLE

EDIT
98.06.22
DATE

DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW.NO.
B-66131E/05-5
SHEET
CUST.
3/8
LADDER for personal computer. Refer to the 2. Applied Software about kinds of software of 3.5-inch FD version.
4. Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of Windows NT4.0

(Replace 2.1 Operating Environment) 2.1 Operating Envaironment To use the software, the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied. Before installing the software, check these requirements. Conventional memory Hard Disk OS IBM PC/AT NEC PC9801 Free area of 500K bytes or more is required (Note1) (Note2). About 3M bytes is required for installing the system (Note3). PC-DOS Version 3.3 or later MS-DOS Version 3.1 or later Windows95 (MS-DOS mode) Windows NT 4.0Command Prompt of full screen EPSON VP1000 NEC PR201H Epson VP1000Note 4 A LIM type EMS (expanded memory specification) memory board may be required depending on the PMC model and the size of a sequence program to be created. For details, see 2.1.1. The EGA graphic interface is . required
Printer EMS Others
(Note 1) If the standerd memory size of the machine is insufficient, memory expansion is required. (Note 2) Even if the machine has 640K-byte memory, the memory may not be large enough when an installed driver, for example, uses a large memory space. The size of free space in conventional memory can be checked with the MS-DOS command CHKDSK. (Note 3) In addition, an area for storing sequence program data is required. (Note 4) To use the Epson VP1000 with an NEC PC9801, a setting file modification is required. For details, see Section 1.2 in Part . (Replace 2.1.2 IBM PC/AT operating environment) (Present) (1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT (2)Using EMS
TITLE

EDIT
98.06.22
DATE

DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW.NO.
B-66131E/05-5
SHEET
CUST.
4/8
(Correct) (1) CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT (Note) Windows NT4.0 uses CONFIG.NT instead of CONFIG.SYS. (2)Using EMS (Note) Above setting is not necessay for Windows NT4.0. (Add after 2.2 Installation Procedure) Note 3) When you install the program of the system or module under Windows NT 4.0, you must enter commands under a Command Prompt of a full screen of Windows NT 4.0. The Command Prompt Window appears when you select the [Start] menu and choose the [Command Prompt] from the [Programs]. If the Command Prompt Window is not full screen display, press ALT+ENTER keys to switch to full screen display. (Replace a part of 3 ACTIVATION) (Present) (1) Activation method [Operation] Activate FAPT LADDER with the following commands: B: >A: A: >CD FLADDER A: FLADDER> FLADDER
(Note 1) Before starting up FAPT LADDER, change the current drive and current directory to the drive and directory in which the system file exists . If FAPT LADDER is started up with path designation, or by specifying different directory as the current directory, FAPT LADDER may malfunction. (Correct) (1) Activation method [Operation] Activate FAPT LADDER with the following commands: B: >A: A: >CD FLADDER A: FLADDER> FLADDER
(Note )
(Note 1) (Note 2)
(Note 1) When you install the program of the system or module under Windows NT 4.0, you must enter the commands under a Command Prompt of a full screen of
TITLE

EDIT
98.06.22
DATE

DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW.NO.
B-66131E/05-5
SHEET
CUST.
5/8
Windows NT 4.0. The Command Prompt Window appears when you select the [Start] menu and choose the [Command Prompt] from the [Programs]. If the Command Prompt Window is not in full screen display mode, press ALT+ENTER keys to switch to full screen display. (Note 2) Before starting up FAPT LADDER, change the current drive and current directory to the drive and directory in which the system file exists. If FAPT LADDER is started up with path designation, or by specifying different directory as the current directory, FAPT LADDER may malfunction.
5. Software Version Table

(Replace a part of APPNDIX 9 SOFTWARE VERSION TABLE) Combination of diverse system floppy disks (1) Software -JXXX Combinations of versions 03.0 PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB 502 01.0 03.6 02.0 /PA/QC 04.0 03.0 PMC-N/NA 501 01.1 04.8 03.1 02.3 03.0 04.0 02.0 PMC-L/M/P 500 01.1 04.8 01.12 02.3
04.0 06.0
TITLE

EDIT
98.06.22
DATE

DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW.NO.
B-66131E/05-5
SHEET
CUST.
6/8
Combination of diverse system floppy disks (2) Software -JXXX Combinations of versions PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB 502 06.1 06.2 06.3 06.4 /PA/QC PMC-N/NA 501 05.0 06.1 06.2
06.3 07.0 (Note2) PMC-L/M/P 500 05.0 06.1 06.2 06.3 08.0 (Note3) (Note1) 09.0 is for IBM PC/AT. If NEC PC98 series, this field is 07.008.9. (Note2) 07.0 is for IBM PC/AT. If NEC PC98 series, this field is 06.3. (Note3) 08.0 is for IBM PC/AT. If NEC PC98 series, this field is 06.3.
07.0 09.0 (Note1)
Combinations of system floppy disks and module floppy disks (1) Software -JXXX Combinations of versions PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB 502 01.1 02.0 03.0 04.0 /PA/QC 03.6 04.2 SA/PA MODULE 603 01.0 02.0 02.1 03.0 (PMC-SA1/SA2/SA3 03.4 /PA1/PA3) SB/SC MODULE 04.0 604 01.0 02.0 03.0 03.1 04.4 (PMC-SB/SB2/SB3 03.2 /SB4/SB5/SB6/SC /SC3/SC4) QC MODULE 605 (PMC-QC) NB MODULE 606 (PMC-NB/NB2)
05.0 06.0 04.0 04.5 04.6 01.0
TITLE

EDIT
98.06.22
DATE

DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW.NO.
B-66131E/05-5
SHEET
CUST.
7/8
Combinations of system floppy disks and module floppy disks (2) Software -JXXX Combination of versions PMC-SA/SB/SC/NB 502 06.1 06.2 08.0 08.3 08.5 /PA/QC 07.1 08.2 08.4 08.7
05.0 05.1 05.2 SA/PA MODULE 603 04.1 04.2 04.4 (PMC-SA1/SA2/SA3 /PA1/PA3) 604 04.7 04.8 06.0 06.1 07.0 07.1 SB/SC MODULE 05.0 (PMC-SB/SB2/SB3 /SB4/SB5/SB6/SC (Note2) /SC3/SC4) QC MODULE 605 01.1 01.2 02.0 02.1 02.2 02.3 (PMC-QC) 02.0 02.1 03.0 03.1 NB MODULE 606 01.0 01.1 01.2 (PMC-NB/NB2) (Note1) 09.0 is for IBM PC/AT. If NEC PC98 series, this field is 08.808.9. (Note2) When using PMC-SB4/SC4, install the PMC-SB/SC MODULE floppy disk(-J604) at least of all installation.
08.8 09.0 (Note1) 05.3
TITLE

EDIT
98.06.22
DATE

DESIG. DESCRIPTION
DRAW.NO.
B-66131E/05-5
SHEET
CUST.
8/8

Fanuc Fapt For PC Operator

Încărcat de

Informații document

Descriere originală:

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Fanuc Fapt For PC Operator

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

FAPT Ladder for PC

Warnings and notices for this publication

INSTALLATION 2.1 Operating 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.2

................................................... .......................................... Environment environment environment ............... ........................... ._f .............

1-5 1- 6 1- 7 l-10 l-11

IBM PC/AT operating Procedure

BASICOPERATION 4.1 4.2 4.3

l-17 l-17 l-19 l-21

.................................................... ..................................................... Title data editing ........................................ ...................................

Ladder diagram editing

System parameter editing

.................................................... ................................................. ............................................. set function .............

Compilation 5.3.1 5.3.2

(PMCRAlRA3/RB3/RB4RB5/RB6/RC3!RC4/NB!NB2) 5.3.3 5.3.4 Changing the Order of Subprograms .........................

5.3.5 5.3.6 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.5 Link

l-119 1-122 1-124 1-128 131

-MODELB) 56.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.7 input/Output Transfer

to and from PMC-R series/PAl/PA3/NB!QC in the personal computer format)

Memory card interface

+ 3.5 floppy disk (P-G format)

Mnemonic 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . of a source program to a mnemonic of a mnemonic file format file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conversion Conversion Mnemonic

file to a source program

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is selected when setting a model

Sample mnemonic Sample mnemonic

files (single-format) files (all-format)

The note if the step sequence User batch file execution

1. COMMON 1.1 1.l .l 1.1.2

Function for Transferring Command

input during startup settings

1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.1.7 1.1.8 1.1.9 1.2

and receive data and messages and handling

Convert the PMC Type of Sequence 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 Converting

Convert with signal address converter Using data in a sequence

program for another program

Standard Symbol Data Changing 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3

......................................... ................................... name ..........................

Printer Output Format

the paper selection

Setting the top margin

.................................... the LADDER net

Setting the spacing between

2-19 2 - 19 2 - 20 2 - 20 .... 2-21 2-21 2 - 21 2 - 22 2-22 2-22 2 - 23 2-23 2-23

................ ................. information

Setting the cross-reference Specifying Specifying

list readiwrite list linefeed

the cross-reference the cross-reference

list page break ...............................

FUNCTIONS 3-l 3-l 3- 1 3- 1 3- 2 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-6 3- 6 3- 9 3- 9 3 - 10

OVERVIEW 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

...................................................... ....................................... .........................

Creating a Step Sequence 3.2.1 3.2.2

..................... of the step sequence ........................... Creating a step sequence program

1 DATA TRANSFER 2 FUNCTION

.................................. THE PMC-L/M WITH RAM ............

Al - 1 A2 - 1 A3 - 1 ONLY) ............ ......... NB, AND QC) A4 - 1 A5 - 1 A6 - 1 A7............... 1

3 ERROR MESSAGES 4 MODULAR

...................................... (PMC-RA3/RB3/RC3 PROCEDURE (FOR THE FS20)

5 BOOT SYSTEM 6 MEMORY 7 CAUTIONS